JP7131648B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on a display screen. In this type of game machine, for example, when a game ball passes through an operation hole provided in a game area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state. At the same time, the variable display of the pattern is started. When the player wins the lottery, a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-190511

In recent years, various efforts have been made to raise the level of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the level of attention paid to games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

The present invention
a pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of pattern rows on a display screen;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
grant determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the obtained information storage means corresponds to a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result;
Prior to the grant determination by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is performed. Displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination result of (1) and ending the variable display of the pattern is regarded as one of the game rounds, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is used for each game round game cycle control means for controlling the pattern display means so as to perform variable display of patterns;
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination is stored before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination. a destination identifying means for identifying in timing;
When the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result, in the game round performed before the game round related to the special information to be identified by the destination identification means, the destination identification special notification means for performing special notification corresponding to the identification result of the means;
with
The special notification means is
Execution means capable of executing a plurality of special notifications in one game cycle for one piece of special information for which the predetermined identification result has been identified by the destination identification means;
Among the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, based on the number of special information to be the target of the grant determination before the special information that triggered the special notification, in one game round means for setting the execution number of the special notification to be executed by the execution means;
and
The execution means is capable of executing a plurality of the special notifications in a predetermined game cycle after the game cycle being executed when the special information that triggered the special notification is acquired. It is characterized by:

It is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game .

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. It is a front view of a game board unit. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the game board unit disassembled for each main configuration; FIG. It is a perspective view showing the configuration of the game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a schematic diagram showing the positional relationship of the game board and the effect unit. It is a schematic diagram showing the positional relationship of the game board and the effect unit. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the prize-winning process for operation openings performed by the MPU of the main controller. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing a game round control process executed by the MPU of the main control device; It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration related to display effect; FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining a mode of variable display of symbols; It is a schematic diagram for explaining a re-variation production. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a re-variation production. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining a suspension notice effect; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining a suspension notice effect; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining a fan effect; It is a flowchart which shows the variable display control process performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation start performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process for big hits performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. (a) A schematic diagram for explaining a final stop line table, (b) a schematic diagram for explaining a re-variation table. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process for reach generation performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a stop result table for non-effective alignment effect; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process for normal deviations performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during fluctuation executed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the end of fluctuation performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for reservation|holding notices performed by MPU of a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing pending command setting processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows suspension notice control processing performed by MPU of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the pending|holding notice setting process performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice setting process for big hits performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process for out which is performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process for reservation|holding notices performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. (a) A schematic diagram for explaining a stop result table for normal hold notice, (b) A schematic diagram for explaining a stop result table for special hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for replacement performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result correction process performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st modification processing performed by MPU of a production control device. It is a schematic diagram showing a correction table. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd correction processing performed in MPU of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd correction process performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice setting process for out which is performed by MPU of the production|presentation control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process for reservation|holding notices performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining a step effect in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice setting process for big hits performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process for out which is performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process for reservation|holding notices performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process for reach performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for replacement performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd correction processing performed in MPU of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd correction process performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining a double advance notice effect; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining a double advance notice effect; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining a double advance notice effect; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining a double advance notice effect; It is a flowchart which shows the duplication notice setting process performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the correction process for duplication notices performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram showing a correction table. It is the schematic for demonstrating the number of pending|holding information, and the relationship of stage production|presentation. It is a schematic diagram for explaining each pending notice effect in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a reach display. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining a middle symbol row stop result information table; It is a schematic diagram for explaining the development point to super reach. 10 is a flow chart showing medium symbol row control processing during reach, which is executed by the MPU of the display control device. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process for reservation|holding notices performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram showing an advance notice type lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process for reach performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for the 1st reservation|holding notice performed by MPU of the production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for the 2nd reservation|holding notice performed by MPU of the production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for the 3rd reservation|holding notice performed by MPU of the production|presentation control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the stop position of the ready-to-win pattern, the development point to super reach, and the pending notice. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the stop position of the ready-to-win pattern, the development point to super reach, and the pending notice. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing various effect pattern tables in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the stop position of the ready-to-win pattern, the development point of the super-to-win, and the pending notice. It is a front view showing a game board in the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during fluctuation executed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ball passages performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. FIG. 21 is a front view showing the configuration of a movable accessory device according to a seventh embodiment; It is a front view which shows the structure of a movable accessory device. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the first movable accessory; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining the configuration of gears; It is a schematic diagram showing the positional relationship of the upper and lower movable accessories. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the upper and lower movable accessories and the pattern of the display screen. It is a schematic diagram showing a pattern stop mode in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a pattern stop mode in the ninth embodiment. (a) A schematic diagram showing a game board in the tenth embodiment, (b) A partial enlarged view of the game board. (a) A rear view of the game board, (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game board and the movable accessory device. 97(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game board and the movable accessory device in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a partial sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 97(a). It is a schematic diagram showing an operation mode of a movable accessory device.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with the outer frame 11 on the island facilities of the game hall.

The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 .

As shown in FIG. 2 , the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A front door frame 14 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the game machine. It's becoming In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 rotates on the left side when viewed from the front of the game machine, and rotates on the right side. It is rotatable backward as the moving tip side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the end on the rotating front end side, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 . A window opening 56 is formed in the front door frame 14 so that substantially the entire game area, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front. The window opening 56 has a substantially elliptical shape and is fitted with a transparent window panel 57 . Around the window opening 56, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A light emitting part 58 is provided above the window opening 56 as part of various lamp parts. Speaker units 59 are provided on both the left and right sides of the light emitting unit 58 to output sound effects and the like according to the game state.

Below the window opening 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 that bulge forward are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 61a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 61, and a lower plate 62a that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 62. As shown in FIG. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 62a has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper tray 61a.

A firing handle 55 is provided on the right side of the lower swelling portion 62 so as to protrude forward. A game ball is shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 51 (see FIG. 2) mounted on the lower part of the inner frame 13 by operating the shooting handle 55 . The game ball shooting mechanism 51 is provided with a shooting solenoid 54 and a ball feeding device 53 as driving units. A game ball is shot every 6 seconds.

<Game board unit 90>
A game board unit 90 is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 . As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 90 includes a substantially flat game board 100 facing the window panel 57 through a central opening formed in the inner frame 13 (resin base 21), and It has an attached back block 160 (see FIG. 3). Here, the game board unit 90 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board unit 90, and FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board unit 90. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back block 160 has a pattern display device 161 and a movable accessory device 162 that constitute a production unit, and a base body 163 (see FIG. 3) on which the production unit is mounted. By fixing the base body 163 to the game board 100, the game board 100 and the rear block 160 are integrated. The game board 100 constituting the game board unit 90 is formed using a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material (specifically, polycarbonate resin). ) is visible (see the dashed line in FIG. 4). In FIG. 5, illustration of the back block 160 other than the production unit is omitted.

<Game board 100>
Here, the game board 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the game board 100, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the game board 100. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 4, an inner rail member 101 and an outer rail member 102 are attached to the front surface of the game board 100 for guiding game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 51 to the upper part of the game board 100 . These rail members 101 and 102 are arc-shaped, and a substantially circular area defined by the rail members 101 and 102 is the game area 103 described above. This game area 103 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window opening 56 (through the window panel 57). Further, the symbol display device 161 is arranged so that the display screen G thereof is positioned substantially in the center of the game area 103, and the visibility of the display screen G through the game board 100 is ensured.

A portion of the game board 100 where the game area 103 is formed is formed with a plurality of large and small through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. , a through gate 116 and a center frame 130 are provided.

Supplementally explaining the arrangement of each member, the center frame 130 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 103 so as to surround the display screen G of the pattern display device 161 from above and below. Below the center frame 130, an operation port 115 is arranged, and further below that, a variable winning device 114 is arranged. In addition, through gates 116 are arranged on both left and right sides of the center frame 130, and general prize winning openings 113 are arranged on both lower sides of the game area 103 (more specifically, three are arranged on the left side and one is arranged on the right side). ing). When a game ball enters the general winning opening 113, the variable winning device 114, and the operating opening 115, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown), and based on the detection result, the upper tray 61a (or the lower tray 62a in some cases) Prize balls are paid out.

In addition, a special figure display unit 117 and a normal figure display unit 118 are provided on the upper right side of the game area 103, and an out port 119 is provided at the lower end of the game area 103. Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 119. - 特許庁In addition, in the game area 103, a large number of nails 120, pinwheels 121, etc. are arranged in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of game balls. Since the polycarbonate resin forming the game board 100 has a relatively high elasticity, when the game ball collides with the nail 120 or the like driven into the surface or when the angle of the nail 120 is adjusted, the game board 100 may be damaged. The board 100 is configured such that cracks and the like are less likely to occur. Also, the length of the screw for fixing the variable prize winning device 114 and the operation port 115 to the game board 100 and the length of the nail 120 driven into the game board 100 are more than the thickness of the game board 100. is also smaller, and the screws and nails 120 are prevented from protruding to the back side of the game board 100.例文帳に追加

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area 103 after passing through the opening, but also the game ball is discharged from the game area 103 after passing through the opening. Also included is a mode in which it is not discharged from. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball entering the out hole 119, the game ball entering the general winning hole 113, the variable winning device 114, the operating hole 115 or the through gate 116 , also expressed as a prize.

The game board 100 is provided with a special figure display section 117 having built-in red, green, and blue three-color LEDs. This special figure display unit 117 is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and with the winning of the operation port 115 as a trigger, the light emission color is switched in a predetermined order. Specifically, red light is turned on with the winning of a prize in the operation port 115 as a trigger, and when a predetermined time elapses in that state, the emission color is switched to green light. Then, when the predetermined time elapses while the green light is turned on, the emission color is switched to blue light. After that, the switching of the luminescent colors is repeated in the order of red, green, and blue until the time to stop switching the luminescent colors is reached. As a result, red, green, and blue are repeatedly displayed in this order on the special figure display unit 117 . When the jackpot is won, red or green is finally stopped and displayed, and when the jackpot is not won, blue is finally stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage are set, and when a relatively advantageous jackpot is won, the display is finally stopped in red, and a relatively disadvantageous jackpot is displayed. If you win, it will finally stop and display in green.

The variable prize winning device 114 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win prizes when the internal lottery wins the transition to the open/close execution mode. . Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot is won. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. As an opening mode of the variable prize winning device 114, the variable prize winning device 114 is repeated with a plurality of rounds (eg 15 rounds) as the upper limit, with the elapse of a predetermined time (eg 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number (eg 10) as one round. Open ones are common. The display of the result of the internal lottery in the special figure display unit 117 is continued until the internal lottery is further performed thereafter. That is, during the opening/closing execution mode, the display of the result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode is continued.

It should be noted that the closed state of the variable prize winning device 114 does not necessarily mean that prize winning is impossible, and may be a state in which winning is more difficult than in the open state. Taking these circumstances into account, it is also possible to call the open state the "first state" and the closed state the "second state" in which ball entry is more difficult than in the first state.

In addition, the display mode in the special figure display unit 117 is not limited to the above mode. A display configuration or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed may be adopted.

The game board 100 is provided with a normal figure display section 118 in which LED lamps emitting two colors of red and green are built. This general/universal figure display unit 118 is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and is triggered by the winning (passing) of the game ball through the through gate 116, and the light emission color is switched in a predetermined order. Specifically, when the game ball wins the through gate 116, lighting of the red light and lighting of the green light are alternately performed. As a result, red and green are alternately displayed on the normal map display unit 118 . Then, when the red color is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory associated with the operation port 115 is configured to be in an open state for a predetermined time.

The center frame 130 is composed of a roof frame 131 forming an upper portion of the center frame 130 and a stage frame 140 forming a lower portion of the center frame 130 . The roof frame 131 and stage frame 140 are made of transparent material such as acrylic resin. The roof frame 131 is arranged above the display screen G, the stage frame 140 is arranged below the display screen G, and the display screen G is vertically sandwiched between the frames 131 and 140 when viewed from the front of the game machine.

The roof frame 131 has a groove shape that is opened rearward as a whole, and is fixed to the game board 100 to close the rearward opening and form a ball passage 134 on the front side. The ball passages 134 on the front side are formed on the left and right with openings 135 formed in the upper part of the roof frame 131 as entrances. The roof frame 131 is opened downward, and game balls passing through the front side ball passage 134 fall downward. In addition, the upper surface of the roof frame 131 is inclined downward to both the left and right sides. Depending on the inclination of the display screen G, it is distributed to the left and right of the display screen G, or flows down.

Below the roof frame 131 of the game board 100, ball receiving portions 132 projecting forward are formed on the left and right sides. The ball receiving portion 132 plays a role of receiving from below the game balls distributed to the left and right by the upper surface of the roof frame 131 and flowing down. A through hole is formed in the game board 100 in the front-rear direction so as to communicate with the ball receiving part 132, and the game ball received by the ball receiving part 132 is led out to the rear side of the game board 100 through the through hole.

As shown in FIG. 7, the stage frame 140 is composed of a front stage member 141 and a rear stage member 142, which are assembled through through holes formed in the game board 100. As shown in FIG. The front stage member 141 is open frontward and rearward, whereas the rear stage member 142 has a groove shape that is open forward as a whole. The left and right open portions of the rear stage member 142 are closed by the back surface of the game board 100 to form a back ball passage 143 . The left and right upstream portions of the far side ball passage 143 communicate with the through holes from the ball receiving portion 132, respectively, and the game balls received by the ball receiving portion 132 are led out to the far side ball passage 143. be. In addition, the front stage member 141 and the rear stage member 142 form a stage 144 on which the game ball passing through the back ball passage 143 rolls in the horizontal direction.

Here, the ball receiving portion 132 is arranged outside the roof frame 131 when viewed from the center of the game board 100 (see FIG. 4). In other words, the game ball drawn out from the front side ball passage 134 of the roof frame 131 does not reach the ball receiving portion 132 even if it falls substantially vertically as it is. On the other hand, a large number of nails 120 are planted under the stage 144, and the game ball drawn out from the front side ball passage 134 bounces off the nails 120 planted under the stage 144, It is also possible to jump onto the stage 144 .

A rear guide portion 145 is formed in the center of the stage 144 , and a front guide portion 146 is formed so as to sandwich the rear guide portion 145 . The game ball that has been sufficiently decelerated and reaches the rear guide portion 145 is guided to the guide portion 147 formed on the rear stage member 142 and discharged from the guide portion 147 into the game area 103 . In this case, the outlet of the guiding portion 147 is positioned vertically above the operating port 115, and there is no obstructive member such as the nail 120 provided between the two. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the guiding portion 147 can easily enter the operating hole 115 . On the other hand, the game ball that has been sufficiently decelerated and reached the front guide portion 146 is discharged into the game area 103 as it is.

Briefly explaining the movement of the game balls in the center frame 130, some of the game balls distributed to the left and right by the roof frame 131 are received by either the left or right ball receiving portion 132 and reach the inner ball passage 143. . The game ball reaching the far side ball passage 143 passes through the far side ball passage 143 and reaches the stage 144.例文帳に追加In addition, the game ball entering the front side ball passage 134 from the opening 135 of the roof frame 131 passes through the front side ball passage 134 and falls on the front surface of the display screen G, and collides with the nail 120 to reach the stage 144. to reach The game ball that has reached the stage 144 rolls left and right on the stage 144 . As a result of rolling, the game ball that has reached the rear guide portion 145 is guided toward the operation port 115 by passing through the guide portion 147 . On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the front guide portion 146 is discharged into the game area 103 without being guided toward the operation opening 115 .

In the above configuration, a game ball launched into the game area 103 and entering the general winning hole 113, the variable winning device 114, and the operation hole 115 passes through the through hole formed in the game board 100, led to. The variable prize winning device 114, the operation opening 115, and the stage frame 140 of the center frame 130 protrude backward from the back surface of the game board 100 (see FIG. 6). A predetermined space is secured between 100 and the production unit (symbol display device 161 and movable accessory device 162) to avoid interference between the rearward projecting variable winning device 114 and the like and the production unit. .

5 and 8, the production units (symbol display device 161 and movable accessory device 162) mounted on the back block 160 will be described below.

<Back block 160>
As shown in FIG. 8, the pattern display device 161 and the movable accessory device 162 are arranged side by side such that the movable accessory device 162 is on the front side and the pattern display device 161 is on the rear side. That is, from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the game board 100, the movable accessory device 162, and the symbol display device 161 are arranged in that order. The pattern display device 161 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display contents of the display screen G are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. In the symbol display device 161, the variable display of symbols is started based on the winning to the operation port 115. - 特許庁That is, when the variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 117, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 161 accordingly.

The pattern display device 161 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be a vessel.

As shown in FIG. 5, the pattern display device 161 is a so-called wide liquid crystal, and its display screen G is horizontally long. The movable accessory device 162 has four movable accessories 170 to 173 arranged at the four corners of the display screen G. FIG. That is, the movable accessory device 162 includes the first movable accessory 170 arranged in the upper right part of the display screen G, the second movable accessory 171 arranged in the lower right part of the display screen G, and the upper left part of the display screen G and a fourth movable role 173 placed in the lower left part of the display screen G.

As shown in FIG. 9, each of the movable accessories 170 to 173 has a blocking position (blocking state, first position) that overlaps the display screen G in the front-back direction, and a non-blocking position that does not overlap the display screen G in the front-back direction (non-blocking position). state, second position), and can be individually moved. Since the movable accessories 170 to 173 are made of a colored and opaque synthetic resin material, by arranging the movable accessories 170 to 173 in a shielding position overlapping the display screen G, the display contents of the display screen G behind it can be changed. Visibility becomes invisible or difficult.

The movable accessory device 162 is provided with drive units 170a to 173a corresponding to the respective movable accessories 170 to 173 on a one-to-one basis. The drive units 170a to 173a are electrically connected to a performance control device 82, which will be described later, and operate the movable accessories 170 to 173 by driving based on drive signals from the performance control device 82. The effect control device 82 drives and controls the driving units 170a to 173a in accordance with the game state, and effects by changing the visible range of the display contents of the display screen G behind the player.

As for the movable accessory device 162, it is sufficient if the visible range on the display screen G can be changed. In other words, it is sufficient if the display screen G and the movable accessories 170 to 173 can be moved between the first position where the overlapping area in the front-rear direction is large and the second position where the overlapping area is smaller than that.

In this way, the movable accessory device 162 is arranged between the game board 100 and the pattern display device 161, and the area sandwiched between the game board 100 and the pattern display device 161 is the operation area of the movable accessories 170-173. It's becoming As described above, the game board 100 is formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the visibility of the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the pattern display device 161, which are the members behind it, is ensured. Therefore, in the area overlapping the movable accessories 170 to 173 in the front-rear direction on the game board 100, no through-holes are formed to ensure the visibility of the movable accessories 170 to 173. Only through holes for leading out spheres are formed). In this case, no through-hole is formed to ensure visibility, and the game board 100 is always interposed between the game area 103 and the movable accessories 170-173. As a result, while suppressing the deterioration of the visibility of the movable accessories 170 to 173, the game ball collides with the movable accessories 170 to 173 to change the trajectory of the game ball, and the movable accessories 170 to 173 This avoids the inconvenience that the action of 173 is hindered by the game ball.

In particular, in a gaming machine such as this pachinko machine 10, in which a player can obtain a privilege by making a game ball that flows down the gaming area enter a predetermined opening, irregular If the trajectory of the falling ball is changed due to the collision of the game ball with the accessory or the like that performs a strange action, the player may have a sense of distrust in the game. Therefore, in general, in the case of a configuration that includes accessories that perform irregular actions, a configuration that operates outside the game area on the front surface of the game board, or a through hole is provided in front of the liquid crystal screen on the game board A general configuration is such that a center frame is incorporated in the through-hole, game balls are restricted from entering an area inside the center frame, and the accessory or the like is operated within the area inside the center frame. In this case, in the former case, since the size of the gaming machine is limited, if an attempt is made to secure an action area for accessories, etc., the game area becomes narrower by that amount. A problem may occur in that the movement area of objects or the like becomes narrow. In the latter case, the size of the center frame has also tended to increase as the size of the liquid crystal screen has increased in recent years. On the other hand, by adopting the structure of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to avoid the collision between the game balls and the movable accessories 170 to 173 regardless of how the movable accessories 170 to 173 move. In addition, since the game ball can also flow down in the area overlapping the action areas of the movable accessories 170 to 173 in the game area 103 in the front-rear direction, the game area is not pressed. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to sufficiently secure the movement range of the game ball and to improve the performance function by the action of the accessory.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the base body 163 of the game board unit 90), there are a main control device 81 for main control of the game, and a voice, lamp display and pattern display device 161. A production control device 82 that controls the display control device is installed.

The substrate box 71a of the main controller 81 is provided with various trace means for leaving traces of its opening. As a trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box 71a are inseparably connected, and a structure of a connecting portion (crimped portion) that requires breaking of a predetermined portion upon separation, and an adhesive layer to be adhered when peeling off. A configuration is adopted in which a sealing seal that remains and leaves a trace of being peeled off is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies.

The back pack unit 15 is arranged so as to cover the main control device 81 and the performance control device 82 from the back side of the inner frame 13 . The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 made of transparent synthetic resin, to which a payout mechanism 74 and a controller assembly unit 75 are attached.

The payout mechanism section 74 includes a tank 76 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game arcade are successively replenished, and a payout device 96 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 76 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper tray 61a or the lower tray 62a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. The payout mechanism 74 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power ON and OFF.

The control device assembly unit 75 includes a payout control device 97 having a function of controlling a payout device 96, and a predetermined power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and output, and the game operation associated with the operation of the shooting handle 55 by the player is performed. and a power supply/launch control device 98 that controls the launch of the ball. The payout control device 97 and the power supply/launch control device 98 are arranged so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10 .

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 202 is mounted on a main control board 201 provided in the main controller 81 . The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 202, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 203. It is an element containing a RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. A part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the functions of the ROM 203 and the functions of the RAM 204 may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 202 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211d, and the like. In this case, the power supply/emission control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205 , and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205 . In addition, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211d, a plurality of winning corresponding ball entering portions (payout corresponding ball entering portions) such as the general winning port 113, the variable winning device 114, the operation port 115 and the through gate 116 are provided. A detection sensor is connected, and the MPU 202 of the main control unit 81 determines whether each ball has entered the winning section (ball entry determination). In addition, the MPU 202 executes a jackpot generating lottery based on the winning to the operating port 115 and executes a support generating lottery based on the winning to the through gate 116 .

A power outage monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97 and an effect control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU202. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When the winning to the general winning opening 113 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 114 is specified, 15 are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of game balls is output, and when the winning to the operating port 115 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output.

Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command and an ending command are output to the effect control device 82 . In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various types of information are included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 114a that opens and closes the opening and closing door of the variable winning device 114, an electric accessory drive unit 115a that opens and closes the electric accessory of the operation port 115, a special figure display unit 117, A normal map display unit 118 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 202 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 114a so that the variable winning device 114 is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory of the operation port 115 is won in the open state, the MPU 202 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 115a so that the electric accessory is opened and closed. Moreover, display control of the special figure display part 117 and the normal figure display part 118 which were mentioned by MPU202 is performed.

The blackout monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply/launch controller 98, and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch controller 98, which is a stable 24 volts DC. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81 .

The power supply/launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97 etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. The power/shooting control device 98 is responsible for controlling the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 51, and the game ball shooting mechanism 51 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The performance control device 82 drives and controls the light emitting section 58 and the speaker section 59 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and also controls the display control device 212. .

The display control device 212 executes display control of the pattern display device 161 based on the command input from the effect control device 82 . In this case, the effect control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, determines the variation display pattern of the symbols in the symbol display device 161 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. A lottery is executed for the presence or absence of reach generation and the content of reach performance.

Here, the contents related to the variable display of symbols in each game round will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG.

The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of 9 types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 11(a) to (i)) and data of sub-symbols without numbers. (see FIG. 11(j)) are stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the display screen G of the pattern display device 161 is set with three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower rows. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. On the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged.

Almost the entire display screen G shown in the present embodiment is a variable display area of Z1 to Z3 where the above-mentioned patterns are displayed. It is roughly divided into an area that is covered (hereinafter referred to as a sub-display area Rs) and an area that is not to be shielded (main display area Rm). The left and right sides of the main display region Rm in the variable display direction (horizontal direction) are the sub-display regions Rs. 1/5 and left 1/5) are set as the sub display area Rs.

Supplementary explanation of the relationship between the display screen G and each of the movable roles 170 to 173 is as follows. The display area Rs is difficult or impossible to be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the movable accessories 170 to 173 are arranged in the non-shielded positions, both the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs are visible from the front of the gaming machine.

Since each of the movable accessories 170 to 173 individually moves between the shielding position and the non-shielding position, the left and right sub-display areas Rs can be individually switched between the shielding state and the non-shielding state. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the right sub-display area Rs is referred to as a right sub-display area Rs1, and the left sub-display area Rs is referred to as a left sub-display area Rs2.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), on the display screen G, five symbols are stopped for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 15 symbols of 3×5 are stopped. It's like Of these, in the main display area Rm, 3 symbols are stop-displayed for each pattern row, and a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are stop-displayed. Further, a total of 6 patterns of 1×3×2 are stop-displayed in the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2, respectively. In this pachinko machine 10, 5 effective lines and 6 non-effective lines are set according to the 15 symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen G.

Specifically, five effective lines are set in the main display area Rm, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 is completed, a jackpot animation is displayed as a normal jackpot result or probability variable jackpot result.

The non-effective lines include non-effective lines L6 and L9 set in the sub-display region Rs, and non-effective lines L7, L8, L10 and L11 set so as to straddle the sub-display region Rs and the main display region Rm. It is composed by More specifically, a right non-effective line L6 is set in the right sub-display region Rs1, and a right downward-sloping line L7 and a right-sloping line L8 extend across the right sub-display region Rs1 and the main display region Rm. is set. Further, a left ineffective line L9 is set in the left sub-display region Rs2, and a left downward-sloping line L10 and a left upward-sloping line L11 are set across the left sub-display region Rs2 and the main display region Rm. It is These non-effective lines L6 to L11 are lines used in the performance of the pachinko machine 10, and the game result is notified only by the combinations of symbols stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 (main display area Rm). be.

To explain the positional relationship with each of the movable accessories 170 to 173, under the condition that the first movable accessory 170 on the upper right is placed at the shielding position, the symbol stopped and displayed above the right non-effective line L6, A part of the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle stage is covered with the first movable accessory 170, and visual confirmation of the symbols is hindered. In addition, under the condition that the second movable accessory 171 on the lower left is placed at the shielding position, the pattern stopped and displayed in the lower part of the right non-effective line L6 and part of the pattern stopped and displayed in the middle row are different from each other. It is covered with the two movable accessories 171, and visual confirmation of those patterns is hindered.

In other words, the symbol stopped and displayed in the upper row in the right sub-display area Rs1 becomes visible when the first movable accessory 170 moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position, and the symbol stopped and displayed in the lower row becomes the second movable accessory. The accessory 171 becomes visible when it moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. In addition, the symbol stopped and displayed in the middle stage becomes visible as a whole when the first movable role 170 and the second movable role 171 move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position.

In the left sub-display area Rs2 as well, the symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the movable accessories 172 and 173 have the same positional relationship. The third movable accessory 172 on the upper left moves from the shielded position to the non-shielded position, making it visible, and the pattern stopped and displayed in the lower row is the fourth movable accessory 173 on the lower left that moves from the shielded position to the non-shielded position. This makes it visible. In addition, the symbol stopped and displayed in the middle stage becomes visible as a whole when the third movable role 172 and the fourth movable role 173 move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position.

The relationship between the non-effective lines L6 to L11 and the movable parts 170 to 173 is explained. becomes visible. The right downward line L7 becomes visible when the second movable accessory 171 moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position, and the right upward right line L8 is the first movable accessory 170 moving from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Visible by moving. The left non-effective line L9 becomes visible when the third movable role 172 and the fourth movable role 173 move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. The left downward right line L10 becomes visible when the third movable role 172 moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position, and the left upward right line L11 is the line L11 when the fourth movable role 173 moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Visible by moving.

Considering that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 pattern row), and the middle pattern row Z2 can be called a third pattern row (or a third pattern row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a probability variable jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbols The combination is displayed frozen. Also, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. be.

The pattern display device 161 may arbitrarily display the symbols in any manner, and is not limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows may be set in the vertical direction. In this case, the layout of each of the movable accessories 170 to 173 may be changed in accordance with the number of pattern rows and the changing direction of the patterns.

<About various counters>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 202 of the main control unit 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot generation lottery, the display of the special figure display unit 117, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 161, the setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 118, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the jackpot generation, the jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and the pattern display device 161 deviate and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variation type that determines the display duration time in the special figure display unit 117 and the pattern display device 161 A counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessary product open counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessary product of the operation port 115 is to be in the electric role open state (support state). The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204 . Among these, in the lottery counter buffer 231, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the RAM 204 as acquired information storage means when a prize is won in the operation port 115. stored in the reserved ball storage area 232.

The reserved ball storage area 232 includes a reserved area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3, and a fourth reservation area RE4. Combinations of numerical information of the stored jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 are stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the operation port 115 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area RE2 → the third reservation area Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of RE3→4th reservation area RE4. By providing the four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls into the operation opening 115 are reserved and stored. In addition, the reservation area RE is provided with a reservation number storage area NA, and information for specifying the number of pending storage of winning history to the operation port 115 is stored in the reservation number storage area NA. .

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 117, and the start of one game cycle. At that time, the success or failure determination is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 116. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is made as to whether or not to control the electric role product of the operating port 115 to the electric role open state (support state) based on the stored value of the electric role product opening counter C4.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory of the operation opening 115 are mutually different. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be shot in a similar manner to the game area 103, the electric accessory of the operation opening 115 is in an open state per unit time. A low-frequency support mode (or a low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (or a high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of occurrence is relatively high and low.

In the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state winning in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). , In the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory of the operation port 115 is in the open state is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set. set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric role is won and the open state of the electric accessory of the operation port 115 occurs multiple times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time up to is set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., One display duration in the normal map display unit 118) is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning to the operation port 115 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. When a winning to the operation port 115 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays while suppressing the consumption (investment) of the balls he has. be able to.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state. In addition, the time secured after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and the next electric accessory open lottery is performed (for example, based on the winning of the through gate 116 In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time to be executed) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected than the low-frequency support mode, or the average reserved time is shorter. may be Furthermore, the number of opening times is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured after one electric accessary item opening lottery is performed and the next electric accessary item opening lottery is performed is reduced. Shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the probability of winning, by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions, even if the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode is increased good.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation hole 115. - 特許庁

Random number values for winning a jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area 221 as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 203 . Here, the contents of the success/failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the success/failure table includes the success/failure table (low-probability information group) for the low-probability mode shown in FIG. information group for probability) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode of the lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two, as shown in FIG. 14(a). On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, there are 21 random numbers for winning the jackpot. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserve area RE of the reserve ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation hole 115. - 特許庁

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 222 as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203 . In the distribution table, as shown in FIG. 14B, normal jackpot results (low-probability special game results) and variable jackpot results (high-probability special game results) are set as game result distribution destinations. ing.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the normal jackpot state (low-probability special game state).

The variable probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery results in the win/fail lottery result in winning the big win state and the game shifts to the big win state accordingly. In other words, the probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the probability variable jackpot state (high probability special game state).

In relation to each game state described above, the normal game state refers to a state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to normal jackpot results, and "10 to 29" correspond to probability variable jackpot results.

The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation hole 115. - 特許庁More specifically, it is stored in the reserve area RE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation hole 115 . Then, whether or not to generate reach is determined based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203 . However, in the game round in which the open/close execution mode is entered, the MPU 202 determines whether or not to generate a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Although the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication may be set larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the ready-to-win display (ready-to-win state) is provided with a pattern display device 161 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and in a game cycle in which the variable winning device 114 is in the opening and closing execution mode. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the pattern (picture) is started on the display screen G of the pattern display device 161. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the above-mentioned special display before being displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161, the ready-to-win symbols with the possibility of establishing a combination of the big winning symbols are displayed. It is a display state in which a combination is displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step prior to ending the variable display of symbols, ready-to-win symbols with a possibility of establishing a combination of jackpot symbols are displayed on a preset effective line in the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying a combination, and perform variable display of symbols by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

Referring to FIG. 12, an example of the display mode during the reach display will be described. In the case of the ready-to-win display, the variable display of symbols is first terminated (stopped display) in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the variable display of symbols is terminated (stopped display) in the lower symbol row Z3. In this state, a reach line is formed by stop-displaying main symbols having the same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the middle symbol row Z2 to provide the ready-to-win display. When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the main symbols having the same number as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are displayed. is terminated.

In this embodiment, the reach display is not performed on the non-effective lines L6 to L11. However, the ready-to-win display may also be performed on the non-effective lines L6 to L11.

In addition, in the ready-to-win display, while the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. A ready-to-win effect is produced by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G or substantially the entire main display region Rm after reducing or hiding the combination of the ready-to-win pattern and the ready-to-win pattern. includes those that do Also, when the ready-to-win display is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. may

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 202 determines the variation display time in the special figure display unit 117 and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 161 . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern when the symbol display device 161 starts varying the symbols.

When determining the variable display time in the pattern display device 161, the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variable type counter CS, and the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 are referred to. In addition, in the MPU202, using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the stop result in the special figure display unit 117 is determined, but the ROM203 A stop result table storage area 224 is used.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 81>
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing which are executed in advancing the game in each game round by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 202 executes main processing that is activated upon power-on and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 202 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, it reads the states of various winning detection sensors connected to the main controller 81, determines the states of the winning detection sensors, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204 . In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when those counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 204. FIG.

After that, in step S104, after executing the winning process for the operating port associated with the winning of the operating port 115, in step S105, after executing the winning processing for the through associated with the winning of the through gate 116, this timer End interrupt processing. In the prize-winning process for through, if a prize has been won to the through-gate 116, the number of stored role-things reserved stored in the wire-holding area 233 is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4"). On this condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric role holding area 233.

Here, the winning process for the operation opening in step S104 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the winning process for the operation opening, first, in step S201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the operation opening 115 or not. When the game ball has not won the operation hole 115, the main winning process is terminated as it is. When the game ball has won the operation hole 115, in step S202, the value stored in the reservation number storage area NA of the reservation ball storage area 232 is read, and the start stored in the reservation area RE is stored. It is determined whether or not the number of held balls N is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment).

If the number N of start-holding balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the winning processing is terminated as it is. When the number N of start-holding balls is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S203, and the number N of start-holding balls is incremented (added) by one. In the following step S204, each value (each numerical information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the previous step S103 is stored in the empty reservation area of the reservation area RE. It is stored in the first reserved area among RE1 to RE4, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by one in step S203.

In the subsequent step S205, confirmation processing for reservation notice is executed for executing an effect based on the winning of the game ball in the operation hole 115. - 特許庁Then, in step S206, after execution of setting processing of a hold command for making the performance control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the game ball has won the operation opening 115, the winning for the main operation opening is executed. End the process.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, each process of steps S301 to S306 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S308 and S309 is executed in the remaining time.

In the normal process, in step S301, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97 . In addition, when a production command such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, various holding commands, etc. is set, it is transmitted to the production control device 82. - 特許庁

Next, in step S302, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204 .

In subsequent step S303, various signals from the payout control device 97 connected to the MPU 202 are read. Thereafter, in step S304, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In this game round control processing, big hit determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 161, display control of the special symbol display unit 117, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step S305, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this game state transition processing.

In step S306, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory provided in the operation port 115 is executed. In this electric role support process, numerical information obtained from the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 233 of the RAM 204 is used to determine whether or not the electric role product of the operation port 115 is to be opened. An electric role open lottery is performed, and when the electric role open state is won, the opening/closing process of the electric role product of the operating port 115 is executed. In addition, display control of the general pattern display unit 118 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery.

As already explained, as a form of support by the electric accessory of the operation port 115, a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode are set, and in the game state transition processing of step S305, it is possible to switch to one of the support modes. Migration takes place. In this case, when the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204, the high frequency support mode is set, and when the flag is not stored, the low frequency support mode is set.

In step S306 for electrical support support, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not a high-frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204 . Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory of the operation port 115 is in the open state is set larger than in the case of the low-frequency support mode when the electric role open state is won, Set a long opening time for one time. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the electric role product of the operation port 115 occurs multiple times, the next open state will occur after one open state is completed. The closing time until starting is set to be shorter than the opening time of one time.

Incidentally, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the support mode is forcibly set to the low-frequency support mode even if the high-frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204 .

In subsequent step S307, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process (steps S308 and S309). That is, in step S308, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204 . Further, in step S309, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S306 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, the game round control process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, in the game round control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is in the open/close execution mode, the process after step S402, that is, the game round start process of steps S403 to S405 and the game round progress process of steps S406 to S409 are not executed. End the control process.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the special figure display unit 117 is in the process of variable display. When the special figure display unit 117 is not in the process of variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn start processing of steps S403 to S405. In the game turn start process, first, in step S403, it is determined whether or not the number N of start pending balls is "0". A case where the number N of starting pending balls is “0” means that the pending information is not stored in the pending ball storage area 232 . Therefore, this game round control process is terminated as it is.

If the number N of starting pending balls is not "0", data setting processing for setting the data stored in the pending area RE of the pending ball storage area 232 for variable display is executed in step S404.

In the data setting process, first, 1 is subtracted from the number N of start-holding balls. Also, the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE in the reservation ball storage area 232 is moved to the execution area AE. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE is executed.

This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4 to the lower area side. As a result, the data in the first reservation area RE1 is cleared, the second reservation area RE2→the first reservation area RE1, the third reservation area RE3→the second reservation area RE2, the fourth reservation area RE4→the third reservation area RE3, and so on. Data within each area is shifted accordingly.

Furthermore, in the data setting process, a shift time command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for making the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. The shift time command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process (step S301) of the normal process. The effect control device 82 executes a process corresponding to the reduction of the pending number based on the received shift command.

After executing the data setting process, after executing the fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the special figure display unit 117 and the fluctuation display in the pattern display device 161 in step S405, the game round control process is ended. .

Here, the fluctuation start processing will be described. In the fluctuation start process, as shown in FIG. 19, first, in step S501, a success/failure judgment process for judging whether or not the reservation information corresponding to the current fluctuation start process corresponds to the winning of the jackpot is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information obtained from the information for judging the jackpot, ie, the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1, is grasped. Then, when the win/loss lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode in the ROM 203 is referenced to specify whether or not the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to the winning of the jackpot. When the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the success/failure table for the high-probability mode in the ROM 203 is referenced to determine whether or not the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to winning the jackpot.

In the subsequent step S502, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S501 corresponds to the winning of the jackpot. When the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, the type determination process is executed in step S503.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for type determination, that is, information obtained from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. In addition, referring to the distribution table in the ROM 203, it is specified whether or not the grasped information for type determination is included in the information corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result.

In the subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is the probability variable jackpot result based on the information specified in the type determination processing in step S503. If the result is a variable probability big win, stop result setting processing for the variable probability big win is executed in step S505, and if the result is not a variable probability big win, stop result setting processing for the normal big win is executed in step S506. If it is determined in step S502 that the jackpot has not been won, then in step S507 stop result setting processing for the time of loss is executed.

In each stop result setting process of steps S505 to S507, the information of the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 117 is specified from the information stored in advance in the ROM 203, and the specified information is transferred to the RAM 204 memorize to In addition, in steps S505 and S506, the information for specifying that the result of the winning/failure determination of the current game round is the probability variable jackpot result or the normal jackpot result in the MPU 202 is stored in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 ( '1' information is stored in the corresponding area). Specifically, the variable probability jackpot flag is stored in step S505, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in step S506.

After executing any of the processes of steps S505 to S507, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S508.

In the fluctuation display time setting process, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204 is acquired. Also, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated on the symbol display device 161 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game round related to the current fluctuation start is one of the jackpot results, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, even if it is not a jackpot result, if the numerical information related to the ready-to-win random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it is determined that the to-win display will occur. .

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the fluctuation display time table for reach occurrence stored in the ROM 203 is referred to, and the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired, and the fluctuation Display time information is stored in variable display time counters provided in various counter areas 234 of RAM 204 . On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the change display time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the ROM 203 is referred to, and the change display time information corresponding to the current value of the change type counter CS is acquired. Then, the variable display time information is stored in the variable display time counter. Incidentally, the variable display time that can be obtained with reference to the non-reach variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be obtained with reference to the reachable variable display time table.

Here, the ready-to-win display includes normal reach-to-win display and super reach-to-win display having different variable display modes. Variable display time information corresponding to each normal reach display and super reach display is set in the variable display time table for reach generation, and by referring to the table, variable display time information corresponding to each reach display can be obtained. is obtained. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. A corresponding reach indication is determined.

The variable display time information at the time of no reach occurrence is set so that the variable display time becomes shorter as the number N of start pending balls increases. In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the reach non-reach is selected so that a shorter variable display time is selected. A variable display time table for occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the variable display time does not change according to the number N of start pending balls and the support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, the variation display time table may be set individually for each of the jackpot results, the case of the loss reach, and the case of the loss result of no reach. In this case, the variable display time is apportioned according to each game result.

The variable display time information when reach is not generated is set so that the variable display time is shorter than the variable display time when reach is generated. Further, the variable display time information in the normal reach display is set so as to be shorter than the variable display time in the super reach display. That is, each variable display time information is set so that the variable display time becomes longer in the order of non-occurrence of reach<normal reach display<super reach display.

As described above, the variable display time of each game round is determined by using the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the type of reach display, the number of pending information, and the value of the variable type counter CS as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game round is the content of other pending information, specifically, the information for judging the jackpot, the information for judging the type, and the information for judging reach, which are included in the other pending information, as parameters. determined without

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S508, the command for variation and the type command are set in step S509. The variable command includes information on the variable display time. Here, the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence as described above is different from the display duration time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach generation. Even if the command does not include the information on the presence or absence of the occurrence of reach, it is possible to specify the presence or absence of occurrence of reach from the information of the variable display time in the effect control device 82 which is the control device on the sub side. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach occurrence.

Also, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, normal jackpot result information, probability variable jackpot result information, or loss result information.

The variation command and type command set in step S509 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 17). After executing the process of step S509, after starting the fluctuation display of the pattern in the special figure display part 117 in step S510, this fluctuation start process is complete|finished.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 18), when the special figure display unit 117 is in the process of variable display, the game round progressing process of steps S406 to S409 is executed. In the game round progressing process, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is stored in the variable display time setting process (step S508), as described above. Also, the value of the stored variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S407. In the variable display process, the display mode in the special figure display unit 117 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S408. In the fluctuation end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any of the processes of steps S505 to S507 is specified, and the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed in the special figure display unit 117. It controls the display of the diagram display unit 117 .

In the subsequent step S409, a fluctuation end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The fluctuation end command set at step S409 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 17). Upon receiving the received variation end command, the performance control device 82 causes the symbol display device 161 to confirm and display (final stop display) the combination of the final stop symbols corresponding to the result of the game cycle in the variation display.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game state transition process, first, at step S601, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S602, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display section 117 of one game round is finished. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the timing at which the variable display ends, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the game result of the current game cycle corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM 204 stores either the normal jackpot flag or the probability variable jackpot flag. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, "15" is stored in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S604. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the variable winning device 114 is opened. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. In the big winning opening opening/closing process, when the variable winning device 114 is closed, the variable winning driving unit 114a is brought into a driving state on the condition that the round counter area RC is "1" or more. Allow device 114 to open. In addition, when the variable winning device 114 is open, variable winning driving is performed under the condition that a predetermined time has passed since the opening of the variable winning device 114 or that a predetermined number of game balls have won. The driving state of the part 114a is stopped, and the variable winning device 114 is closed.

In subsequent step S606, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the game state transition processing is terminated. When the value of the round counter area RC is "0", in step S607, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

In transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, when a variable probability big win flag is stored in the RAM 204, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. Further, when the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is terminated when the number of game rounds continues 100 times, and then the game shifts to the normal game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

After that, in step S608, after the end processing of the open/close execution mode is executed, the game state transition processing is ended. In the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode, the stored flags of the normal jackpot flag and probability variable jackpot flag are erased.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the production control device 82 and the display control device 212>
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be additionally described.

An MPU 242 is mounted on a performance control board 241 provided in the performance control device 82 . The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 242, a RAM 244 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 243, It is an element that incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. In addition, it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 242, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242 . From the main control device 81, commands for holding display control (information for holding display control) such as various holding commands and shift commands are received. It also receives game round control commands (game round control information) such as variation commands, type commands, and variation end commands. Also, it receives opening/closing execution mode commands (opening/closing execution mode information) such as an opening command and an ending command.

The output side of the MPU 242 is connected to the light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 provided on the front door frame 14, as well as the display control device 212, as already described. Further, the drive units 170a to 173a for the movable accessories 170 to 173 of the movable accessory device 162 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242, respectively. In the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82, based on various commands received from the main control device 81, the variable display pattern (effect pattern) of each game cycle and the stop result of the symbol are determined, and the light emitting unit 58, the speaker unit 59, and the driving It controls the driving of the units 170a to 173a, and transmits the determined content to the display control device 212 as a command.

The display control device 212 includes an MPU 252, which is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are integrated into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257. It has It should be noted that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 252, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

In the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, based on the command received from the main control device 81 via the effect control device 82, the VDP 255 performs drawing processing on the video RAM 257, thereby displaying the pattern display device 161. Various images are displayed on the screen G.

The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 161 . Since the VDP 255 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 252 and the video RAM 257 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 256 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 161 . The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 256 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 256 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 .

The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 161. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 257, the display content of the pattern display device 161 is changed.

<Explanation about the production of each game round>
Here, an outline of a game effect (interlocking effect) using each of the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the display screen G will be described.

First, the variable display of game rounds will be described with reference to FIG.

When the game cycle is started, high-speed fluctuation display is first started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which pattern is variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 22(a), the variable display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display so that the player can recognize the variable-displayed symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 22(b), when the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 is completed, the variable display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high speed variation display to the low speed variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 22(c), the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends.

After all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 have finished changing, a waiting time (waiting period) is provided to maintain the stop display for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Confirmation display is performed to clearly indicate the game result of the round to the player. Then, when the waiting time elapses in a state in which the combination of symbols (specific symbols or non-specific symbols) corresponding to the result of the big win is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, it is assumed that the result of the big win is generated, and then opening and closing is executed. mode.

In this case, even if the standby period elapses while the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the big win is still displayed on the non-effective lines L6 to L11, the result of the big win does not occur. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, during this standby period, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot results stopped and displayed on the non-effective lines L6 to L11 moves to the effective lines L1 to L5, and finally. There is a re-variation effect that leads to the occurrence of a jackpot result. Hereinafter, the flow of the re-variation effect will be illustrated with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 23 and 24, for convenience of explanation, the portions that are actually hidden by the movable accessories 170 to 173 so as to be invisible are shown in a pseudo-transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), as a line formed only by symbols stopping in the sub-display area Rs, for example, a combination of specific symbols is stopped on the right non-effective line L6, and each symbol row Z1 to Assume that the variable display of Z3 has ended. In this case, during the standby time, as shown in FIG. 23(b), first the first movable role 170 and the second movable role 171 that shield the right non-effective line L6 move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Thus, the driving units 170a and 171a are driven and controlled, and all combinations of specific symbols on the right non-effective line L6 that have been blocked become visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(c), the combination of the specific symbols moves to the effective line (middle line L2 in the drawing), and the first movable role 170 and the second movable role 171 move to the non-shielding position. to the shielding position. After that, when the waiting time elapses, it is clearly indicated that a big win has occurred, and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

Also, when the combination of the specific symbols stops on the non-effective line extending over both the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs, the re-fluctuation effect may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 24(a), it is assumed that the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the second non-effective line L10, and the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, during the waiting time, as shown in FIG. 24(b), the third movable accessory 172 that shields the sub-display region Rs (left sub-display region Rs2) of the left downward-right line L10 is moved from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. The drive unit 172a is drive-controlled so as to move to the shielding position, and all the combinations of specific symbols on the shielded left downward-sloping line L10 become visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 24(c), the combination of the specific symbols moves to the effective line (lower right line L4 in the figure), and the third movable accessory 172 moves from the non-shielding position to the shielding position. . After that, when the waiting time elapses, it is clearly indicated that a big win has occurred, and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the pachinko machine 10, in some cases where a big win result occurs, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win result on the non-effective line is once stopped, and then a re-variation performance is performed. there is In other words, the re-variation effect is generated with a predetermined probability when the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the big win stops on the non-effective line. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, part of the pattern stopped in the sub-display area Rs protrudes from the movable accessories 170 to 173, and the protruding part is allowed to be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. . Therefore, by paying attention to the protruding portion, the player can recognize when the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the big win is stop-displayed on the non-effective line.

The player expects that the re-variation effect will be performed during the waiting time after the stop display (after the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed). By performing such a display effect, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the big win does not stop on the effective line, the game cycle is finally finished (until the standby time elapses). It is possible to maintain the feeling of expectation that the player may have won the jackpot, and to appropriately ensure the degree of attention to the game.

In this pachinko machine 10, a reservation notice suggesting the content of the reservation information stored in the reservation ball storage area 232 is performed at a predetermined probability at a timing before the start of the game round related to the reservation information. It is configured. Therefore, the flow of the suspension notice will be exemplified below with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. In FIG. 26, for convenience of explanation, the portions that are actually blocked by the movable accessories 170 to 173 so as to be invisible are shown in a pseudo-transparent state.

The suspension notice is performed using the stop result (combination of stop symbols) in the game round before the start of the game round of the suspension information subject to the suspension notice. Specifically, without forming a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result on the activated line as a result of stopping the game round before the game round related to the hold information subject to the hold notice, and By stop-displaying the same symbols in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, it is possible to indicate the content of the hold information that is the object of the hold notice.

For example, if the hold information that is the target of the hold notice is a probability variable jackpot result, as shown in FIG. , the display effect for the suspension notice is executed. Specifically, without stopping the combination of specific symbols on the activated line, the same specific symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm). terminate. After that, as shown in FIG. 25(b), in the game cycle related to the hold information subject to the hold notice, the combination of the specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line to indicate that the probability variable jackpot result has been obtained. is specified.

Also, if the hold information that is the target of the hold notice is a normal jackpot result, as shown in FIG. The display effect for the suspension notice is executed at the time. Specifically, without stopping the combination of non-specific symbols on the active line, the same non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm). ) ends the game round. After that, as shown in FIG. 25(d), in the game cycle related to the reservation information subject to the reservation notice, a normal jackpot result is obtained by stopping and displaying the combination of non-specific symbols on the effective line. is clearly stated.

The suspension notice may be performed using not only the main display area Rm, but also both the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs. That is, as shown in FIG. 26(a), for example, in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the same symbols are stopped and displayed in the main display region Rm, respectively, and in the upper symbol row Z1, the sub display region Rs (Fig. Then, the pattern corresponding to the upper part of the left sub-display area Rs2 is stopped and displayed. During the standby time, as shown in FIG. 26(b), by moving the third movable role 172 from the shielding position to the non-shielding position, the same symbols are made visible, and then the third movable role is displayed. The game round is ended by moving the object 172 to the shielding position. After that, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in the game cycle related to the reservation information that is the target of the reservation notice, the fact that the combination of the specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line results in a probability variable jackpot. clarified.

26(a) to 26(c) illustrate the case where only one of the left and right sub-display regions Rs (sub-display region Rs2) is used. In some cases, the display areas Rs1 and Rs2 are used to perform the suspension notice, and the suspension notice is diversified. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 26(d) to 26(f), an example of an advance notice on hold using the left and right secondary display areas Rs1 and Rs2 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26(d), the same pattern is stopped and displayed in the right sub-display region Rs1, the left sub-display region Rs2, and the main display region Rm (in the figure, the left sub-display region Rs2 in the upper pattern row Z1, The same symbols are stopped and displayed in the right sub-display area Rs1 of the middle symbol row Z2 and the main display area Rm of the lower symbol row Z3). Then, during the waiting time, as shown in FIG. After making each pattern visible, the third movable accessory 172 is moved to the shielding position to end the game. After that, as shown in FIG. 26(f), in the game cycle related to the hold information that is the object of the hold notice, by stopping and displaying the combination of the specific symbols on the effective line, the result of the probability variable jackpot is displayed. clarified.

In this manner, the pending notice uses not only the main display area Rm in which the effective lines L1 to L5 are set, but also the symbols stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs which is the object to be shielded by the movable accessories 170 to 173. The performance will be performed. On the other hand, even if the same pattern is stopped and displayed in the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs, if the corresponding movable role object moves and the pattern does not become visible, the effect may be A pending notice is not valid (it becomes a mere outlier). In other words, regarding the suspension notice using the secondary display area Rs, the corresponding movable accessory moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position, and the entire shielded pattern becomes visible. It is set as an execution condition.

Also, in the above re-variation production already explained, similarly, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the big win is stopped and displayed on the non-effective line, the corresponding movable accessory must move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. If you do, it will only display a mere outlier, and it will not be a big hit. Therefore, even in the re-variation production, the condition for executing the re-variation production is that the corresponding movable accessory moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position.

Thus, in the present embodiment, as described above, the display contents on the display screen G and the movements of the movable accessories 170 to 173 are interlocked to perform the re-variation effect and the pending notice effect. Therefore, when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, the subsequent development is greatly influenced by whether or not the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Become. In view of such circumstances, in the present embodiment, as an effect to make the player expect the movement of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to the non-shielding position, one of the movable accessories 170 to 173 corresponding to the above effect is provided. A fanning effect is set to vibrate (up and down). The flow of the fan effect will be described below with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 27 . In addition, the fanning production is roughly divided into those corresponding to the fanning production related to the re-fluctuation production and the fanning production related to the suspension notice production. The inciting production will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 27, FIGS. 27(a) to 27(d) correspond to the suspension notice effect, and FIGS. 27(e) to 27(h) correspond to the re-variation effect.

<Inciting performance>
As shown in FIG. 27(a), for example, if the symbol combination corresponding to the big win result is stopped and displayed on the left downward line L10 as an ineffective line, the corresponding movable accessory is displayed as shown in FIG. 27(b). As the third movable accessory 172 vibrates up and down, an effect is performed as if it moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Then, as shown in FIG. 27(c), when the third movable accessory 172 moves to the non-shielding position, the symbol combination corresponding to the big win result moves onto the effective line as a re-variation effect, and the big win result is displayed. occurs. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27(d), when the waiting time elapses while the third movable accessory 172 does not move to the non-shielding position and remains in the shielding position, the re-variation effect is not performed, and it is simply a misplacement. Become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27(e), when a predetermined number of identical patterns are stopped and displayed over the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs (in the figure, the left line L1 of the main display region Rm , and the same symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper part of the left sub-display area Rs2), as shown in FIG. A performance is held. Then, as shown in FIG. 27(g), if the third movable accessory 172 moves to the non-intercepting position, the reservation notice is established, and as shown in FIG. 27(h), the third movable accessory 172 If the waiting time elapses without moving to the non-shielding position and remaining in the shielding position, it will not be a pending notice, but will be a mere miss. Processing performed by various control devices for performing these effects will be described below.

<About processing related to various effects>
Regarding the processing related to various effects, the processing related to the re-variation effect will be described first, and then the processing related to the pending notice will be described.

<Varying display control processing performed by the production control device 82>
First, the variable display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described below. The variable display control process is activated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec). Then, in the variable display control process, when a variable command transmitted from the main controller 81 is received, the symbol display device 161 is caused to start variable display of symbols for one game, and from the main controller 81 When the transmitted variation end command is received, the processing for final stop display of the variation display of the pattern is executed. Further, in the variable display control process, a process of appropriately correcting the variable display pattern is executed in accordance with the setting for performing the suspension notice.

In the variable display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, it is determined in step S701 whether or not the game is in progress, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 161 is performing variable display of symbols for one game. judge. If the variable display of symbols for one game has not been performed, in step S702, it is determined whether or not a command for variation transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received. If the command for variation has not been received, the variable display control process is terminated. If the variation command has been received, the variation start processing is executed in step S703, and then the variation display control processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the symbol variation display for one game is performed, it is determined in step S704 whether or not the variation end command transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received. If the fluctuation end command has not been received, the variable display control process is terminated after executing the process for during fluctuation in step S705. If the fluctuation end command has been received, the fluctuation display control process is ended after the fluctuation end process is executed in step S706.

Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing in step S703, the fluctuation middle processing in step S705, and the fluctuation end processing in step S706 will be described in detail.

<Processing for start of fluctuation>
First, the fluctuation start processing in step S703 will be described. The variation start process is a process for starting an effect for a game turn based on receipt of a variation command transmitted from the main controller 81 . In the fluctuation start processing, in addition to whether or not the ready-to-win display is present as an effect for the game cycle, a re-variation effect and a pending notice effect are set. Here, first, the processing regarding the setting of the ready-to-win display and the setting of the re-variation effect will be described, and then the processing regarding the setting of the pending advance notice effect will be described.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, in step S801, the command for variation received this time is read, and information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the variation display time are specified from the command. Further, as already explained, when the main controller 81 transmits a command for variation, it also transmits a type command. Therefore, in step S801, the type command received together with the command for variation received this time is read, and from the command, game result information such as probability variable jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, or loss result information is specified. . Then, in step S801, from the specified information, information on whether or not the jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot has been won, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence if the jackpot has not been won, and variable display time information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 252 .

In the subsequent step S802, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game cycle to be started this time is a game result corresponding to the jackpot result, based on the information grasped in step S801. In the case of a jackpot result, that is, in the case of a variable probability jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in the subsequent step S803, the effect setting process for the jackpot is executed.

In the effect setting process for big win, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, stop result determination process for big win is first executed in step S901. In this stop result determination process, in the case of a probability variable jackpot result, the stop result in which a combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) is established on one activated line L1 to L5 is determined by the current stop. Decide as a result. In addition, in the case of a normal jackpot result, a stop result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is established on one activated line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. . The type of the main symbol to be stop-displayed and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by a lottery or the like when a big win results.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), the final stop line table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 stores each effective line L1 to L5 and address information. The line is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area 244c provided in the RAM 244. FIG. Further, in step S901, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area 244d is executed. Note that the address information of the stop result determined by various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area 244d of the RAM 244 in the following description as well, so the description is also used.

As already explained, the ready-to-win display is executed in game rounds in which a big hit result occurs, and the fluctuation display time is set longer for the super ready-to-win display than for the normal ready-to-win display. Therefore, in the following step S902, the variable display time of the game round to be executed this time is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the variable display time is the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display.

When it is determined in step S902 that it is the variable display time corresponding to the super ready-to-win display instead of the normal ready-to-win display, the super ready-to-win effect pattern determination processing is executed in step S903, and then the main jackpot effect setting processing is performed. exit.

In the effect pattern determination process for super reach, the effect table for super reach stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 is acquired, and the game result in the variation display time and type command of the command for variation received this time is obtained. A corresponding performance pattern of super ready-to-win display is determined. Further, in step S903, a process of storing the address information of the determined effect pattern in the pattern address storage area 244e of the RAM 244 is executed. Also in the following explanation, in the various effect pattern determination processing, the corresponding effect table is acquired from the ROM 243, the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined, and the address of the effect pattern determined in the various effect pattern determination processing is determined. Since the information is stored in the pattern address storage area 244e of the RAM 244, the description is used.

When it is the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display in step S902, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, a re-variation effect lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a re-variation effect is executed. In this processing, whether the re-variation effect lottery table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the re-variation effect counters provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 are acquired to execute the re-variation effect. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not. Then, in subsequent step S905, it is determined whether or not the re-fluctuation effect lottery is won based on the processing result of step S904. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the re-variation effect lottery process is 70%, and more than half of the game times in which the normal ready-to-win display that results in the big win is selected is changed to the re-variation effect. be done.

When the re-fluctuation effect lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S906, and the effect pattern determination process for normal reach is executed. After executing the process of step S906, the effect setting process for the big win is terminated. On the other hand, if the re-fluctuation effect lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, a process of rewriting the information stored in the register in step S801 as information indicating a game round in which a re-variation effect is performed from a game round in which a ready-to-win situation occurs is executed.

In the following step S908, determination processing of the effect pattern for the re-variation effect is executed, and in step S909, determination processing of the temporary stop line in the re-variation effect is executed. In this process, it is determined on which of the invalid lines L6 to L11 the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result determined in step S901 is temporarily stopped. In other words, it determines which of the non-effective lines L6 to L11 is used to execute the re-variation effect. In this case, the valid line as the final stop line determined in step S901 and the non-valid line as the temporary stop line determined in step S909 are determined so as to be parallel.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), the re-variation table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 contains address information of the non-effective lines L6-11 parallel to the effective lines L1-L5. remembered. In step S909, the temporary stop line is determined by referring to the address information of the final stop line stored in step S901, and the address information of the temporary stop line is stored in the temporary stop line storage area 244f of the RAM 244. In this way, by making the re-fluctuation production a production of parallelly moving the symbol combination stopped on the temporary stop line, a smooth production can be achieved without changing the positional relationship between the symbols constituting the symbol combination. can do.

It should be noted that the relationship between the temporary stop line and the final stop line does not necessarily have to be parallel, and it is possible to adopt a configuration that includes non-parallel lines. In this case, in the re-variation effect between the non-parallel lines, the symbols of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 do not move in parallel, and the symbols are re-arranged so as to form a symbol combination corresponding to the big win result on the final stop line. Columns Z1-Z3 must be variably displayed. Therefore, by using the configuration for variably displaying each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, for example, after the symbol combination corresponding to the normal jackpot result temporarily stops on the non-effective line, when it again changes to the final stop line, the probability variable jackpot result is displayed. As a symbol combination corresponding to , a display effect (a so-called promotion effect) to finally stop on the activated line may be performed.

After executing the process of step S909, the process of storing the fan effect flag in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244 is executed in step S910, and the release flag is stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244 in step S911. Execute the process. The fanning effect flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the fanning effect should be executed in the current game round. Further, the open flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that one of the movable accessories 170 to 173 should be controlled to open/close in the current game cycle.

Then, in step S912, based on the processing result of step S909, after executing the process of storing the movable role to be driven and controlled in the role storage area 244g provided in the RAM 244, the effect setting for the main jackpot is executed. End the process. As shown in FIG. 31(b), the re-variation table stores information on the movable accessory to be drive-controlled in association with the temporary stop line. By referring to the address information of , the information of the movable accessory to be driven is stored.

In this way, by storing the final stop line, the temporary stop line, and the movable accessories to be driven and controlled in association with each other in the re-variation production, the production on the display screen G and the movable accessories 170 to 173 can be performed. Even in the case of performing performance simultaneously, it is possible to suppress the complication of the processing configuration and the increase in required storage capacity.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29), when it is determined in step S802 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether reach will occur in the current game round. When reach occurs, the process advances to step S805 to execute effect setting processing for reach occurrence.

In the ready-to-win effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display to occur in the current game cycle is the normal ready-to-win display. In the case of super reach display instead of normal reach display, the process advances to step S1002 to execute stop result determination processing for super reach. The processing of step S1002 is substantially the same as the processing of step S901. However, in the case of the processing performed in step S1002, since it corresponds to the loss reach, the stop symbols are determined so as not to result in a symbol combination corresponding to the big hit result. That is, the stop result in which a combination of outlier reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combination of winning reach symbols and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, in this determination, the same pattern combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the same pattern of the medium pattern row Z2 as the pattern forming the reach line is placed on the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at a stop position shifted by one line before or one line after. Also, in step S1002, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area 244d is executed.

In the subsequent step S1003, effect pattern determination processing for super reach is executed. In this case, similar to step S903, by referring to the effect table for super reach stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, the effect of the super reach display corresponding to the variation command and type command received this time is displayed. determine the content of After executing the process of step S1003, the effect setting process for occurrence of this reach is ended.

Returning to the description of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the display is normal reach display, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored. The advance notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244 when the advance notice condition is satisfied in processing for holding notice, which will be described later. When the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored, the process for holding notice in steps S1005 to S1011 is executed, and then the effect setting process for occurrence of reach is finished. The suspension notice processing will be described in detail later, but in this processing, the suspension notice stop result and effect pattern in the game rounds of the variable display time corresponding to the normal ready-to-win display are determined.

If it is determined in step S1004 that the notice condition fulfillment flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, whether or not to generate an ineffective alignment effect for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the big win result on the non-effective lines L6 to L11 (although the re-variation effect is not performed (although it does not result in a big win result)). Matching effect lottery processing is executed. In this non-effective matching effect lottery process, the non-effective matching effect tables stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the values obtained from the non-effective matching effect counters of the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 are referred to. It is determined whether or not to generate a matching effect.

In the subsequent step S1013, it is determined whether or not to generate an ineffective alignment effect based on the processing result of step S1012. If the non-effective alignment effect is to be generated, the process advances to step S1014, and the information stored in the register in step S801 is rewritten as the information representing the game cycle in which the non-effective alignment effect is to be performed from the game cycle in which the reach is generated. .

After executing the rewriting process in step S1014, the process advances to step S1015 to execute the stop result determination process for ineffective alignment. In this processing, it is determined on which of the non-effective lines L6 to L11 the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the big win is to be stopped. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the big winning result to be stopped on the non-effective lines L6 to L11 and the non-effective lines L6 to L11 to be stopped are randomly determined by lottery or the like. As shown in FIG. 33, the stop result table for the non-effective alignment effect stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 contains the stop information for the non-effective alignment effect based on the stop symbol of the middle line L2, which is the active line. Address information is stored.

In the schematic diagram of FIG. 33, the sub-symbols arranged between the main symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are indicated by intermediate numbers between the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols for convenience. showing. In step S1015, the information on the combination of symbols and the non-effective line determined by the above process is compared with the non-effective matching effect table, and the stop symbols on the effective line are stored.

After executing the process of step S1015, the effect pattern determination process for non-effective alignment is executed in step S1016. Then, in step S1017, the process of storing the fanning performance flag is executed, and in step S1018, after executing the process of storing the movable accessory to be driven and controlled in the accessory storage area 244g, the reach generating End the effect setting process. As shown in FIG. 33, the non-effective alignment effect table stores movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven and controlled in correspondence with the non-effective lines L6 to L11 for stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the big win. In step S1018, the address information stored in step S1015 is referenced to store information on the movable accessory to be driven.

If the non-effective alignment effect is not generated in step S1013, the process proceeds to step S1019. In step S1019, the same main symbols are stopped in all the symbol rows Z1-Z3 in the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs, but the special hold notice is not executed (the movable accessories 170-173 are changed from the shielding state to the non-shielding state). A lottery is made as to whether or not to generate the non-effective advance notice effect. In this non-effective notice effect lottery process, the non-effective notice effect table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the values obtained from the non-effective notice effect counters in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 are referred to. It is determined whether or not to generate an effective notice effect.

In the following step S1020, it is determined whether or not to generate the non-effective advance notice effect based on the processing result of step S1019. If the non-effective advance notice effect is not to be generated, the process advances to step S1021 to execute stop result determination processing for normal reach. The process of step S1021 is substantially the same as the process of step S1002. However, in the super reach display, the symbols in the middle pattern row Z2, which are the same as the symbols forming the reach line, are finally stopped at a stop position shifted to the left or right of the reach line by one line, whereas in the normal reach display, this displacement is made. is not limited to one line, and the stop result of the medium symbol row Z2 is determined in correspondence with the variable display time determined by the main controller 81. FIG. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result is determined in which the same symbol combination is not established on any of the pay lines L1 to L5. After executing the process of step S1021, in step S1022, after performing the production|presentation pattern determination process for normal reach, the production|presentation setting process for this reach generation is complete|finished. It should be noted that the stopping result of the middle symbol row Z2 may be randomly determined by lottery as long as the symbol combination does not correspond to the big winning result.

When it is determined in step S1020 that the non-effective advance notice effect is to be generated, the processing for the non-effective notice effect is executed in steps S1023 to S1028, and then the effect setting processing for generating the reach is finished. The processing for the non-effective advance notice effect will be described in detail later, but in this processing, the stop result of the non-effective notice effect and the effect pattern in the game round of the variable display time corresponding to the normal ready-to-win display are determined.

Returning to the description of the process for starting fluctuation (FIG. 29), if reach is not generated in step S804, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, it is determined whether or not the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored. When the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored, the effect setting processing for the pending notice is executed in step S807, and when the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the effect setting processing for normal deviation is executed in step S808. to run. Here, the effect setting process for the normal deviation will be described, and the effect setting process for the pending notice will be described in detail later. In addition, in the effect setting process for the pending notice in step S807, the stop result and the effect pattern for the pending notice in the game cycle of the variable display time when the reach does not occur are determined.

In the effect setting process for normal deviation, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, first, ineffective matching effect lottery process is executed in step S1101. Such processing is generally the same as the processing in step S1011. However, the probability of winning is different between the non-effective matching effect lottery in the game round of the variable display time when the reach occurs in step S1011 and the ineffective matching effect lottery in the game round of the variable display time when the reach does not occur in step S1101. At step S1011, the probability of winning the non-effective matching effect is higher than at step S1101. More specifically, in step S1011, the non-effective alignment effect is generated with a probability of 10%, and in step S1101, the non-effective alignment effect is generated with a probability of 1%.

In the subsequent step S1102, it is determined whether or not to generate an ineffective alignment effect based on the processing result of step S1101. If the non-effective alignment effect is to be generated, the process advances to step S1103 to execute stop result determination processing for non-effective alignment. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S1015. After executing the process of step S1103, in step S1105, after executing the effect pattern determination process for non-effective alignment, this effect setting process for out of normal is finished. That is, since the variable display time is shorter than when the ready-to-win is generated, in the production setting process for normal failure, the fan effect flag is not stored even if the non-effective matching effect is performed (the fan effect is not stored). Not set).

If it is determined in step S1102 that the ineffective alignment effect is not generated, the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, a non-effective notice effect lottery process is executed. Such processing is generally the same as the processing in step S1019. However, the winning probability differs between the non-effective notice effect lottery in the game round of the variable display time when the reach occurs in step S1019 and the ineffective notice effect lottery in the game round of the variable display time when the reach does not occur in step S1105. , step S1019 has a higher probability of winning the invalid notice effect than step S1105. More specifically, in step S1019, a non-effective advance notice effect is generated with a probability of 15%, and in step S1105, a non-effective advance notice effect is generated with a probability of 3%.

In the following step S1106, it is determined whether or not to generate the non-effective advance notice effect based on the processing result of step S1105. If the non-effective advance notice effect is not to be generated, the process proceeds to step S1107, and stop result determination processing for non-generating ready-to-win is executed. In this processing, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is not stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, nor is the combination of winning reach symbols stopped on any of the non-effective lines L6 to L11. Do not stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the big win, and do not stop the same main symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs (so as not to stop the result corresponding to the possession notice ) to determine the outcome of this stop. After that, in step S1108, the effect pattern determination process for non-generating reach is executed, and then the effect setting process for deviation from normal is ended.

Also, when it is determined in step S1106 that the non-effective advance notice effect is to be generated, the processing for the ineffective notice effect is executed in steps S1109 to S1111, and then the effect setting processing for the non-normal state ends. do. The processing for the non-effective advance notice effect will be described in detail later, but in this processing, the stop result of the non-effective notice effect and the effect pattern in the game round of the variable display time when the reach does not occur are determined.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29), after executing any one of steps S803, S805, S807 and S808, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, a process of outputting to the display control device 212 commands including information on the stop result and effect pattern determined in step S803, step S805, step S807 or step S808 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively, is executed. . Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the pattern display device 161 to execute the effect in the current game round.

After executing the process of step S809, in the following step S810, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game cycle, the process for starting the variation is finished. Specifically, based on the effect patterns determined in steps S803, S805, S807, or S808, drive control of the speaker unit 59 and the light emitting unit 58 is started to start the effect for the game cycle.

<Variable mid-use processing>
Next, the variable display control process (FIG. 28) in step S705 will be described. The variation mid-process is a process of executing or changing various effects in the game cycle started by the variation start process.

As shown in the flow chart of FIG. 35, in the variable medium use process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the sway effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244 or not. If the fan effect flag is stored, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the fan effect in the subsequent step S1202.

Here, the MPU 242 measures the time from the start of the pattern display on the pattern display device 161 using elapsed counters provided in various counter areas 244 a of the RAM 244 . Specifically, when the variable display is started, update (addition) processing of the elapsed counter is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). In addition, in the progress table provided in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, the information of each counter value corresponding to the timing at which the fanning effect should be started is one-to-one with the information of the effect pattern that can be set at the start of the game round. are stored in a state associated with each other. Then, in step S1202, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is a counter value corresponding to the timing at which the fanning effect should be started in the progress table of the current game round.

It should be noted that the processing (steps S1205, step S1209, step S1212, etc., which will be described later) of grasping whether or not it is the execution timing of another effect in the game round also refers to the progress table and the progress counter, so that the execution timing is determined. grasp.

If it is determined in step S1202 that it is time to start the fanning effect, the fanning effect is started in step S1203. In this process, based on the information of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven stored in the role storage area 244g of the RAM 244, the drive units 170a to 173a of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are driven and controlled. A process of vibrating (vertically moving) the movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed. In addition, in step S1204, a command to start fanning effect is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes display control for causing the pattern display device 161 to display for the fanning effect based on the received fanning effect start command. As the effect on the display screen G, an effect or the like is set on the display screen G around the vibrating movable accessory, for example.

If it is not the timing to execute the fan effect in step S1202, or after executing the process of step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the fanning effect. When it is time to end the fanning effect in step S1205, the fanning effect ends in the following step S1206. In this process, a process of stopping the vibrating movable accessory is executed. Also, in step S1207, a command to end the fanning effect is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the pattern display device 161 to end the fanning effect being executed on the display screen G based on the received fanning effect end command.

If the fan effect flag is not stored in step S1201, if it is not the time to end the fan effect in step S1205, or after the process of step S1207 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1208. In step S1208, it is determined whether or not an open flag is stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244. FIG. As already described, the open flag is a flag stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244 in step S911 when the re-variation effect is executed.

If the open flag is stored, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the movable accessories 170 to 173 in step S1209. When it is determined that it is time to open the movable accessories 170 to 173, the process of opening the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed in step S1210. In this process, based on the information of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven stored in the role storage area 244g of the RAM 244, the drive units 170a to 173a of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are driven and controlled. , to move the movable accessories 170 to 173 to the non-shielding position. Also, an open command is output to the display control device 212 in step S1211. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes display control of the opening effect (re-variation effect or special holding notice effect) for the pattern display device 161 based on the received opening command. In addition, in the display control device 212, if the current opening effect is a re-variation effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the big winning result stopped at the temporary stop line as described above is moved to the final stop line. It controls the display device 161 .

If it is not the release timing of the movable accessories 170 to 173 in step S1209, or if the process of step S1211 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, it is determined whether or not it is time to close the movable accessories 170-173. If it is the closing timing, the closing process of the corresponding movable parts 170 to 173 is executed in step S1213. In this process, based on the information of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven stored in the role storage area 244g of the RAM 244, the drive units 170a to 173a of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are driven and controlled. , to move the movable accessories 170 to 173 to the shielding position. Also, in step S1214, a close command is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes processing for ending the opening effect (re-variation effect or special holding notice effect) for the pattern display device 161 based on the received closing command.

If the open flag is not stored in step S1208, if it is not the time to close the shutter member in step S1208, or if the process of step S1214 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1215. Steps S1215 and S1216 are processing for notice of suspension, and will be described later in detail.

<Processing for end of fluctuation>
Next, the fluctuation end processing of step S706 in the fluctuation display control processing (FIG. 28) will be described. The fluctuation ending process is a process for ending a predetermined effect in the game cycle started by the fluctuation starting process.

In the fluctuation end processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36, in step S1301, the determination stop processing is executed to set the effect of the game round to the determination stop corresponding to the current game result. In this processing, the driving control of the speaker unit 59 and the light emitting unit 58 is performed to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmed stop. Then, in step S1302, after outputting a confirmation command to the display control device 212, the process for finishing the fluctuation ends. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the design display device 161 to stop designating based on the received settling command.

As described above, the variable display in each game round is carried out based on the variable command output from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82 so as to finally become the final display corresponding to the game result. be. Then, the re-variation effect is generated with a predetermined probability when the game result is one of the jackpot results. Also, even if the game result is a losing result, an effect as if a re-variation effect is generated with a predetermined probability, that is, an ineffective matching effect is generated. In this case, not only is the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot results stopped on the non-effective line on the display screen G, but also the effect of the non-effective alignment effect is enhanced by interlocking with the movable accessories that shield the non-effective line. ing.

Specifically, when the non-effective alignment effect occurs, the movable accessory blocking the non-effective line where the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result has stopped appears as if it is about to become non-blocking and changes again. A fanning effect can be generated as a effect as if an effect were to occur. Therefore, the player expects that the re-fluctuation effect will occur, that is, the game result will be a big win result by the occurrence of this fanning effect. In addition, one of the conditions for occurrence of the re-variation effect is that the corresponding movable accessory moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Therefore, the player expects that the corresponding movable accessory will finally move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position when the non-effective alignment effect occurs.

In this manner, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to organically link the effects of the patterns on the display screen G and the effects of the actions of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to achieve more dynamic effects, thereby drawing attention to the game. The degree of improvement is planned.

<Description of processing related to pending notice>
Next, a description will be given of the processing relating to the pending notice.

<Process Performed by Main Controller 81>
As the processing related to the pending notice, processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and processing executed by the effect control device 82 are set. Therefore, first, the processing on the main control device 81 side will be described, and then the processing on the effect control device 82 side will be described.

<Confirmation processing for hold notice>
First, confirmation processing for holding notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control unit 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the reservation notice confirmation process is a process executed in step S205 of the operation opening winning process (FIG. 16) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15).

In the reservation notice confirmation process, in step S1401, the information of the reservation number stored in the reservation number storage area NA in the reservation area RE is read, and the information of the reservation number is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In the subsequent step S1402, based on the current winning to the operation opening 115, the information for judging the big hit among the holding information acquired in the step S204 of the winning processing for the operation opening (FIG. 16), that is, the jackpot random number counter C1 is latched. Stay informed.

In the subsequent step S1403, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204, thereby determining whether or not the current lottery mode is the low-probability mode. In the case of the low-probability mode, in step S1404, with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode shown in FIG. identify what information is included in the In addition, in the case of the high-probability mode, in step S1405, with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode shown in FIG. Identify whether it is included in the set information.

After step S1404 or step S1405, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the information for determining the big win grasped in step S1402 corresponds to the winning of the big win. When it is determined that it corresponds to the jackpot winning, in step S1407, information for type determination among the pending information acquired in step S1404 based on the current winning to the operation port 115, that is, the jackpot type counter C2 to capture information latched from

In subsequent step S1408, with reference to the distribution table shown in FIG. 14(b), the information for judging the type of jackpot grasped in step S1407 is set as the normal jackpot result or the information set as the probability variation jackpot result. Identify which of the After that, in step S1409, it is determined whether or not the information for the jackpot type grasped in step S1407 corresponds to the normal jackpot result. If it corresponds to the normal jackpot result, in step S1410, the normal jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and if it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot result, in step S1411, the probability change is stored in the register of the MPU 202. Store jackpot information.

When a negative determination is made in step S1406, when the process of step S1410 is performed, or when the process of step S1411 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1412. In step S1412, out of the pending information acquired in step S1404 based on the current winning to the operation port 115, information for out-reach determination, that is, information latched from the reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S1413, the reach determination table (information group for reach determination) stored in the table storage area for reach determination (information group storage means for reach determination) of the ROM 203 is referred to, and the reach grasped in step S1412 is determined. It specifies whether the information for determination is included in the information set as reach winning. Thereafter, in step S1414, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination grasped in step S1412 corresponds to occurrence of reach. If reach occurrence is supported, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1415, and then this confirmation process ends. If it does not correspond to reach occurrence, the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

Next, the setting process of the pending command in step S206 in the winning process for the working opening (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the pending command setting process, in step S1501, by determining whether or not either the normal jackpot information or the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, the confirmation process for the last pending notice (FIG. 37 ), it is determined whether or not the information for judging the jackpot is specified as corresponding to winning the jackpot. If either the normal jackpot information or the probability variable jackpot information is stored, in step S1502, by determining whether or not it is the probability variable jackpot information, the confirmation process for the last pending notice (Fig. In 37), it is determined whether or not it is specified that the information for type determination corresponds to the probability variable jackpot result.

In the case of probability variation jackpot information, in step S1503, a probability variation corresponding hold command is set, and in the case of normal jackpot information, a normal correspondence hold command is set in step S1504. The setting of the above commands and the setting of various commands to be described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 204 .

On the other hand, in step S1501, when it is determined that both the normal jackpot information and probability variable jackpot information are not stored, the process proceeds to step S1505, and it is determined whether reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination corresponds to the occurrence of reach in the immediately preceding reservation confirmation confirmation process (FIG. 37). If the reach occurrence information is stored, in step S1506, set the outbound reach corresponding pending command, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, in step S1507, set the complete outbound corresponding pending command. do.

After any one of steps S1503, S1504, S1506, and S1507 is executed, in step S1508, a process of setting the pending number information to the pending command is executed. Specifically, as this process, the information of the set pending command is configured as multi-byte information, and for some of the bits, information to the effect that it is a pending command and a pending command , and information on the number of pending items can be set. In this case, in step S1508, first, in step S1501 in the immediately preceding suspension notice confirmation process (FIG. 37), the information on the number of suspensions stored in the register of the MPU 202 is read. The information of the read reservation number is stored in the bit for the information of the reservation number in , by arithmetic processing such as logical sum. As a result, with respect to the hold command set in any one of steps S1503, S1504, S1506 and S1507, the number of pieces of hold information corresponding to the hold command is specified. Contains information for

After executing the process of step S1508, this setting process is terminated. The pending command including the information of the pending number in step S1508 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 by the external output process of step S301 in the next normal process (FIG. 17). In the effect control device 82, by receiving such a pending command, it is specified that the pending information has increased.

Incidentally, how to set the pending command is to specify the presence or absence of the jackpot winning by the pending command in the performance control device 82, the jackpot type at that time in the case of the jackpot winning, and the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach when the jackpot winning is not made. is optional if possible. For example, a combination of a probability variable hold command, a normal hold command, an outbound reach hold command, and a complete outbound hold command are individually set corresponding to each hold number, and in the hold command setting process, hold notice A configuration may be adopted in which one pending command is selected according to the confirmation result in the confirmation process (FIG. 37).

<Regarding the suspension notice control process executed by the effect control device 82>
Next, the suspension notice control process executed by the MPU 202 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The pending notice control process is part of a plurality of types of processes that are repeatedly executed in the MPU 252, and is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not any hold command has been received from the main controller 81. FIG. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, in step S1602, a hold notice setting process is executed as a process corresponding to the received hold command.

In the following step S1603, 1 is added to the production side pending memory number SN stored in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM244. Also, in step S1603, processing corresponding to the increase in the number of pending memories (for example, processing for changing the display when the pending information is displayed on the display screen G) is executed. Furthermore, in step S1603, processing for storing hold information of the received hold command in the RAM 244 is executed. The RAM 244 is provided with a holding area 244h as an area for storing holding information, and the holding area 244h is associated with the holding ball storage area 232 on the main control unit 81 side to store the first unit area to the fourth unit area. area is provided. In step S1603, a process of storing hold information in the corresponding area is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1601 or after execution of step S1603, the process advances to step S1604 to determine whether or not a shift command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, 1 is subtracted from the production side reserved memory number SN in step S1605. Also, in step S1605, processing corresponding to the decrease in the number of pending memories (for example, processing for changing the display when the pending information is displayed on the display screen G) is executed. Furthermore, in step S1605, shift processing is executed. In this shift process, the hold information set in the unit area of the hold area 244h is shifted to the lower area in order. Specifically, the pending information of the first unit area is cleared, and the second unit area→the first unit area, the third unit area→the second unit area, the fourth unit area→the third unit area, and so on. The pending display information within the unit area is shifted.

When a negative determination is made in step S1604 or after execution of the process of step S1605, this suspension notice control process is terminated. Here, the pending notice setting process in step S1602 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the pending notice setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the effect side pending memory number SN is "1" or more. If the effect-side reserved memory number SN is "0", it is determined in subsequent step S1702 whether or not the game round is currently being executed. In the case where the production side reservation memory number SN is "1" or more in step S1701 and there is reservation information that has not started the game round when the current reservation command is received, or in step S1702 the production side Even if the reserved memory number SN is "0", if the game is currently being played, the process proceeds to step S1703.

In step S1703, it is determined whether or not a winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244. FIG. Winning flag is a flag stored in step S1706 to be described later when a variable probability corresponding hold command or a normal corresponding hold command is received, and is executed before the game round corresponding to the hold command received this time. It is a flag for the MPU 202 to specify that any one of the jackpot results will occur in the game round.

If it is determined that the winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1704 to determine whether or not the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244. The notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored when the notice condition is established as described above. Flags to be stored.

If it is determined that the notice condition establishment flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not the pending command received this time is the probability variable corresponding pending command or the normal corresponding pending command. In the case of a hold command corresponding to these jackpot results, processing for storing a winning flag is executed in subsequent step S1706, and then step S1707 executes notice setting processing for jackpot. In addition, in step S1705, if the received pending command is not a pending command corresponding to the jackpot result, that is, if it is an out-reach corresponding pending command or a completely out-compatible pending command, then in step S1708 the notice for loss Execute the setting process.

If it is determined at step S1702 that the game round is not being executed, if it is determined that the winning flag is stored at step S1703, if it is determined that the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored at step S1704, Alternatively, after executing the processing of either step S1707 or step S1708, the reservation notice setting processing is terminated.

Here, the jackpot advance notice setting process in step S1707 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the big-hit announcement setting process, first, in step S1801, a big-hit reservation announcement lottery process is executed. In this process, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to execute the suspension notice in the suspension information corresponding to the suspension command received this time. Specifically, the value of the pending advance notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the holding advance notice lottery table for the jackpot stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 are referenced to determine whether to execute the pending advance notice. A lottery will be held. In the reservation notice lottery table for big wins of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the reservation notice lottery is set to 75%, and more than half of the holding information corresponding to the jackpot result wins the reservation notice lottery. is set.

In subsequent step S1802, based on the processing result of step S1801, it is determined whether or not the pending advance notice lottery has been won. If the player has not won the pending advance notice lottery, the main jackpot advance notice setting process is terminated as it is. If the holding notice lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is a normal hold command. If it is a normal corresponding hold command, then in step S1804, a process of grasping the notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed. The notice symbol indicates a common symbol that is stop-displayed at a predetermined position when all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stop-displayed in the suspension notice. In such a process, a non-specific pattern (even-numbered pattern) is grasped as an advance notice pattern corresponding to a normal jackpot result. On the other hand, in step S1803, when it is not the normal correspondence reservation command but the probability variation correspondence reservation command, in step S1805, the process of grasping the notice symbol corresponding to the probability variation big hit result is executed. In such a process, as the foretelling design corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result, the specific design (the main design to which an odd number is attached) is grasped as the foretelling design.

After executing the process of step S1804 or step S1805, the process advances to step S1806. In step S1806, a process of storing the notice symbol grasped in step S1804 or step S1805 in the notice symbol storage area 244i of the RAM 244 is executed. Then, in step S1807, after executing the process of storing the notice condition fulfillment flag in the RAM 244, the big hit notice setting process is terminated.

Next, the cancellation notice setting process in step S1708 of the reservation notice setting process (FIG. 40) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1901 in the advance notice setting process for loss, it is determined whether or not the currently received hold command is a hold command for loss reach. If the command received this time is not a hold command against reach-of-loss but a hold command against complete-loss, the advance notice setting process for true-off is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S1901 that it is an off-reach correspondence hold command, then in step S1902 a hold advance notice lottery process for off is executed. In this process, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to execute the suspension notice in the suspension information corresponding to the suspension command received this time. Specifically, by referring to the value of the pending advance notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the pending advance notice lottery table for exiting from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending advance notice. hold a lottery. In the pending advance notice lottery table for loss in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the pending advance notice lottery is set to 10%, which is lower than that of the big win advance notice lottery process.

In the subsequent step S1903, it is determined whether or not the pending advance notice lottery is won based on the processing result of step S1902. When it is determined that the holding advance notice lottery is not won, the loss notice setting processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the holding notice lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1904.

In step S1904, the determination process of the notice symbol corresponding to the out reach is executed. In this processing, based on the received out-reach response hold command, the pattern forming the reach line is specified when executing the reach display in the game cycle of the hold information that triggered the hold command. If the pattern forming the reach line is a specific pattern, the notice pattern corresponding to the loss reach is determined as the specific pattern, and if the pattern forming the reach line is a non-specified pattern, the notice pattern corresponding to the loss reach is determined. The design is determined as a non-specific design.

Then, in step S1905, the process of storing the notice pattern based on the processing result of step S1904 in the corresponding unit area of the reservation area 244h is executed, and in step S1906, after storing the notice condition fulfillment flag in the RAM 244, The out-of-order notice setting process is ended.

That is, in the big hit for notice setting process (step S1707) or for the loss for notice setting process (step S1708) in the hold notice setting process, it is determined whether or not to perform the hold notice based on the received hold command, and the hold notice is performed In this case, the RAM 244 stores an announcement condition establishment flag. By storing the notice condition fulfillment flag, the effect of the notice of suspension is set in the variable display control process (FIG. 28) in the game round to be executed prior to the game round to be subject to the notice of suspension. be.

As already explained, the effects for the pending notice include the normal pending notice as a pending notice using only the main display region Rm and the special pending notice as a pending notice using both the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs. is set. And for the special pending notice, a special pending notice with a fanning effect (hereinafter also referred to as the first special pending notice) and a special pending notice without a fanning effect (hereinafter also referred to as a second special pending notice) are set. there is The first and second special hold notices are set according to the difference in the variable display time of game rounds. Specifically, when a variable display time for reach non-occurrence that is shorter than the time of reach occurrence is set as the variable display time of the game round, the first special hold notice is executed without the fanning effect. When a variable display time is set when a long reach occurs (when a normal reach occurs), a second special hold notice accompanied by a fan effect is executed. In the first special reservation notice, the corresponding movable accessories 170-173 move to the non-shielding position during the standby time after the end of the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1-Z3. In the second special reservation notice, after the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed, the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 move to the non-shielding position after the fanning effect is performed.

In order to determine which special pending notice is to be executed from the difference in the variable display time in this way, in the variable start processing (FIG. 29) of the variable display control processing, the first special pending notice without the fan effect is reach It is set in the effect setting process (step S807) for the pending notice when not occurring (step S804: NO), and the second special pending notice accompanied by the fan effect is the effect setting process (step S805, FIG. 29, 32). Here, the setting of the first special hold notice will be explained first, and then the setting of the second special hold notice will be explained.

In the effect setting process for pending notice, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, a special pending notice effect lottery process is executed in step S2001. In this process, the value of the special hold notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the special hold notice lottery table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 are referred to. Decide whether to execute A lottery table for a big winning result and a lottery table for a losing result are set as the lottery table for the special reservation notice, and the corresponding lottery table is acquired by the reservation information as the object of the reservation notice. Then, using these lottery table and lottery counter, it is determined whether to execute the special reserve notice (first special reserve notice) or to execute the normal reserve notice.

The lottery table for big win results is set to have a higher probability of special hold notice than the lottery table for big win results. The lottery table for losing results is set so that 10% will be a special pending notice.

In the following step S2002, it is determined whether or not to execute the special holding notice effect based on the processing result of step S2001. In the case of executing the normal holding notice effect instead of the special holding notice effect, in the subsequent step S2003, the stop result determination processing for the normal holding notice is executed. In this stop result setting process, it is grasped whether the information of the notice pattern stored in step S1806 or step S1905 is a non-specific pattern or a specific pattern, and which pattern is selected based on the grasped information. It is determined whether all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 should be stopped. Then, the stop result table for normal hold notice corresponding to the determined symbols is read out from the ROM 243, and the combination of symbols to be stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5 in the normal hold notice is determined.

Here, the stop result table for normal hold notice will be described with reference to FIG. 44(a). Note that FIG. 44(a) illustrates a stop result table for the medium line L2 when the number attached to the advance notice symbol is "7". In addition, the sub-symbols arranged between the main symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are conveniently indicated by intermediate numbers between the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols, and are displayed on the display screen G. As a specific example of the stop result, the stop result of the address information D(1) is simplified and shown.

In the stop result table for normal hold notice, a plurality of stop results are set for stopping the same main symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm according to the combination of symbols to be stopped on the activated lines L1 to L5. , information of the stop result is stored as address information. In this case, the same main symbols do not stop together on any of the valid lines L1 to L5, and the same main symbols are used in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 on any of the valid lines L1 to L5. It is set so that a reach line is not formed by For example, when the address information D(1) is selected and the advance notice symbol (7) is to be stopped at the upper stage of the middle line L2 and the middle and lower stages of the right line L3, "7 , sub-symbols between "6" and "7", and sub-symbols between "6" and "7" are set to be stopped in this order.

As for the types of stop results of normal hold notice, from all types (3×3×3=27) in which the same main pattern is stopped in all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm, in the effective lines L1 to L5 The number is excluding the symbol combination (5) corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same main symbols stop together and the symbol combination (5 lines x 2 types) that results in out of reach, specifically 27. -5-10=12 types.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process for pending notice (FIG. 43), in the stop result determination process of step S2003, one stop result is determined from the stop result table for normal pending notice, and the address information thereof is stored in the RAM 244. Stored in the result address storage area 244d. Then, in the following step S2004, the effect pattern determination process for normal hold notice is executed. The stop result determined in step S2003 and the effect pattern determined in step S2004 are output to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command in step S809 of the process for starting fluctuation (FIG. 29). . Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 161 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the normal pending notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at predetermined display positions in the display screen G. FIG.

If the special hold notice is to be executed in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, stop result setting processing for special hold notice is executed. In this stop result setting process, it is grasped whether the information of the notice pattern stored in step S1806 or step S1905 is a non-specific pattern or a specific pattern, and which pattern is selected based on the grasped information. It is determined whether or not the pattern corresponds to the previous notice. Then, the stop result table for the special reserve notice corresponding to the determined notice corresponding symbols is read out from the ROM 243, and the combination of symbols to be stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5 in the special reserve notice is determined.

Here, the stop result table for special hold notice will be described with reference to FIG. 44(b). Note that FIG. 44(b) illustrates a stop result table for the middle line L2 when the number attached to the advance notice symbol is "7". In addition, the sub-symbols arranged between the main symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are conveniently indicated by intermediate numbers between the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols, and are displayed on the display screen G. As a specific example of the stop symbol, the stop result of the address information E(3) is simplified and shown.

In the stop result table for special hold notice, the same main symbols are stopped in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs according to the combination of symbols to be stopped on the activated lines L1 to L5. are set, and the information of the stop result is stored as address information for each. In this case, the same main symbols do not stop together on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 and the non-activated lines L6 to L11, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. Z3 is set so that reach lines are not formed by the same main symbol. For example, when the address information E(3) is selected and the previous notice symbol (7) is to be stopped at the upper part of the middle line L2, the middle part of the right non-effective line L6, and the lower part of the left line L1, A combination of symbols to be stopped is set in the order of the main symbols with "7", the main symbols with "6", and the sub-symbols between "7" and "8" from the top.

As for the types of the stop result of the special hold notice, from all types (5×5×5=125) in which the same main pattern is stopped in all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs, A symbol combination (5) corresponding to a big winning result in which the same main symbols stop together on the activated lines L1 to L5, and a non-effective aligned symbol combination (5) in which the same main symbols stop together on the non-effective lines L6 to L11 6), the out-of-reach symbol combination (5 lines x 4 types), and the symbol combination (12) of the above-mentioned normal hold notice, specifically, 125-5-6. -20-12=82 types.

In the special suspension notice, the symbols stopped in the sub-display region Rs are used in addition to the symbols stopped in the main display region Rm, so that there are more types of stop results than in the normal suspension notice. there is Therefore, the outcome of the pending notice is varied, and the diversification of the effects is realized.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process for pending notice (FIG. 43), in the stop result determination process in step S2005, one stop result is determined from the stop result table for special pending notice and its address information is stored in the RAM 244. Stored in the result address storage area 244d. Then, in the following step S2006, the effect pattern determination process for special hold notice is executed.

The stop result determined in step S2005 and the effect pattern determined in step S2006 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29). Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 161 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the special reservation notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed at predetermined display positions in the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After executing the processing of step S2006, the processing of storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2007. Then, in step S2008, based on the processing result of step S2005, a process of storing the movable role object to be drive-controlled in the role object storage area 244g is executed. Information on the movable accessory to be drive-controlled is stored in the stop result table for special hold notice. For example, when the stop result of the address information E(3) is selected in step S2005, it is stored that the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 should be driven and controlled. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 in the variable mid-use process (FIG. 35), and opening/closing control of the corresponding movable role (steps S1209 to step S1214) and display effects on the symbol display device 161 are performed.

After executing the process of step S2004 or step S2008, after executing the process of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244 in step S2009, the effect setting process for this pending notice is terminated. The notice execution flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the notice condition is satisfied and that it is a game cycle in which one of the pending notices is executed.

Next, a description will be given of the processing related to the setting of the second special reservation notice accompanied by the fanning effect. Such processing is performed in the effect setting processing for generating reach (FIG. 32) in the processing for starting fluctuation.

Referring to FIG. 32 again, when the game cycle to be started is the game cycle corresponding to the occurrence of reachable reach and the reach mode is the normal reach display (step S1001: YES), the notice condition fulfillment flag is set. is stored (step S1004: YES), the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, the information stored in the register in step S801 in the process for starting fluctuation (FIG. 29) is rewritten from the game round in which reach occurs to the game round in which the special hold notice is performed.

In the following step S1006, stop result determination processing for special notice is executed, and in step S1007, effect pattern determination processing for special hold notice is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S2005 and S2006. Then, the stop result determined in step S1006 and the production pattern determined in step S1007 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the process for starting fluctuation (FIG. 29). be. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 161 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the special reservation notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

In the subsequent step S1008, processing for storing an opening flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and in step S1009, processing for storing a fan effect flag in the RAM 244 is executed. In step S1010, a process of storing the movable accessory to be driven and controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2008. As a result, in the process for mid-variation (FIG. 35), an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, and the process for the fanning effect (steps S1202 to step S1207) and the display effect in the symbol display device 161 are performed, and step S1208. , the processing of opening/closing control of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 (steps S1209 to S1214) and display effects on the pattern display device 161 are performed. And after performing the process which stores a notice execution flag in RAM244 in step S1011, the production|presentation setting process for reach generation is complete|finished.

That is, when setting the first special reservation notice without the excitement effect, the process of storing the excitement effect flag is not performed, and when the second special reservation notice with the excitement effect is performed, the process of storing the excitement effect flag is performed. The processing configuration is the same for the stop result determination processing, the performance pattern determination processing, and the processing for opening/closing control of the movable accessories 170 to 173.

In addition, in the effect setting process for generating ready-to-win, the stop result is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned special reservation notice, but the processing related to the non-effective notice effect in which the movable accessories 170 to 173 do not move to the non-shielding position is also performed. Such processing is performed in steps S1023 to S1028 when the non-validity notice effect is won in the non-validity notice lottery process of step S1019 (step S1020: YES).

That is, in step S1023, the information stored in the register in step S801 in the process for starting the fluctuation (FIG. 29) is rewritten from the game round in which reach occurs to the game round in which the special hold notice effect is performed. By the way, as described above, in the game round, the non-effective notice effect is performed instead of the special reservation notice effect, but the special reservation notice and the non-effective notice have the same pattern stop result and effect pattern, and the movable accessory 170 The only difference is whether ~173 moves to the unoccluded position. Therefore, in step S1023, first of all, it is stored as a game round in which a special holding notice effect is performed as the effect of the current game round. By doing so, the number of types of performance modes of game rounds to be stored is reduced, and the storage capacity is reduced.

In the following step S1024, a stop result setting process for special hold notice is executed, and in step S1025, effect pattern determination process for special hold notice is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing of steps S1006 and S2006 and steps S1007 and S2007. Then, the stop result determined in step S1024 and the production pattern determined in step S1025 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the process for starting fluctuation (FIG. 29). be. Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the pattern display device 161 so as to perform a variable display corresponding to the special hold notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. However, since the opening flag is not stored in the above processing, the effect executed as described above is not the special pending notice effect but the invalid notice effect.

Then, in step S2026, a process of storing a non-effective notice flag in various flag storage area 244b of RAM 244 is executed. The non-effective notice flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that it is a game round in which the non-effective notice effect is performed.

In the subsequent step S2027, a process of storing a fan effect flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and in a step S2028, a process of storing the movable accessory to be drive-controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2008. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the process for mid-fluctuation (FIG. 35), and the process for fanning effect (steps S1202 to S1207) and the display effect on the symbol display device 161 are performed. After executing the process of step S2028, the effect setting process for occurrence of this reach is finished.

Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned ineffective notice effects do not accompany the fanning effects. This is set in the effect setting process (step S808) for normal deviation in the process for starting fluctuation (FIG. 29). Such processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34 again.

When the non-validity notice effect is won in the non-validity notice lottery process performed in step S1105 (step S1106: YES), the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, a process of storing an invalid notice effect in the register as the effect of the current game round is executed. In subsequent step S1109, stop result setting processing for special hold notice is executed, and in step S1110, effect pattern determination processing for special hold notice is executed. These processes are the same as those of steps S1006, S1024, S2005, S1007, S1025, and S2006. Then, the stop result determined in step S1109 and the effect pattern determined in step S1110 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29).

The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control so that the pattern display device 161 performs variable display corresponding to the special hold notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. However, since the opening flag is not stored in the above processing, the effect is not the special pending notice effect but the invalid notice effect.

That is, in the non-effective notice effect, the stop result is the same as the special reservation notice effect, and since the non-effective notice effect and the special reservation notice effect differ only in the presence or absence of the opening/closing control of the movable accessories 170 to 173, the effect pattern is also the same. there is In this way, while the content of the variable display on the display screen G is made common, the effect (whether it is a special pending notice effect or an invalid notice effect) is differentiated by the opening/closing control of the movable accessories 170 to 173. , to achieve both diversification of presentation and simplification of processing for variable display.

After executing the process of step S1110, in step S1111, after executing the process of storing the non-validity notice flag in the RAM 244, this normal out-of-normal effect setting process ends.

As described above, at the start of each game round, the stop result and variation pattern on the display screen G are determined, and the effect of each game round is performed. Here, there is a case where a winning to the operation port 115 occurs at the timing when the performance of the game round is being performed, and the suspension information based on the winning becomes the target of the suspension notice. In this case, in the present embodiment, a process for performing a suspension notice is performed in the game round being executed. This processing will be described below.

This process is performed in steps S1215 and S1216 of the process for mid-variation (FIG. 35). Referring again to FIG. 35, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the RAM 244 does not store the notice execution flag although the RAM 244 stores the notice condition satisfaction flag. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as already described, the notice execution flag is stored by executing the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29) in the state where the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored. Therefore, the situation in which the notice execution flag is not stored despite the fact that the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored is after the fluctuation start processing is executed, that is, the symbol fluctuation display is started in one game round. It means that a new winning to the operation port 115 occurs later, and the conditions for executing the pending notice for the pending information acquired based on the winning have been established.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, the process for replacement is executed in step S1216, and then the process for mid-variation ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1215, this process for mid-variation ends immediately. Here, replacement processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45 .

In the replacement process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the non-validity notice flag is stored. If it is determined that the non-effectiveness notice flag is stored, the non-effectiveness notice flag is erased in the following step S2102. Then, in step S2103, the release flag is stored in the RAM 244, and in step S2103, the advance notice execution flag is stored in the RAM 244, and then this replacement processing ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a non-effective notice effect is set in which the movable accessories 170 to 173 do not move to the non-shielded position although the special hold notice and the stop result are the same at the start of the game cycle, The non-effective notice effect is changed to a special hold notice that the movable accessories 170 to 173 move to the non-shielding position. In this case, it is possible to suppress a local increase in the processing load without requiring correction of the stopped symbols.

On the other hand, if the invalidity notice flag is not stored in step S2101, stop result correction processing is executed in step S2105, and then this replacement processing ends. Here, the stop result correction processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46 .

In the stop result correction process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the game round being executed corresponds to the super ready-to-win display. When it is determined that the game round corresponds to the super ready-to-win display, the stop symbol correction processing is terminated as it is. That is, in the case of the super reach display, even if the notice condition is satisfied, the super reach display is performed as it is without performing the pending notice.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a game cycle corresponding to the super ready-to-win display, the information of the notice symbol is read out from the notice symbol storage area 244i in step S2202. Then, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are in high speed fluctuation.

Referring again to FIG. 22, the variable display of symbols in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. High-speed fluctuation display (or first speed display) is performed so that identification of each pattern displayed in the display screen G in all of the pattern rows is impossible or difficult in appearance. After that, when a period of T1 elapses from the start of fluctuation, as shown in FIG. is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display (or the second speed display, which is slower than the first speed display) so that the display becomes easier in appearance, and when a period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the variation, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped. Further, when the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. The high-speed variation display is switched to the low-speed variation display so that the symbols can be easily identified from the outside, and when a period of T3 has elapsed from the start of variation, the variation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. Further, when the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation in this way, as shown in FIG. The high-speed variation display is switched to the low-speed variation display so that the pattern can be easily identified from the appearance. Then, when a period of T4 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped.

In the above configuration, the periods T1, T2, T3, and T4 are determined in accordance with various performance tables stored in the ROM 243, more specifically, in one-to-one correspondence with various performance patterns. Then, the ready-to-win effect and the like are performed after the period T3 has passed and until the period T4 has passed.

It should be noted that it is not essential that the timing at which the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the timing at which the variable display speed of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are switched at the same time, and even if the two timings are off. good. Similarly, it is not essential that the timing of stopping the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 and the timing of switching the variable display speed of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 be at the same time. good too. In addition, T1, T2, and T3 correspond to the number of hold information stored at the start of the game round, more specifically, the number of hold information stored at the start of the game round on a one-to-one basis. It may be a configuration defined by Furthermore, when the number of reserved information stored at the start of a game round is the maximum number of reserved items, any one of T1, T2, and T3 may be set to "0".

As already explained, the MPU 242 uses the elapsed counter provided in the RAM 244 to measure the time from the start of the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 161 . In addition, in the progress table provided in the ROM 243, the information of each counter value corresponding to the above T1, T2, T3 is in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of the effect pattern that can be set at the start of the game cycle. is stored in Then, in step S2203, by determining whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T1 in the progress table, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 fluctuate at high speed. It is determined whether or not it is in the middle.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, when it is determined in step S2203 that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are in the process of high-speed fluctuation, the first correction process is executed in step S2204, and then the stop result is corrected. End the process. Further, if all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not in high speed fluctuation at step S2203, that is, if the period of T1 has passed, it is determined whether the lower symbol row Z3 is in high speed fluctuation at step S2205. determine whether In this process, it is determined whether or not the current value stored in the progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T2 in the progress table. If the lower symbol row Z3 is fluctuating at high speed, that is, if the period T2 has not yet passed, the second correction process is executed in step S2206, and then the stop result correction process is terminated. If the lower symbol row Z3 is not fluctuating at high speed in step S2205, that is, if the period T2 has passed, it is checked in step S2207 if the middle symbol row Z2 is fluctuating at high speed. judge. In this process, it is determined whether or not the current value stored in the progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T3 in the progress table. When the middle symbol row Z2 is in the process of high speed fluctuation, that is, before the period T3 has elapsed, the third correction process is executed in step S2208, and then the stop result correction process is terminated. In step S2207, if the medium symbol row Z2 is not in the process of high-speed fluctuation, that is, if the period T3 has passed, the stop result correction process is terminated without correcting the stop result.

The first correction process in step S2204, the second correction process in step S2206, and the third correction process in step S2208 will be described below.

In the first correction process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, a special hold notice lottery process is executed in step S2301, and it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won in step S2302. The processing of steps S2301 and S2302 is the same as the processing of steps S2001 and S2002 in the effect setting processing for suspension notice (FIG. 43). If the special reservation notice effect is won in step S2205, the process of storing the open flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2303, and in the subsequent step S2304, the target movable auditors 170 to 173 are stored in the auditory article storage area 244g. Execute the process of storing in Such processing is similar to step S2008 and the like. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 in the process for changing during the next and subsequent times, and the process for controlling the opening and closing of the movable accessory is performed.

In the subsequent step S2305, it is determined whether or not the game round being executed is a game round corresponding to the normal reach display. In the case of the normal reach display, a process of storing a swing flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2306. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the process for changing during the next time onward.

If the special hold notice is not won in step S2302, if the normal reach display is not displayed in step S2304 (no reach is generated), or after the process of step S2306 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, the ROM 243 refers to the first stage correction table as the first stage correction information group. As shown in FIG. 48(a), the first-stage correction table is one pair for any combination of the information of the initial effect pattern and the information of the notice pattern except for the case where the super ready-to-win display occurs. 1, the information of the effect pattern for the first correction is set, and the address information is set corresponding to the information of the effect pattern for each first correction. In this case, all the information of the effect pattern for the first correction is set as the information of the effect pattern after the period of T1 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. However, the information of each effect pattern for the first modification is set so as not to change the variable display time in the originally set effect pattern.

Incidentally, in the first-stage correction table, the information of the effect patterns of the special pending notice effect and the normal pending notice effect are set in correspondence with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, the effect pattern to be referred to differs depending on whether the special holding notice effect has been won in step S2302 or not.

In the subsequent step S2308, the address information for the first correction corresponding to the combination of the type information of the design for notice specified in step S2202 and the information of the effect pattern being executed stored in the pattern address storage area 244e. (first correction information) is specified from the first stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area 244j provided in the RAM 244. FIG.

By storing the address information for the first correction in the correction address storage area 244j, the MPU 242 judges that the period T1 has passed from the start of fluctuation based on the information of the elapsed counter. The light emitting section 58 and the speaker section 59 are driven and controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the information of the effect pattern for the first correction.

Then, in step S2309, a correction command including the address information for the first correction stored in step S2308 is output to the display control device 212. FIG. In the display control device 212, the address information for the first correction is stored in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 on the basis of receiving the correction command. The program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the first stage correction table shown in FIG. 48(a). Then, the variable display pattern for the first correction is specified from the address information for the first correction, and the variable display of the pattern is executed in accordance with the variable display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After executing the process of step S2309, the process of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2310, and then the first correction process is terminated.

Next, the second correction processing in step S2206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the second correction process, first, in step S2401, the information about the stopped symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 in the main display area Rm is grasped based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d. In this case, as the type information of the stop symbol, there are cases where there is one main symbol and cases where there are two main symbols. Both of them are specified as symbols to be determined.

In the subsequent step S2402, it is determined whether or not the first correction condition is satisfied for the design to be determined specified in step S2401. The first correction condition is that when the information of the notice pattern is a specific pattern, that is, a main pattern with an odd number, the first correction condition is satisfied if the pattern to be determined is a specific pattern. is set to be determined, and when the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, when the symbol to be determined is a non-specified symbol, the first It is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

When it is determined that the first correction condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2403, and the information of the stopped symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 in the sub-display area Rs is grasped based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d. do. In this case, there are two types of stop symbol type information: 0 and 2 main symbols. In the case of , both of them are specified as symbols to be judged.

In the following step S2404, it is determined whether or not the second correction condition is satisfied for the design to be determined specified in step S2403. Similar to the first correction condition, the second correction condition is that when the information of the notice pattern is a specific pattern, that is, a main pattern with an odd number, the pattern to be determined is a specific pattern. 2. When it is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is established, and the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, the symbol to be determined is It is set so that it is determined that the second correction condition is established when the symbol is a non-specific symbol.

That is, the first correction condition and the second correction condition differ in the pattern to be judged. The symbol that stops is the object of determination. In this way, by making the stopped symbols in the sub-display area Rs into determination objects in addition to the stopped symbols in the main display area Rm, the possibility that the correction condition is satisfied is improved. More specifically, in step S2401, if the stop pattern in the main display area Rm is a combination of a specified symbol and a non-specified symbol, the first correction condition is met regardless of which symbol is used for notice, but the main display area If the stop symbol of Rm is one of the specified symbol and the non-specified symbol and the notice symbol is the other symbol, the first correction condition is not established. On the other hand, in step S2404, even if the stop pattern in the main display area Rm for which the first correction condition is not satisfied is one of the specific pattern and the non-specific pattern, and the notice pattern is the other pattern, , the second correction condition is satisfied because the other symbol is the stop symbol in the sub-display area Rs.

If it is determined in step S2404 that the second correction condition is not satisfied, the stop symbol correction process is terminated. That is, when the second correction condition is not satisfied, the performance of the game cycle is continued in accordance with the performance pattern set in the variation start processing without executing the suspension notice. Incidentally, a negative determination in step S2404 means that two main symbols stop in the main display area Rm, and the stopped symbols are specific symbols (main symbols with 1 and 9 attached). Furthermore, it is only when the design for notice is a non-specific design.

If it is determined that the second correction condition is established in step S2404, the process of storing the open flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2405, and the target movable accessories 170 to 173 are executed in step S2406. is stored in the role item storage area 244g. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 of the variable intermediate use process (FIG. 35) from the next time onward, and the opening/closing control process of the movable accessory is performed.

In the subsequent step S2407, it is determined whether or not the game round being executed is a game round corresponding to the normal reach display. When it is determined that the game round corresponds to the normal reach display, a process of storing a fanning flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2408. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the process for changing during the next time onward.

If the first correction condition is satisfied in step S2402, if the normal reach display is not displayed (no reach occurs) in step S2406, or if the process of step S2408 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2409. In step S2409, the second stage correction table as the second stage correction information group stored in the ROM 243 is referred to. The second stage correction table, as shown in FIG. 48(b), is for any combination of the information of the initial variable display pattern and the type information of the symbol to be determined, excluding the case where the super reach display occurs. Information of the variable display pattern for the second correction is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each other, and address information is set in correspondence with each information of the variable display pattern for the second correction. In this case, all the information of the variable display pattern for the second correction is set as the information of the variable display pattern after the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the variable display pattern information for each second correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set variable display pattern.

Incidentally, in the second-stage correction table, the information of the effect patterns of the special pending notice effect and the normal pending notice effect is set in correspondence with the information of the notice pattern. Therefore, in the above step S2402, when the first correction condition is satisfied and the correction is made to the normal pending notice effect, and in the step S2404, when the second correction condition is satisfied and the correction is made to the special reserve notice effect, reference is made. The performance pattern is different.

In the subsequent step S2410, the type information of the pattern to be determined for which the correction condition is satisfied in step S2402 or step S2404, and the performance pattern of the game round being executed stored in the pattern address storage area 244e are displayed. The address information for the second correction (second correction information) corresponding to the combination of the information and is specified from the second stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area 244j.

In addition, if the correction conditions are satisfied for any of the patterns when multiple patterns are subject to judgment, the design to be judged that the above correction conditions are satisfied will be determined by lottery. It is configured. However, it is not limited to this, and it is configured so that the symbol with the smaller number attached or the symbol with the larger number is the symbol to be judged for which the correction condition is satisfied. good too.

By storing the address information for the second correction in the correction address storage area 244j, the MPU 242 judges that the period T2 has passed since the start of the fluctuation based on the information of the elapsed counter, and then the number set this time is changed. 2, the light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 are driven and controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the information of the modified variable display pattern.

Then, in step S2411, a correction command including the address information for the second correction stored in step S2410 is output to the display control device 212. FIG. In the display control device 212, the address information for the second correction is stored in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 on the basis of receiving the correction command. The program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the second stage correction table shown in FIG. 48(b). Then, the variable display pattern for the second correction is specified from the address information for the second correction, and the variable display of the pattern is executed in accordance with the variable display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After executing the process of step S2411, the process of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2412, and then the second correction process is terminated.

Next, the third correction processing in step S2208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the third correction process, first, in step S2501, based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d, the stop symbol information of the upper symbol row Z1 and the stopped symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 in the main display area Rm are displayed. information and grasp. In this case, there are cases where the number of main symbols is 1 or 2 as the stop symbol information of the upper symbol row Z1, but in the case of 1 main symbol, it is specified as the symbol to be judged in the upper symbol row Z1. However, in the case of two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. Further, there are cases where the number of main symbols is 1 and cases where the number of main symbols is 2 as the stop symbol information of the lower symbol row Z3. , in the case of two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3.

In the following step S2502, it is determined whether or not the third correction condition is satisfied for the design to be determined specified in step S2501. The third correction condition is satisfied when the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3 have the same type of common symbol. It is set so that it will not be judged as Also, even if there is a common pattern of the same type, if the information of the notice pattern is a specific pattern, that is, a main pattern with an odd number, the common pattern of the same type is displayed. It is set so that it is determined that the third correction condition is satisfied when the pattern is a specific pattern, and when the type information of the notice pattern is a non-specific pattern, that is, a main pattern with an even number, the above-mentioned It is set so that it is determined that the third correction condition is established when the common symbols of the same type are non-specific symbols. Furthermore, in the third correction condition, even if the common symbols of the same type exist, if the stop result corresponds to the reach display, that is, if the reach line is formed by the common symbols of the same type is set so that the third correction condition is not satisfied.

When it is determined that the third correction condition is not met, in step S2503, based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d, the number of stopped symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 in the sub-display area Rs is increased. Information and information of the lower pattern row Z3 are grasped. In this case, there are cases where the number of main symbols is 1 or 2 as the stop symbol information of the upper symbol row Z1, but in the case of 1 main symbol, it is specified as the symbol to be judged in the upper symbol row Z1. However, in the case of two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. Further, there are cases where the number of main symbols is 1 and cases where the number of main symbols is 2 as the stop symbol information of the lower symbol row Z3. , in the case of two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3.

In the following step S2504, it is determined whether or not the fourth correction condition is satisfied for the design to be determined specified in steps S2501 and S2503. The fourth correction condition is that the determination target symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 and the determination target symbols of the lower symbol row Z3 in the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs have the same type of common pattern. In this case, it is set so that it is not determined that the correction condition is satisfied. Also, even if there is a common pattern of the same type, if the information of the notice pattern is a specific pattern, that is, a main pattern with an odd number, the common pattern of the same type is displayed. It is set so that it is determined that the fourth correction condition is satisfied when the pattern is a specific pattern, and when the type information of the notice pattern is a non-specific pattern, that is, a main pattern with an even number, the above-mentioned It is set so that it is determined that the fourth correction condition is established when the common symbols of the same type are non-specific symbols.

Here, unlike the third correction condition, under the fourth correction condition, when there are common symbols of the same type, the symbols stopped in the main display region Rm and the symbols stopped in the sub display region Rs When a reach line is formed, or when a reach line is formed between patterns that stop in the sub-display area Rs, the fourth correction condition is satisfied on the condition that the above other conditions are satisfied. is set to As described above, in the present embodiment, the game round in which the out-of-reach effect is executed is not subject to the suspension notice. In other words, the third correction condition is set such that if the reach line is formed, the third correction condition is not met.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned fourth correction condition, as a result of the variable display, the game round that results in a stop result of out of reach, that is, the variable display is ended, and the stop result is all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 like a pending notice. When the pattern of the same kind stops at the beginning of the game, the game cycle is set to be treated as a suspension notice. Furthermore, when the reach line is formed including the symbols stopped in the sub-display region Rs, the symbols stopped in the sub-display region Rs are not made visible, that is, the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are unshielded. I'm trying not to display the reach without moving to the position. That is, in the fourth correction condition, when the reach line is formed including the pattern that stops in the sub-display area Rs, although the reach display is not performed as described above, as a result, the game is stopped as a result of being out of reach. It is set so that the fourth correction condition is satisfied.

As described above, the stop symbols in the sub-display area Rs are subject to determination in addition to the stop symbols in the main display area Rm, thereby increasing the possibility that the correction condition is satisfied. Specifically, the patterns in which the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 have the same kind of common symbol are excluded from the ready-to-win pattern when only the main display area Rm is to be judged. While there are 4 patterns for one type of pattern, there are 12 patterns including the sub-display area Rs, which is three times as many.

If the fourth correction condition is not satisfied in step S2504, the third correction process is terminated. That is, in this case, the effect of the game cycle is continued according to the effect pattern set in the fluctuation start process without executing the suspension notice.

If the fourth correction condition is established in step S2504, the process of storing the open flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2505, and in the subsequent step S2506, the target movable accessories 170 to 173 are used. A process of storing in the object storage area 244g is executed. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 of the variable intermediate use process (FIG. 35) from the next time onward, and the process for controlling the opening and closing of the movable accessory is performed. Unlike the first and second correction processes, the third correction process does not determine whether or not normal reach display is displayed before correction. This is because neither the third correction condition nor the fourth correction condition is satisfied in the present third correction process if the display before correction is the normal reach display.

If the third correction condition is satisfied in step S2502, or if the process of step S2506 has been executed, the process advances to step S2507. In step S2507, the third stage correction table as the third stage correction information group stored in the ROM 243 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 48(c), the third-stage correction table is for any combination of the information of the initial fluctuation display pattern and the type information of the symbol to be judged, excluding the case where super reach occurs. The information of the variable display pattern for the third correction is set in one-to-one correspondence, and the address information is set in correspondence with the information of the variable display pattern for each third correction. In this case, all the information of the variable display pattern for the third correction is set as the information of the variable display pattern after the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the variable display pattern information for each third correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set variable display pattern.

Incidentally, in the third-stage correction table, the information of the effect patterns of the special pending notice effect and the normal pending notice effect are set in correspondence with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, in step S2502, when the third correction condition is satisfied and correction is made to the normal pending notice effect, and in step S2504, when the fourth correction condition is satisfied and correction is made to the special reserve notice effect, reference is made. The performance pattern is different.

In the subsequent step S2508, information on the type of the symbol to be determined for which the correction condition is established in step S2502 or step S2504 and the performance pattern of the game round being executed stored in the pattern address storage area 244e are displayed. The address information for the third correction (third correction information) corresponding to the combination of the information and is specified from the third stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area 244j.

In addition, if the correction conditions are satisfied for any of the patterns when multiple patterns are subject to judgment, the design to be judged that the above correction conditions are satisfied will be determined by lottery. It is configured. However, it is not limited to this, and it is configured so that the symbol with the smaller number attached or the symbol with the larger number is the symbol to be judged when the above correction condition is satisfied. good too.

Since the address information for the third correction is stored in the correction address storage area 244j, the MPU 242 determines that the period T3 has passed since the start of fluctuation based on the information of the elapsed counter. 3. The light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 are driven and controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern for correction.

Then, in step S2509, a correction command including the third correction address information stored in step S2508 is output to the display control device 212. FIG. In the display control device 212, address information for the third correction is stored in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 on the basis of receiving the correction command. The program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 also stores a table similar to the third stage correction table shown in FIG. 48(c). Then, the variable display pattern for the third correction is specified from the address information for the third correction, and the variable display of the pattern is executed in accordance with the variable display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After executing the process of step S2509, the process of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2510, and then the third correction process ends.

As a result of the above, when the advance notice condition is established while the game round is displayed in a variable manner, the suspended advance notice can be executed in the game round in which the variable display is being performed. In this case, not only the main display area Rm but also the sub-display area Rs are subject to determination for the correction in the pattern correction process. can be increased.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A reservation notice according to the reservation information stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation ball storage area 232 and not subject to the judgment is executed in the game round before the game round related to the reservation information. Sometimes. As a result, for the player, it is only a game that causes the game ball to enter the operation hole 115 to win, and a game that confirms the determination result of the hold information obtained based on the win in the game round related to the hold information. If a plurality of pieces of pending information are stored in the pending area RE, the result of the pending information that is the target of the right/fail judgment after the order of the right/fail judgment is displayed according to the content of the hold notice. A game of predicting by using is added to diversify the game. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

The suspension notice is made according to the display mode on the display screen G of the pattern display device 161. - 特許庁As a result, if the player pays attention to the display screen G in order to grasp the result of judgment of each game round, he or she can automatically confirm the notice of suspension, and even if the notice of suspension has been made, it will not be overlooked. It is suppressed that it will be lost. Further, by performing the suspension notice based on the stop result of the symbols of each game round on the display screen G, the effect of preventing the suspension notice from being overlooked is enhanced. In particular, by performing the suspension notice according to the mode of the stop result in the variable display of the symbols of each game cycle, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of understanding the timing of the suspension notice for the player and to miss the suspension notice. is more reduced.

In the configuration in which the pending notice is given according to the mode of the stop result as described above, the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs are set as regions in which the pattern on the display screen G is stopped and displayed, and in the sub-display region Rs The symbols to be stopped are configured to be switchable between the visible state and the invisible state by the movable accessories 170-173. Then, it is set so that the suspension notice is also given according to the stop result including the symbol to be stopped in the sub-display area Rs. Even if the suspension notice is performed, if it is performed as a result of stopping including the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs, the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs is difficult to see as described above. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice that the pending notice will be performed until the pattern is switched from a state in which it is difficult to see to a state in which it can be seen. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance when the suspension notice is given. In addition, when the pattern is switched from a state that is difficult to see to a state that is visible, the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are moved, so that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it. can. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the pending notice.

Further, when the pending notice is given using the symbols stopped in the sub-display area Rs, not only the effect on the display screen G but also the actions of the movable accessories 170 to 173 are accompanied, so the effect becomes flashy. As a result, the degree of attention to such pending notice is further improved.

When the advance notice condition is met (when the advance notice condition fulfillment flag is stored) during the variable display of the symbols in each game round, the stopped symbols are stopped in the main display area Rm in the game round or the stopped symbols are used. It is determined whether or not it is possible to execute the reservation notice, and if it is executable, the stop symbol of the symbol sequence that is changing is changed. It was set as the structure which adds the design which makes it stop or stops. In other words, both the number of symbols used as materials for determining whether or not a pending notice can be executed and the type of pending notice (normal pending notice or special pending notice) are increased compared to the configuration in which only the normal pending notice is performed. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically improve the possibility that the pending notice can be executed in the game round when the notice condition is satisfied during the variable display.

In order to exhibit such a function, first, it is determined whether or not the normal reservation notice can be executed, and when the normal reservation notice cannot be executed, it is determined whether or not the special reservation notice can be executed. In the case of the normal suspension notice, the suspension notice is effective only with the stop pattern in the main display area Rm regardless of whether or not the movable accessories 170 to 173 are operated. It is thought that they have a sense of security that the suspension notice will be effective. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the normal pending notice is preferentially executed, the player can enjoy the subsequent performance (the subsequent game round) with peace of mind.

On the other hand, in a situation where the notice condition is satisfied at the start of the game cycle, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the trigger for the establishment of the hold condition, the special hold notice is given priority over the normal hold notice. It was configured. That is, when the advance notice condition is met during the game round, the normal hold notice is given priority regardless of the trigger of the notice condition establishment, and when the notice condition is met at the start of the game round, the special hold notice is given. takes precedence. For this reason, for example, in a situation where any reservation notice is made in the previous game round, if a special hold notice is made in the game round, there is a high possibility that the subsequent game round will result in a big hit. In a situation where no suspension notice is given in the previous game round, if the notice condition is met and a normal hold notice is given in the game round, then even if it is not a special hold notice, it will result in a big win after that. Expectations swell. In other words, although the special reserve notice is basically more likely to result in a big win after that, winning to the operation port 115 occurs during the game cycle, and the normal reserve notice is performed in that game cycle. In this case, the degree of expectation for the subsequent jackpot result is comparable to that of the special reservation notice. By doing so, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation even with the normal suspension notice without increasing the degree of attention to the special suspension notice too much.

As described above, when the advance notice condition is established in the middle of the game round and the suspension notice is executed in the game round, the stop symbols of the symbol row during high-speed fluctuation display are changed. In the case of high-speed fluctuation display, it is difficult for the player to identify the changing pattern, and by changing such a changing pattern, the discomfort given to the player by the change is reduced. can do.

Even if the notice conditions are not met at the start of the game round, a lottery will be held for an invalid notice effect that will result in the same stop result as the stop result in the special hold notice, and if the lottery is won, the stop in the special hold notice The configuration is such that the variable display is started so as to obtain the result. As a result, when the notice condition is met in the game round, the special hold notice is given only by putting the movable accessories 170 to 173 into the non-shielding state without changing the symbols that are fluctuating or the symbols that are stopped. can be done. Therefore, when the notice condition is satisfied during the game round, the pattern change processing is not required as described above, and an increase in the processing load due to execution of the pending notice can be suppressed.

Especially in this configuration, even during the stationary display period from when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped to when they are fixedly displayed, it is possible to execute the special hold notice because the stopped symbols are not changed. can. As a result, it is possible to further increase the chances of receiving a hold notice.

Also, when winning the non-effective advance notice performance, the stop result of the game round is set to the same stop result as the above-mentioned special holding notice performance, and the non-effective notice flag is stored in the RAM 244. - 特許庁By doing so, when the notice condition is satisfied in the game round, the suspension notice is executed only by judging whether or not the non-effective notice flag is stored instead of grasping the stop result. Whether or not it is possible can be determined, and an extreme increase in the processing load can be favorably avoided.

<Second Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, when the hold information corresponding to the game round for which the ready-to-win display is performed is acquired, the notice condition is established with a predetermined probability, that is, when the hold notice is performed is configured such that the ready-to-win display is finally executed in one of the game rounds. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the ready-to-win display is not finally performed even if the hold notice is performed. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below.

First, the out-of-office notice setting process in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the out-of-time notice setting process according to the present embodiment, and shows the process performed in place of the out-of-time notice setting process shown in FIG. In addition, the notice setting process for out is a process executed in step S1708 of the reservation notice setting process (FIG. 40) by the MPU 202 of the effect control device 82 as already described.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is a hold command for out-of-reach reach. If it is determined to be an out-of-reach response pending command, the processing of steps S2602 to S2606 is executed. Since the processing of steps S2602 to S2606 is the same as the processing of steps S1902 to S1906 in the first embodiment, the description is incorporated.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the command is not the out-reach corresponding hold command but the normal-out-out corresponding hold command, the process proceeds to step S2607. In step S2607, it is determined whether or not the production side reserved memory number SN is "2" or more. If the performance-side reserved memory number SN is less than "2", the advance notice setting process for the main failure is terminated as it is. If the effect side reserved memory number SN is greater than or equal to "2", a discontinuous advance notice lottery process is executed in step S2608. In this lottery process, the value obtained from the non-continuous advance notice counter from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the non-continuous advance notice table from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 are referred to, and finally the ready-to-win display is not performed. A lottery is made as to whether or not to execute a non-continuous notice as a pending notice. In subsequent step S2609, it is determined whether or not to execute non-continuous advance notice based on the processing in step S2608. If it is determined that the discontinuous advance notice is not to be executed, the out-of-order notice setting processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S2609 that the discontinuous advance notice is to be executed, then in steps S2610 to S2612, the same processing as in steps S2604 to S2606 is executed. That is, in step S2610, the notice symbol corresponding to the loss is determined, in step S2611, the notice symbol is stored, and in step S2612, the RAM 244 stores the notice condition fulfillment flag.

In the subsequent step S2613, a process of storing a discontinuous flag in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244 is executed. The non-continuous flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that it is in a state of giving a non-continuous notice. In the subsequent step S2614, a process of inputting "2" to the discontinuous counters provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 is executed. The non-continuous counter is a counter for the MPU 242 to grasp the number of games corresponding to the hold information that triggered the non-continuous notice. After the process of step S2614 is executed, this out-of-order notice setting process is terminated.

Next, a description will be given of an effect setting process for a pending notice in the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process for the suspension notice in the present embodiment, and shows the process executed instead of the effect setting process for the stop notice shown in FIG. The suspension notice effect setting process is a process executed in step S807 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29) as already described.

In the effect setting process for pending notice in the present embodiment, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the non-continuous flag is stored in the RAM 244 . If it is determined that the non-continuous flag is stored, processing for subtracting 1 from the non-continuous counter is executed in step S2702. Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether or not the non-continuous counter is "0" based on the processing result of step S2702.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the discontinuity flag is not stored, or if it is determined in step S2703 that the discontinuity counter is not "0", the process advances to step S2704. In step S2704, a special holding notice effect lottery process is executed in the same manner as in step S2001, and in subsequent step S2705, it is determined whether or not to execute a special holding notice effect based on the processing result of step S2704 in the same manner as in step S2002. . When it is determined at step S2705 that the special hold notice effect is not to be executed, the normal hold notice processing is executed at steps S2706 and S2707 in the same manner as the processing at steps S2003 and S2004.

If it is determined at step S2703 that the discontinuous counter is "0", or if it is determined at step S2705 that the special hold notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2708. In step S2708, stop result determination processing for special hold notice is executed, and in subsequent step S2709, effect pattern determination processing for special hold notice is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S2005 and S2006 described above, so the description is incorporated.

In the subsequent step S2710, it is determined whether or not the RAM 244 stores the discontinuity flag. If it is determined that the non-continuous flag is stored, the flow advances to step S2711 to determine whether or not the non-continuous counter is "0". If it is determined in step S2710 that the discontinuity flag is not stored, or if it is determined in step S2711 that the discontinuity counter is not "0", the process advances to step S2712. The processing of steps S2712 and S2713 is the same as the processing of steps S2007 and S2008. In step S2712, the processing of storing the open flag in the RAM 244 is executed. Execute the memorizing process.

After executing the process of step S2707 or step S2713, in step S2714, after executing the process of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244, the effect setting process for this pending notice is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2711 that the non-continuous counter is "0", that is, if the game round corresponds to the hold information that triggered the non-continuous advance notice, the process proceeds to step S2715. In step S2715, the discontinuous flag is cleared. Then, in step S2716, a process is executed in which the effect of the current game round is not the special pending notice effect but the ineffective notice effect. Specifically, in step S2716, a process of storing a non-validity notice flag in RAM 244 is executed, and a process of erasing the notice condition fulfillment flag of RAM 244 is executed. After the processing of step S2716 is executed, the effect setting processing for this pending notice is terminated.

In addition, although detailed description with drawings is omitted, as described in the first embodiment, the pending notice is not only the effect setting process for the pending notice in the process for starting fluctuation, but also the effect setting process for generating reach. (FIG. 32) is also set (when the normal reach is selected, it is set to the special holding notice effect with the fanning effect). Therefore, in the production setting process for reach occurrence in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the notice condition establishment flag is stored in step S1004, similarly to steps S2701 to S2703, first the non-continuous flag is stored, and if it is stored, 1 is subtracted from the discontinuity counter before proceeding to step S1005, and if not stored, the process proceeds directly to step S1005. Since the suspension information that triggers the non-continuous advance notice is the suspension information based on the suspension command corresponding to complete failure, the game times in which the non-continuous counter is "0" do not correspond to the normal ready-to-win display.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the non-continuous notice, in the game round corresponding to the hold information that triggered the non-continuous notice, the special hold notice effect and the stop result are the same, but the corresponding movable accessory 170 ~ A non-effective advance notice effect is performed in which 173 is not in a non-shielded state. In this case, since the advance notice condition fulfillment flag is erased as described above, the suspension advance notice is not performed in subsequent game rounds.

On the other hand, since the notice condition satisfaction flag is erased, the notice condition may be satisfied based on the hold information acquired during execution of the game round. That is, when the advance notice condition is satisfied during execution of the game round corresponding to the hold information that triggered the discontinuous advance notice, the hold notice is performed in that game round. In this case, since the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored and the notice execution flag is not stored, the affirmative determination is made in step S1215 of the process for change (FIG. 35), and the process for replacement (step S1216) is made. ) is performed. In the replacement process (FIG. 45), since the ineffective notice flag is stored as described above, affirmative determination is made in step S2101, and in steps S2102 to S2105 the ineffective notice effect is replaced with the special hold notice effect. is processed. As a result, when the advance notice condition is established in the game cycle corresponding to the hold information that triggered the non-continuous advance notice, it is possible to execute the hold notice.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

As a type of suspension notice, a non-continuous notice is provided in which the suspension notice is performed over a plurality of game rounds but does not develop into a ready-to-win display in the end and the suspension notice is not performed, and the discontinuous notice is triggered. In the game cycle corresponding to the suspension information, that is, in the game cycle in which the suspension announcement is not performed and the ready-to-win display is not performed, the non-effective announcement performance is performed. Then, when the notice condition is established during execution of the game round, the ineffective notice performance is replaced with the special reservation notice performance. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation such as when the ready-to-win display is performed in the next game round even though the pending advance notice is performed in a plurality of game rounds and the continuous pending advance notice is interrupted. .

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the non-effective notice effect is performed in the last game round of the non-continuous notice, even if the notice condition is satisfied in the last game round, Since it is only necessary to replace the non-valid advance notice effect with the special reservation notice effect, it is possible to suppress an extreme increase in the processing load.

Incidentally, the configuration in which the non-effective advance notice effect is performed in the final game round can be applied as a configuration in which the ineffective notice effect is performed in the game round in which some inconvenience may occur if the suspension notice is not executed. This inconvenience may be, for example, the case where the notice condition is met in the last game round of the non-continuous notice effect as described above, or the case where the number of reserved memories is 0 and the game round is being executed. There may be a situation in which the suspension notice is not performed over a plurality of game rounds (situation in which the frequency of execution of the suspension notice is low).

If the reservation condition is satisfied while the number of reservation memories is 0 and the game round is being executed, the reservation information that triggered the establishment of the reservation condition is not executed if the reservation notice is not executed in the game round. The suspension notice is not performed in the previous game round. Therefore, when a game round is started with the number of reserved memories being 0, by setting so as to perform a non-effective advance notice effect in the game round, even if the advance notice condition is established in the game round, Also, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the inconvenience that the reservation notice is not performed in the game round before the game round of the reservation information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition because the reservation notice cannot be executed in the game round.

Further, the situation in which the execution frequency of the pending notice is low means that the notice condition has not been satisfied for a while (for example, over 100 consecutive game rounds). In such a situation, if the pending notice cannot be executed even though the notice condition is satisfied, the player cannot be provided with the opportunity. Therefore, for example, the RAM 244 may be provided with a frequency grasping means for grasping the frequency with which the pending notice is performed, and when the frequency grasping means grasps that the frequency is less than a predetermined frequency, the ineffective notice effect may be performed. . As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the suspension notice without missing the precious opportunity.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first and second embodiments in terms of the manner of holding notice. That is, when the suspension notice is continuously performed over a plurality of game rounds, the suspension notice accompanied by an effect different from the suspension notice executed in the previous game round is performed in each continuous game round. . More specifically, as a mode of holding advance notice, the same advance notice corresponding symbols are stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first and second embodiments. Then, a so-called step-up effect as a staged effect such as an effect is performed with respect to the notice-corresponding symbols along with the suspension notice by the above-mentioned symbols. First, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 53, the flow of the hold notice according to the present embodiment will be described.

When the advance notice condition is established, the same main symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as not to correspond to the ready-to-win display and the result of the big win, as in the first and second embodiments. In this case, in the game round two times before the game round related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition, as shown in FIG. A display effect is performed in which the arrows spring up from the bottom to the top.

When the subsequent game round, that is, the game round one game round before the game round related to the holding information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition, the holding notice is further performed, as the second stage production shown in FIG. 53(b). In this manner, a display effect is performed in which the main pattern corresponding to the notice is surrounded by an effect such as an aura. Then, the following game round is the game round related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition, and as shown in FIG.

Also, as shown in FIG. 53(d)→FIG. 53(c), in the next game turn after the suspension notice accompanied by the first effect is performed, there is a case where the result is a big hit without the second effect. In addition, there are cases where the losing reach is performed in the game round following the first effect and the second effect, or the losing reach is performed in the game cycle following the first effect without going through the second effect.

Next, the jackpot advance notice setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the jackpot for notice setting process is a process executed in step S1707 of the pending notice setting process (FIG. 40), and FIG. 54 is executed instead of the jackpot for notice setting process shown in FIG. processing.

In the big hit advance notice setting process in the present embodiment, the processes of steps S2801 to S2807 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S1801 to S1807. In step S2808, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the effect-side pending memory number SN is input to the stage counters provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244. FIG. The stage counter is a counter for the MPU 242 to grasp the number of pieces of pending information to be played before the pending information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. That is, in step S2808, a process of inputting the number of pending information to be the target of the game round before the pending information of this time to the step counter is executed.

In the subsequent step S2809, step effect selection processing is executed. The step effect selection process is, in the above step effect, before the game round of the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition, whether it is a second step notice that performs a hold notice accompanied by the first effect and the second effect. , or a first stage announcement in which only the suspension announcement with the first effect is performed without performing the suspension announcement with the second effect. Such a selection rate is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the two-stage advance notice is selected with a probability of 70%. In step S2809, selection counters are obtained from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244, and selection tables are obtained from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, and the above selection processing is performed.

In subsequent step S2810, it is determined whether or not the first stage advance notice has been selected based on the processing result of step S2809. When the second stage announcement is selected instead of the first stage announcement, the second stage flag is stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244 in step S2811. End the process. The second stage flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that the second stage notice is selected.

If it is determined in step S2802 that the reservation notice generation lottery is not won and the notice condition is not established, or if it is determined that the first stage notice is selected in step S2810, the notice setting for the main jackpot is performed as it is. End the process.

Next, the out-of-office notice setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the advance notice setting process for leaving is a process executed in step S1708 of the advance notice setting process (FIG. 40), and FIG. process.

In the out-of-office notice setting process according to the present embodiment, the processes of steps S2901 to S2906 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S1901 to S1906. Then, in step S2907, similarly to step S2808, a process of inputting a numerical value obtained by subtracting 1 from the effect-side reserved memory number SN to the step counter is executed. In the following step S2908, step effect selection processing is executed in the same manner as in step S2809. The selection rate in such processing is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the selection processing in step S2908 is set so that the first stage advance notice is selected with a probability of 70%. That is, in the stage effect selection process in the big hit announcement setting process, the second stage announcement is selected with a probability of 70%, and in the stage effect selection process in the loss announcement setting process, the second stage announcement is selected with a probability of 30%. The degree of expectation of a big winning result after that when the second stage performance is selected is set higher than that of a big winning result after that when the first stage performance is selected.

In subsequent step S2909, similarly to step S2810, it is determined whether or not the first stage effect has been selected based on the processing result of step S2908, and it is determined that the second stage effect has been selected instead of the first stage effect. If so, the process of storing the second stage flag is executed in step S2910, and then the out-of-order notice setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2901 that it is not an outbound reach corresponding hold command but a complete outbound corresponding hold command, if it is determined in step S2903 that the notice condition is not met without winning the hold notice occurrence, or to step S2909 When the first-stage effect is selected, the out-of-order notice setting process is terminated as it is.

Next, an effect setting process for a pending notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the effect setting process for pending notice is a process executed in step S807 in the process for starting fluctuation (FIG. 29), and FIG. It shows the process that would be performed instead.

In the effect setting process for the pending notice in the present embodiment, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the overlap flag is stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244, and it is determined that the overlap flag is stored. In this case, duplicate notice setting processing is executed in step S3002, and the effect setting processing for pending notice is terminated. The duplication flag and duplication notice setting process will be described later in detail.

If it is determined in step S3001 that no duplication flag is stored, the process advances to step S3003 to determine whether or not the step counter is "3" or more. Incidentally, if the step counter is "0", that is, if the game round this time is the game round corresponding to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition, the hold notice is displayed in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29). Effect setting processing for big win (step S803) or effect setting processing for ready-to-win generation (step S805) is performed instead of the effect setting processing for . Therefore, when it is determined in step S3003 that the stage counter is not "3" or more but less than "3", the case where the stage counter is "0" is not included, and is limited to "2" or "1". .

If the step counter is less than "3", that is, "2" or "1" in step S3003, it is determined in step S3004 whether or not the step counter is "2". If it is "2", it is determined in step S3005 whether or not the second stage flag is stored. When the stage counter is "2" in step S3004 and the second stage flag is stored in step S3005, it means that the game round executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. This is the case where there are two pieces of pending information including the pending information related to the current game round, and the second step notice is selected in step effect selection processing (step S2809 or step S2908). That is, it means that the current game round should execute the pending notice accompanied by the first effect, and in this case, in step S3006, as the step effect of the pending notice, the first effect is stored in the register. to run.

If it is determined in step S3005 that the second stage flag is not stored, the hold information related to the game round to be executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is the hold related to the current game round. There are two items including information, and the first stage announcement is selected in the stage effect selection process. In this case, no pending notice is executed in the current game round.

If it is determined in step S3004 that the step counter is not "2", it means that the step counter is "1". In this case, the process advances to step S3007 to determine whether or not the second stage flag is stored. When the step counter is "1" in step S3004 and the second step flag is not stored in step S3007, the game round executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. There may be one piece of pending information related to the current game turn, and the first step notice may be selected in the step effect selection process. In other words, it means that the current game round should execute the pending notice accompanied by the first effect. Execute the memorizing process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3007 that the second stage flag is stored, the hold information relating to the game round to be executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is the current game round. , and the second stage notice is selected in the stage effect selection process. In this case, it means that the current game round should execute the pending notice accompanied by the second effect. Therefore, the process advances to step S3008 to execute a process of storing in the register so as to perform the second effect as the step effect of this pending notice.

After performing the processing of step S3006 or step S3008, the same processing as the processing of steps S2001 to S2009 is performed in steps S3009 to S3015.

If the step counter is "3" or more in step S3003, if the second step flag is not stored in step S3005, or after executing the processing in step S3015, the step counter is decremented by 1 in step S3016. After the subtraction process is executed, the effect setting process for this pending notice is terminated.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, when a game round is started, the pending notice can be set not only in the effect setting process for the pending advance notice but also in the effect setting process (FIG. 32) for generating reach. . Therefore, hereinafter, the processing when the suspension notice is set in the effect setting processing for occurrence of reach in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57 .

That is, when it is determined in step S1001 that the ready-to-win display of the current game round is not the super ready-to-win display but the normal ready-to-win display, it is determined in step S3101 whether or not the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored. If it is determined that the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1012. On the other hand, if it is determined that the advance notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the process advances to step S3102 to determine whether or not the duplication flag is stored. When the duplication flag is stored, after duplication notice setting processing is performed in step S3103, the effect setting processing for this reach generation ends. These duplication flags and duplication notice setting processing will be described later in detail.

If the duplication flag is not stored in step S3102, it is determined in step S3104 whether the stage counter is "3" or more or "0". If it is determined that the stage counter is "3" or more or "0", the process proceeds to step S1012, and no suspension notice is given. In this case, the step counter is decremented by 1 before proceeding to step S1012.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3104 that the step counter is "2" or "1", the process advances to step S3105. In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the stage counter is "2", and if it is "2", it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the second stage flag is stored. If the second stage flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1012, and no pending notice is given this time. In this case, the step counter is decremented by 1 before proceeding to step S1012. When the second step flag is stored in step S3106, in step S3107, a process of storing in the register so as to perform the first effect as the step effect of this pending notice is executed.

If it is determined in step S3105 that the stage counter is "1" instead of "2", it is determined in step S3108 whether or not the second stage flag is stored. If the second stage flag is not stored, the process advances to step S3107 to store the first effect in the register. When the second step flag is stored in step S3108, in step S3109, a process of storing in the register so as to perform the second effect as the stage effect of this pending notice is executed.

After executing the process of step S3107 or step S3109, the process of subtracting 1 from the step counter is executed in step S3110, and the same process as in steps S1005 to S1011 is executed in steps S3111 to S3117. , terminates the effect setting process for generating this reach.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the suspension notice is executed in the game round one or two times before the game round related to the holding information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. The effect selected by the effect selection process is executed as a staged effect of pending notice in the game round one time or two times before. In addition, as described above, in the pending advance notice stage effect, the degree of expectation of a big win after the selection of the second advance notice is set higher than that of the first advance notice. Therefore, it is assumed that the player expects that the suspension notice with the second effect will be executed in the next game turn after the suspension notice with the first effect is executed, instead of developing to the ready-to-win display. be done. As described above, in the configuration with the staged effect in the pending notice as in the present embodiment, the player expects the effect to progress further.

However, depending on the situation where the holding condition is established, the above stepwise production is performed depending on the number of holding information related to the game round executed before the game round related to the holding information that triggered the establishment of the holding condition. can be difficult to do. In other words, when the number of pieces of the pending information is small, there may be a problem that the staged effect for each game round cannot be suitably executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a characteristic configuration is provided in order to eliminate such inconvenience. The characteristic configuration will be described below.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing replacement processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the replacement process is a process executed in step S1216 in the during-variation process (FIG. 35), and is a process executed when the advance notice condition is satisfied during execution of the game round. FIG. 58 shows processing executed in place of the replacement processing shown in FIG.

In the replacement process according to the present embodiment, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the step counter is "2" or more. When the stage counter is "2" or more, i.e., the suspension relating to the game round to be executed prior to the game round relating to the suspension information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition without including the game round currently being executed. If two or more pieces of information are included, the process for replacement ends. In such a case, since there are two or more game rounds to be executed before the game round related to the holding information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition, which step advance notice is selected by the step effect selection process. However, the selected step notice can be executed before the game round related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. Therefore, it is not necessary to make a pending notice in the game round currently being executed.

If the step counter is less than "2" in step S3201, the step counter becomes "1" or "0". By the way, unlike the case of step S3003 in the effect setting process for pending notice (FIG. 56), when a negative determination is made in step S3201, the case where the step counter is "0" is also included. This is because the replacement process is executed in the mid-fluctuation process (Fig. 35), and the effect setting process for pending notice is executed in the fluctuation start process (Fig. 29), and the timings of execution are different. . That is, this replacement process is a process that is performed after the step counter is decremented by 1, and the game round that is executed before the game round related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition is currently being executed. This includes the case of only the game round (the stage counter is "0").

If the step counter is "1" or "0" in step S3201, the flow advances to step S3202 to determine whether the step counter is "1" and the second step flag is not stored. When the step counter is "1" and the second step flag is not stored, the game rounds related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition without including the game rounds currently being executed are It means that there is one piece of pending information related to the game round to be executed before, and that the first stage notice is selected by the stage effect selection process. In this case, since it is sufficient to execute the pending notice accompanied by the first effect in the next game round instead of the game round currently being executed, the replacement process is terminated as it is.

A negative determination in step S3202 means that the stage counter is "1" and the second stage flag is stored, or that the stage counter is "0". If it is satisfied, the process advances to step S3203. In step S3203, it is determined whether or not the stage counter is "0" and the second stage flag is stored. A negative determination in step S3203 means that the stage counter is "1" and the second stage flag is stored, or that the stage counter is "0" and the second stage flag is stored. means if not. In the former case, a suspension notice with the first effect should be given in the game round currently being executed, and a suspension notice with the second effect should be given in the next game round. This means that a suspension notice accompanied by the first effect should be given in the game round. In other words, in either case, it is necessary to perform the suspension notice accompanied by the first effect in the game round currently being executed. Therefore, if the determination in step S3203 is negative, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not the non-validation notice flag is stored. Erased, the open flag is stored in step S3206, the target movable accessories 170 to 173 are stored in step S3207, and the notice execution flag is stored in step S3208. The processing of these steps S3204 to S3208 is the same as the processing of steps S2101 to S2105, and by these processing, the special hold notice is executed in the game round currently being executed.

If it is determined in step S3204 that the invalid notice flag is not stored, stop result correction processing is executed in step S3209. The processing of step S3209 is substantially the same as the processing of step S2106 (FIG. 45). However, in the present embodiment, in the second correction process (FIG. 49) or the third correction process (FIG. 50), the process when it is determined that the pending notice cannot be executed in the game round currently being executed is different. there is Therefore, the second correction process and the third correction process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 shows the processing executed in place of FIG. 49, and FIG. 60 shows the processing executed in place of FIG. Also, since the changes in the second correction process and the third correction process are the same, the second correction process and the third correction process will be collectively described in the following description.

That is, in the second correction process (FIG. 59), the second correction condition is not satisfied in step S2404, and in the third correction process (FIG. 60), the fourth correction condition is not satisfied in step S2504, and the sub-display area Rs If it is determined that the pending notice cannot be executed in the game cycle currently being executed even if the symbol is included, the second correction process (FIG. 59) is performed at step S3301, and the third correction process (FIG. 60) is performed at step S3401. , it is determined whether or not the step counter is "1" and the second step flag is stored. If affirmative determination is made in step S3301 or step S3401, it means that although the pending notice cannot be executed in the game round currently being executed, the step effect must be developed to the second stage in the next game round. do. In this case, in step S3302 in the second correction process (FIG. 59) and in step S3402 in the third correction process (FIG. 60), a process of storing the duplication flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and these correction processes end. . The duplication flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that both the suspension notice with the first effect and the suspension notice with the second effect should be executed in one game round. If a negative determination is made in step S3301 or step S3401, that is, if the step counter is "0" and the second step flag is not stored, these correction processes are terminated.

Returning to the description of the replacement process (FIG. 58), after executing the process in step S3208 or S3209, it is determined in step S3210 whether or not the notice execution flag is stored. If the notice execution flag is stored in step S3210, it means that the pending notice can be executed in the game round currently being executed in any of the processes described above. In this case, in step S3211, after executing the process of storing in the register so as to execute the first effect as the step effect of the current pending notice, the process for replacement ends.

If the stage counter is "0" and the second stage flag is stored in step S3203, then in step S3212 the duplicate notice correction process is executed, and then this replacement process ends. .

Here, by storing the overlap flag in the second correction process (FIG. 59) and the third correction process (FIG. 60) as described above, the fluctuation start process ( Affirmative determination is made in step S3001 of the effect setting process (FIG. 56) for holding notice in FIG. 29), and duplicate notice setting processing is performed in step S3002. Moreover, an affirmative determination is made in step S3102 of the effect setting process for reach generation (FIG. 57), and duplicate notice setting process is performed in step S3103. Note that the processing in step S3002 and the processing in step S3103 are the same processing. Therefore, first, the outline of this duplicate notice will be briefly explained, then the duplicate notice setting processing in steps S3002 and S3103 will be explained, and then the duplicate notice correction processing (step S3212) in the replacement processing (FIG. 58) will be explained. do.

Duplicate notice refers to an effect in which a plurality of pending notices are made without changing the stop result in one game round. In this duplicate notice, the mode of the stop result is determined to be a special mode in which the same two types of symbols are stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As a special mode, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 61(a), it is a mode in which a reach line of a cross line reach formed over the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs is formed. A first special mode in which the two reach patterns forming the reach line of the same cross line reach in the row Z2 stop so as not to result in any jackpot, and as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. A second special mode is set in which the main symbols constituting the two pending notices are stopped and displayed one by one in the display areas Rs1 and Rs2.

<Duplicate notice that becomes the first special mode>
Hereinafter, the flow of the double notice as the first special mode will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. In the double notice that is the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 62(a), for example, the notice symbol is the main symbol (specific symbol) with "7" attached, and the main symbol with "7" is attached. to form a reach line on the right lower right line L7, and to form a reach line on the right upper right line L8 by the main symbol with "6" attached, and furthermore, in the middle symbol row Z2, "6" is formed on the middle line L2. It is assumed that a mode is selected in which the main symbol marked with is stopped and the main symbol marked with "7" is stopped on the right non-effective line L6. In this case, the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are set as the movable accessories to be opened, and the first movable accessory 170 is controlled to be opened first, Next, the second movable accessory 171 is set to be controlled to open. Further, the opening timings of the first movable role product 170 and the second movable role product 171 are set so that the opening control is performed after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), when the first movable accessory 170 is controlled to open at the timing t1 after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbol with "6" ( The reservation notice by the non-specific pattern) is established, and the first effect is generated at this timing. Furthermore, at the timing t2 after that, as shown in FIG. symbol) is established, and the second effect occurs at this timing. In this case, after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are continuously controlled to be opened, and along with this, staged effects (first effect and second effect). is generated, it is possible to realize a stepwise suspension notice without changing the stop result in one game round, and it is possible to achieve an unexpected presentation.

Here, even in the same stop mode as in FIGS. 62(a) to (c), if the notice pattern is the main pattern (non-specific pattern) with "6" attached, in the duplicate notice The opening timing of movable accessories is different.

That is, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the main symbol with "7" is used to form a reach line on the right downward line L7, and the main symbol with "6" is used to form a right upward line L8. Further, in the middle pattern row Z2, the main symbols with "6" attached to the middle line L2 are stopped, and the main symbols with "7" attached to the right non-effective line L6 are stopped. is selected. In this case, the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are set as the movable accessories to be released, and the order of release is the reverse of that in the case where the specific symbol is the announcement symbol. First, the second movable accessory 171 is controlled to be opened, and then the first movable accessory 170 is controlled to be opened. Further, the opening timings of the first movable role product 170 and the second movable role product 171 are set so that the opening control is performed after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 63(b), when the second movable accessory 171 is controlled to open and close at the timing t1 after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed at the bottom of the right non-effective line L6. However, none of the main symbols appears in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the suspension notice is not established. As shown in FIG. 63(c), when the opening and closing of the first movable accessory 170 is controlled at the timing of t2 after that, the main pattern with "6" attached to the upper row becomes visible on the right non-effective line L6. At the same time, the main pattern with "7" in the middle row becomes visible. In this case, the pending advance notices of "6" and "7" are established at the same time, and the first effect and the second effect are generated at the same time as the step effect. It should be noted that the second effect is generated for the main symbol attached with "6", which is the symbol for notice.

In this way, when the notice pattern is a non-specific pattern ("6" in this example) and corresponds to a normal jackpot result, a plurality of pending notices are established simultaneously in the step notice. . This means that if, in the first stage, the main pattern (specific pattern) corresponding to the probability variable jackpot results with odd numbers is used, the reserved notice is established, and in the second step, the normal jackpot results are obtained as the notice patterns with even numbers. If a configuration is adopted in which a pending notice is established with a corresponding main symbol (non-specific symbol), there is a possibility that the player will be disappointed that the expected jackpot result has been demoted from the probability variable jackpot result to the normal jackpot result. Because there is On the other hand, if the suspension notice is established with non-specified symbols as the first stage and the suspension notice is established with other non-specified symbols as the second stage, it will be necessary to change the stopped symbols again. However, the arrangement of symbols and the number of symbols to be stopped may need to be changed even if re-fluctuation is not required, which may result in complication of the configuration. Therefore, by establishing a plurality of pending advance notices by the non-specific patterns and the specific patterns at the same time in this manner, and by generating the advance notice patterns in the non-specific patterns in the second effect, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged. It becomes possible to recognize the design for notice.
<Duplicate notice that becomes the second special mode>
Hereinafter, the flow of the double notice, which is the second special mode, will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 64 . As the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 64(a), for example, the notice symbol is the main symbol with "7" attached, and the stop result is "7" at the bottom of the right non-effective line. The attached main symbol is stopped and displayed, the main symbol with "7" attached to the middle line of the middle line L2 is stopped and displayed, and the left line L1 upper line, the middle line L2 middle line and the right non-effective line L6 are displayed. It is assumed that a mode is selected in which the main symbols (specific symbols) with "7" attached to the bottom row and the bottom row are stop-displayed. In this case, the main symbol (unspecified symbol) with "6" attached to the upper part of the right line L3, the middle part of the left non-effective line L9, and the lower part of the middle line L2 stops. As movable roles to be opened, the second movable role 171, the third movable role 172 and the fourth movable role 173 are set. It is set such that the fourth movable accessory 173 is controlled to be opened, and then the second movable accessory 171 is controlled to be opened. Further, the opening timings of the second movable role product 171, the third movable role product 172 and the fourth movable role product 173 are all set so that the opening control is performed after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed. ing.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 are controlled to open at the timing t1 after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed. The notice of suspension by the main symbol marked with is established, and at the same time, the first performance is generated. Then, at the timing t2 after that, as shown in FIG. 64(c), the second movable accessory 171 is controlled to be opened, whereby the holding notice by the main symbol marked with "7" is established, and at the same time the second movable accessory 171 is opened. A performance occurs.

The stop result, which is the second special mode, is set to be selected only when the notice symbol is a specific symbol. As described above, in the stop result of the first special mode, by controlling the opening of one movable accessory, the symbols constituting a plurality of (two) pending notices can be visually recognized, and these pending notices are established. However, in the second special aspect of the stop result, unless the respective different movable accessories are controlled to open, the symbols constituting a plurality of pending notices cannot be visually recognized and these pending notices cannot be established. caused by. In this case, even if a plurality of movable accessories are controlled to open at the same time, since the movable accessories are arranged at different positions, it is assumed that the player will visually recognize each movable accessory at different timings. As a result, it is assumed that the pattern existing behind the movable accessory will also be visually recognized at different timings. In this case, for example, if the player first confirms the specific symbols and then confirms the non-specific symbols, the expected jackpot result may be demoted from the variable jackpot result to the normal jackpot result. do not have. Especially in the case of the stop result that is the second special mode, since symbols that stop in separate areas such as the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2 are used, there is no possibility of confirming each symbol at different timings as described above. get higher Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of disappointing the player by selecting the second special mode only when the symbol for notice is a specific symbol corresponding to the result of the probability variable jackpot. becomes.

In the duplicate notice setting process in the pending notice effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Execute stop result determination processing for duplication notice. In the duplicate notice stop result determination process, the stop result table for duplicate notice provided in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the notice symbols are used to determine the stop result in the current duplicate notice effect. In the double notice stop result table, the notice symbols and the stop results of the special mode are set in a one-to-one correspondence as an arbitrary combination. In addition, the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be controlled to be opened are set corresponding to the stop result of the special mode, and the opening order and opening timing are also set. Further, as described above, when the design for notice is a specific design, either the first special mode or the second special mode is set, and when the design for notice is a non-specific design, A first special mode is selected. When the advance notice symbol is a non-specified symbol and the first special mode is selected, the release order of the movable accessories 170 to 173 depends on the specified symbol and the non-specified symbol at the second release timing, as described above. It is set so that the pending notice is established at the same time.

In the subsequent step S3503, a process of storing in the register that the first effect and the second effect are performed as the staged effect of this pending notice is executed. Then, in step S3504, the execution timing of each of these effects (opening control of movable accessories 170 to 173 and effect effects) is stored in a register with reference to the stop result table for duplication notice. In subsequent step S3505, processing for storing the release flag is executed, and in step S3506, processing for storing the notice execution flag is executed. As a result, in the variable mid-use process, opening control of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 is performed at the timing stored in step S3504, and at the same time, the symbol display device 161 performs a stage effect.

Next, the correction process for duplication notice (step S3212) performed in the replacement process (FIG. 58) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the duplicate notice correction process, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the game round currently being executed corresponds to the super ready-to-win display. When it is determined that the game round corresponds to the super ready-to-win display, the correction process for double notice is ended. When it is determined that it is not the game round corresponding to the super ready-to-win display, the process of grasping the notice symbol is executed in step S3602. Then, in step S3603, it is determined whether or not all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed in the game cycle currently being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, after storing the open flag in step S3604, it is determined in step S3605 whether or not the game round currently being executed corresponds to the normal reach display. When it is determined that it is the game round corresponding to the normal reach display, the fan effect flag is stored in step S3606.

If it is determined in step S3605 that it is not a game round corresponding to the normal reach display, or after executing the processing in step S3606, the fourth The stage correction table is referred to, the address information for the fourth correction is stored in the following step S3608, and further, in step S3609, the first effect and the second effect are stored in the register so as to execute the stage effect of the pending notice. Then, in step S3610, a process of storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), the fourth-stage correction table is one pair for any combination of the information of the initial effect pattern and the information of the notice pattern except for the case where the super ready-to-win display occurs. 1, the information of the effect pattern for the fourth correction and the information of the stop result are set in correspondence with each other, and furthermore, the address information is set in correspondence with the effect pattern for the fourth correction and the information of the stop result. there is In this case, all the information of the effect pattern for the fourth correction is set as the information of the effect pattern after the period of T1 has passed from the start of the fluctuation. However, the information of the effect pattern for each fourth correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the originally set effect pattern.

In addition, all of the stop result information for the fourth correction is defined as the stop result of the first special mode or the second special mode. Furthermore, in the information of the fourth correction effect pattern in the fourth stage correction table, the information of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be controlled to be opened and the opening order thereof in the stop result of these special modes are included in the notice symbols. is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of Then, the generation timing of the step effects (first effect and second effect) in the pending notice is determined in correspondence with the order of releasing the movable accessories 170 to 173 .

After executing the process of step S3610, in step S3611, based on the fourth stage correction table, a process of storing the execution timing of each effect (opening control of movable role, step effect) in a register is executed. . After that, in step S3612, the notice execution flag is stored, and this duplicate notice correction process is terminated.

To explain the relationship between the above duplicate notice and the fanning effect, the fanning effect when the duplicate notice is performed is set to be performed in the movable accessary which is controlled to be opened first. In other words, referring to the example shown in FIG. 62, after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the first movable accessory 170 is controlled to open or not. After that, the first movable accessory 170 is controlled to be opened, and then the second movable accessory 171 is controlled to be opened. However, the configuration of this effect is arbitrary within the range of not changing the variable display time of the game round. Before the movable accessories 170 to 173 are controlled to open, the short fanning effect may be performed.

In addition, as for the duplicate notice when the fanning effect is not performed, as already explained, in the pachinko machine 10, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed until the final display, which is a so-called stationary display. A relatively long waiting time of 2 seconds is set. Therefore, for example, in the double notice, even if it takes 1 second for the first stage effect and 1 second for the second stage effect after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the respective effects are played in the game. It is set to the extent that the person can check it, so that the production can be performed without difficulty.

Returning to the description of the correction process for duplicate notice (FIG. 66), when it is determined in step S3603 that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not in high speed fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S3613. In step S3613, it is determined whether or not the lower symbol row Z3 is in high speed fluctuation. When the lower symbol row Z3 is in high speed fluctuation, the process advances to step S3614 to determine whether or not the fifth correction condition is satisfied. Here, the fifth correction condition is that if any of the main symbols has stopped or is scheduled to stop on the upper stage of the middle line L2, the correction condition is met regardless of the notice symbols. When any of the main symbols is stopped or not scheduled to be stopped on the upper stage of the medium line L2, the correction condition is satisfied when the notice symbol is a specific symbol. It is set so that it is determined that there is

If it is determined in step S3614 that the fifth correction condition is satisfied, the same processing as in steps S3604 to S3606 is executed in steps S3615 to S3617.

In step S3618, the fifth stage correction table as the fifth stage correction information group is referred to from the ROM 243. In step S3619, the address information for the fifth correction is stored. A process of storing in the register is executed so as to execute the first effect and the second effect, and in step S3621, a process of storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the fifth-stage correction table, like the fourth-stage correction table, is the information of the initial effect pattern and the information of the notice symbol, except for the case where the super ready-to-win display occurs. information of the effect pattern for the fifth correction and information of the stop result are set in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of Address information is set corresponding to In this case, all the information of the effect pattern for the fifth correction is set as the information of the effect pattern after the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the effect pattern for each fifth correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the originally set effect pattern.

In addition, all of the stop result information for the fifth correction is determined as the stop result of the first special mode or the second special mode, similarly to the stop result information for the fourth correction. Further, in the information of the effect pattern for the fifth correction, the information of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be controlled to be opened and the order of opening thereof in the stop result of these special modes are paired with the information of the pattern for notice. 1 are set to correspond to each other. Then, the generation timing of the step effects (first effect and second effect) in the pending notice is determined in correspondence with the order of releasing the movable accessories 170 to 173 .

After executing the process of step S3621, in step S3622, based on the fifth stage correction table, a process of storing the execution timing of each effect (opening control of movable role, step effect) in a register is executed. . Then, after storing the advance notice execution flag in step S3623, this duplicate advance notice correction process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3614 that the fifth correction condition is not satisfied, the correction is not made to the duplicate notice, and the correction is made to the hold notice that is not the duplicate notice (normal hold notice or special hold notice). Without doing so, the correction processing for duplicate notice ends. In the present embodiment, as described above, the staged reservation notice is set, and the second stage notice is set so that the degree of expectation of a big winning result after that is higher than the first step notice.

In the present embodiment, it is set so that the degree of expectation is higher for the ready-to-win display without the pending notice than to the ready-to-win display for developing only to the first stage. Therefore, when the fifth correction condition is not satisfied as described above, the reservation notice is not executed even if the reservation condition is satisfied, thereby suitably increasing the attention to the subsequent ready-to-win display. becomes possible.

Returning to the description of the correction process for duplicate notice (FIG. 66), if it is determined in step S3613 that the lower symbol row Z3 is not fluctuating at high speed, the process proceeds to step S3624. In step S3624, it is determined whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is in high speed fluctuation. When it is determined that the high-speed fluctuation is in progress, the correction processing for double notice is terminated as it is. In other words, when the middle pattern row Z2 is in the high-speed fluctuation, the reserve notice is performed even if the reserve condition is satisfied. no.

If it is determined in step S3624 that the medium symbol row Z2 is fluctuating at high speed, it is determined in step S3625 whether or not the sixth correction condition is established. The sixth correction condition is satisfied regardless of whether the symbols for notice are in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 when the symbols stopped or scheduled to stop correspond to the first special mode. If there are two types of the same symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 for each symbol that is stopped or is scheduled to be stopped, the notice symbol must be a specific symbol. is set so that

If the sixth correction condition is satisfied in step S3625, the open flag is stored in step S3626. Then, in step S3627, the sixth stage correction table as the sixth stage correction information group is referred to from the ROM 243. In step S3628, the address information for the sixth correction is stored. A process of storing in the register is executed so as to execute the first effect and the second effect, and in step S3630, a process of storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 67(c), the 6th stage correction table is similar to the 4th and 5th stage correction tables. The information of the effect pattern for the sixth correction and the information of the stop result are set in one-to-one correspondence with an arbitrary combination of the pattern information, and furthermore, the effect pattern and the stop for each sixth correction are set. Address information is set in correspondence with the result information. All the information of the effect pattern for the sixth correction is set as the information of the effect pattern after the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, but the information of the effect pattern for each sixth correction was initially set. It does not change the variable display time in the production pattern.

Further, the stop result information for the sixth correction, like the stop result information for the fourth and fifth corrections, is a special mode in which the same two types of symbols are stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Technically, it is defined as a stop result of the first special mode or the second special mode. Furthermore, in the information of the effect pattern for the sixth correction, the information of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be controlled to be opened and the order of opening thereof in the stop result of these special modes are paired with the information of the notice symbol. 1 are set to correspond to each other. Then, the generation timing of the step effects (first effect and second effect) in the pending notice is determined in correspondence with the order of releasing the movable accessories 170 to 173 .

After executing the process of step S3630, in step S3631, based on the sixth stage correction table, a process of storing the execution timing of each effect (opening control of movable role, step effect) in a register is executed. . After that, in step S3632, the notice execution flag is stored, and this duplicate notice correction process ends.

Further, when it is determined in step S3625 that the sixth correction condition is not satisfied, for the same reason as in the case of step S3614, the correction process for the duplicate notice is not executed without executing the notice that is not the duplicate notice. exit.

In this way, when the advance notice condition is established during the execution of the game round, in the process during fluctuation, Staged effects are respectively set according to the number of pieces of pending information and the state of the variable display of the game round currently being executed. In a situation where a plurality of (two) pending notices should be executed in the game round currently being executed, the effect and the stop result of the game round being executed are corrected to duplicate notices.

Next, the number of pending information related to the game round to be executed before the game round related to the pending information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition, the type of the staged effect selected by the staged effect selection process, and during execution With reference to FIG. 68, each relationship between execution conditions (situations) as to whether or not the pending notice can be executed in the game round will be described.

First, when the number of pieces of pending information related to the game round to be executed before the game round related to the pending information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition is two or more, that is, two pieces or three pieces, step effect selection is performed. Regardless of which stage performance is selected by the process, the stage performance can be executed in the game round executed before the game round related to the holding information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. For this reason, regardless of whether or not the effect of the game round currently being executed can be corrected to the pending advance notice, the pending advance notice is not performed in the game round currently being executed. Then, according to the selected step performance, the suspension notice accompanied by the step performance is started from the game round one or two times before the game round related to the suspension information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition.

When the number of pieces of suspension information related to the game round to be executed before the game round related to the suspension information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is 1, the selected stage effect and the game round being executed will be in the suspension notice. Depending on whether or not correction is possible, the effect from the current game round is different. That is, if the selected stage performance is the first stage notice, the suspension notice accompanied by the first performance is executed in the next game round because there is no need to execute the suspension notice in the game round being executed. Further, when the second-stage notice is selected, if the game round in progress can be corrected to a pending notice (hereinafter simply referred to as a single notice) that is not a duplicate notice, the game round in execution can be changed to a single notice. A first performance is executed as a stage performance after being corrected to an advance notice. Then, in the next game round, the suspension notice accompanied by the second effect is executed.

On the other hand, if it is not possible to modify to the single notice in the game round being executed, the game round under execution is not corrected to the pending notice, and the duplicate notice accompanied by the first effect and the second effect is executed in the next game round. . As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the execution of the second stage announcement is restricted even though the second stage announcement is selected in the stage effect selection process.

When the number of pieces of pending information related to the game round to be executed before the game round related to the pending information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition is 0, it corresponds to the step performance selected in the game round being executed. The pending notice is executed only when the notice can be corrected. That is, when the selected stage performance is the first stage notice, if the game round being executed can be corrected to the single notice, it is corrected to that, and if not, it is not corrected. In addition, when the selected step presentation is the second step notice, if the game round being executed can be corrected to the duplicate notice, it is corrected to it, and if not, it is not corrected. In other words, it can be said that even if it is possible to modify to the staged effect on the side not selected by the staged effect selection process, it is not modified to that. With this configuration, the selection rate set in the staged effect selection process is suppressed from being changed by uncertain information such as the timing of establishment of the advance notice condition, and the balance of the degree of attention set for each effect is lost. can be suppressed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the suspension notice is executed in successive game rounds, a step performance is generated in each suspension notice. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the player expects that the longer the pending notice continues, the more the game will lead to a big win after that. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of each game round.

In the above configuration, when one of the main symbols out of the plurality of types of main symbols stops in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the other main symbols also stop in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. A possible special mode was set. As a result, it is possible to execute a plurality of suspension notices in one game round. Therefore, even if there is little hold information related to the game round to be executed before the game round related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition when the notice condition is established, the stop result is the above-mentioned special mode. As a result, the suspension notice can be executed a plurality of times in one game round, so that the above-described continuous effects can be realized in one game round. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the case of the result of stopping as a special mode, at least a part of the symbols constituting the notice of suspension are shielded by the movable accessories 170 to 173, and the movable accessories 170 to 173 are controlled to be opened. By doing so, a configuration is adopted in which the notice of suspension constituted by the pattern that has become visible due to the opening is established. As a result, the degree of attention to the actions of the movable accessories 170 to 173 is increased, and the type of suspension notice (holding notice by specific symbols or suspension notice by non-specific symbols) that is established by confirming the actions as a player. type) can be grasped, in a configuration in which a plurality of pending notices can be established in one game cycle, it is possible to avoid inconvenience such as difficulty in understanding the type of established pending notices and confusion.

Furthermore, as a result of stopping as a special mode, a result of stopping as a first special mode in which a plurality (two) of pending notices can be established by operating one movable accessory, and a plurality of movable accessories are operated respectively. and a stop result that is a second special mode in which the advance notice of hold is established each time. As a result, in the latter case, it is possible to make it easier to understand the type of pending notice that has been established as described above, and in the former case, conversely, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the type of pending notice that has been established. Become. As described above, basically, it is better for the player to easily understand the type of pending notice that has been established. However, depending on the situation, it may be better to obfuscate it like the former. That is, in spite of the fact that the previous notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, in the case where the suspension notice by the non-specific symbol and the suspension notice by the specific symbol are established in one game cycle, after the suspension notice by the specific symbol is established. If the pending notice by the non-specific symbols is established, the player may be disappointed that the expected big win result is demoted from the probability variable big win result to the normal big win result. Therefore, in such a case, it is difficult to understand which of the suspension notices has been established by establishing the suspension notice by the non-specific symbols and the suspension notice by the specific symbols at the same time, and the player is discouraged as described above. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is caused.

<Fourth Embodiment>
One of the features of the present embodiment is that the degree of expectation for the subsequent big win results varies depending on the manner in which the pending notice is stopped. Specifically, as the reservation notice, there are set a first reservation notice, a second reservation notice, and a third reservation notice, which have different degrees of expectation for the subsequent big win result. The first to third reservation notices are performed by stopping the same notice corresponding symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as the reservation notices in the first to third embodiments. Depending on the region, the degree of expectation for the subsequent big win result is set differently. Therefore, first, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 69, the outline of the relationship between the stop mode of the suspension notice and the degree of expectation will be described.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the first suspension notice is an effect in which the suspension notice is established by using only the main symbols stopped in the main display area Rm. As shown in FIG. 69(b), the second pending notice uses a pattern that stops in the main display region Rm and a pattern that stops in one of the left and right sub-display regions Rs1 and Rs2. It refers to the production in which the suspension notice is established. As shown in FIG. 69(c), the third pending notice uses a pattern that stops in the main display area Rm and a pattern that stops in both the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2 to create an effect that the pending notice is established. Say. When the notice condition is met at the start of the game round, it is determined which hold notice is to be executed based on the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. Then, in this case, when the trigger for the establishment of the notice condition is the jackpot result, the probability of selecting the third reserve notice is the highest, and when the trigger is the loss result, the probability of selecting the first reserve notice is high. set to the highest.

Further, in the present embodiment, a game turn of reach-out due to normal reach display is also treated as a pending notice. That is, in the normal ready-to-win display, when the ready-to-win symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 stop in an area other than the ready-to-win line in the main display area Rm, the stop result of the game round corresponds to the suspension notice. When the ready-to-win symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are stopped in the sub-display area Rs, the stop result of the game round corresponds to the suspension notice on the condition that the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are controlled to be opened. Resulting in a stop. Here, the mode of reach display will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 70 .

As already explained, the pachinko machine 10 has the normal reach display and the super reach display set as the reach display, and the super reach display is set with a higher expectation of a big win result than the normal reach display. In the normal ready-to-win display, as will be described below, the medium symbol row Z2 is displayed in correspondence with the variable display time determined by the main controller 81 (the variable display time determined in step S508 in the variable start process of FIG. 19). The stopping result is uniquely determined.

Specifically, when the variation is started, as shown in FIG. 70(a), all the symbols displayed in the display screen G in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are visually distinguished from each other in a manner that is impossible or difficult. A fast varying display (or first speed display) is performed. After that, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, first, the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed at a high speed so that each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 can be easily identified from the appearance. The variable display is switched to a slow variable display (or a second speed display that is slower than the first speed display). After that, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the variable display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, and each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3 is identified for the lower symbol row Z3. The display can be switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the display becomes easy to see. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the variable display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. In this case, the same symbols are stop-displayed on either of the activated lines in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. This timing is called reach generation timing.

At the ready-to-win timing, the medium pattern row Z2 is switched from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display so that each pattern displayed in the display screen G in the medium pattern row Z2 can be easily identified from the outside. At the same time, pattern position adjustment processing is executed. In the symbol position adjustment processing, the symbol position of the middle symbol row Z2 is adjusted so that the symbol "1" of the middle symbol row Z2 passes through the middle line L2 at the timing of switching from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. be. Specifically, the display control device 212 outputs an internal command to the VDP 255 so as to position the predetermined pattern at the timing when a predetermined period (6 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. . This predetermined period is set to be the same as the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reach occurrence timing. The pattern position adjustment process is always executed when the ready-to-win display occurs. Specifically, the process of creating such an internal command is incorporated in the variation pattern for reach display. In other words, the position of the "1" symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 at the ready-to-win timing is the same regardless of the ready-to-win display. In other words, the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the start timing of the low-speed fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 (reach generation timing) is determined.

Also, the period from the start of fluctuation to the reach occurrence timing is a constant period regardless of the stop result. Furthermore, in the low-speed fluctuation display, until the fluctuation end command is received (until the fluctuation display time elapses), at a constant speed (in this embodiment, the speed at which the fluctuation display for one pattern is performed in 0.5 seconds) A variable display is performed. As a result, the stopping result of the middle symbol row Z2 is uniquely determined from the variable display time. Specifically, the table area 243a of the ROM 243 stores a middle symbol row stop result information table. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 71, the middle symbol row stop result information table is set such that the stop result of each middle symbol row Z2 corresponds to the information of each variable display time on a one-to-one basis. For example, when the variable display time is set to 16 seconds by the main controller 81, it takes 6 seconds to stop the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. Since it takes 9.5 (=0.5×19) seconds from the stop of the variable display of the symbol row Z3 until the symbol “1” of the middle symbol row Z2 reaches the middle line L2 again, the total is 15.5. Since it takes seconds, the remaining time is 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the "1" symbol is stopped at a position shifted to the left by one symbol from the middle line L2, that is, at the left line L1.

From the above, in the case of the ready-to-win display, the period from the fluctuation start timing to the low-speed fluctuation display start timing is set constant, and the mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the start timing of the low-speed fluctuation display is uniquely determined. In addition, since the variable display speed of the low-speed variable display is constant, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined according to the variable display time. Then, the stop information is specified based on the game result and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. Since the possible stop results are limited as compared with the case where the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is not specified, the amount of information stored in advance as the possible stop results can be reduced. .

The super ready-to-win display is the same as the normal ready-to-win display from the fluctuation start timing until the fluctuation display of the medium symbol row Z2, which is the final stop symbol row, switches from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display at the ready-to-win occurrence timing. are different. Specifically, an internal command is generated and output so that the super-reach display is temporarily stopped in a predetermined region during the low-speed fluctuation display, and then switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display again.

That is, in the present embodiment, in a game turn in which the super ready-to-win display is performed, the normal ready-to-win display is performed first. After that, the super reach display is set to be performed. In this embodiment, an area shifted by one line from the reach line display to the fluctuation destination side is set as the predetermined area to be temporarily stopped. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), when the normal ready-to-win display is performed on the right line L3, as shown in FIG. 72(c), the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started again, and super ready-to-win display is performed as shown in FIG. 72(c). In other words, in the ready-to-win symbols of the middle symbol row Z2, an area (development point) where the normal ready-to-win display changes to the super ready-to-win display is predetermined.

Here, the medium symbol sequence control process during reach, which is executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the present embodiment, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not it is time to decelerate the medium symbol row Z2. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the timing T3 described above has passed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, display control is performed on the symbol display device 161 so as to decelerate the medium symbol row Z2 from high-speed variation to low-speed variation in step S3702. Specifically, a deceleration command as a deceleration instruction is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 determines whether or not this deceleration command has been received, so that the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined. It is possible to grasp whether or not

If it is determined in step S3701 that it is not the deceleration timing, or if the process of step S3702 is executed, it is determined in step S3703 whether or not the current reach display is the super reach display. If it is determined to be the super reach display, it is determined in step S3704 whether or not it is time for the normal reach display to develop to the super reach display. Specifically, as described above, the timing at which the ready-to-win symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 have shifted from the ready-to-win line by one line to the change destination side is the timing of transition from the normal ready-to-win display to the super ready-to-win display. If it is the development timing, the middle symbol row Z2 in the low speed fluctuation is temporarily stopped and displayed in step S3705, and then the processing of developing to the super ready-to-win display is executed.

If it is determined in step S3703 that it is normal reach display, if it is determined in step S3704 that it is not the development timing, or if step S3705 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3706. In step S3706, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop the middle symbol row Z2, that is, whether or not it is time to end the variable display. If it is the stop timing, a process of stopping and displaying the middle symbol row Z2 is executed in step S3707. When a negative determination is made in step S3706, or after executing the process of step S3707, the medium symbol sequence control process at the time of reach is terminated.

Next, an effect setting process for a pending notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the effect setting process for pending notice is a process executed in step S807 of the process for starting fluctuation (FIG. 29), and FIG. It shows the processing to be executed by

First, in step S3801, the process of grasping the symbol for notice is executed. Then, in step S3802, based on the reservation information stored in the reservation area 244h, it is determined whether or not the reservation information that has triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition is a jackpot result. Specifically, each unit area of the holding area 244h is referred to, and when holding information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in one of the unit areas, the trigger for establishment of the notice condition is the holding corresponding to the jackpot result. determined to be information. If it is the reservation information corresponding to the jackpot result, the notice type lottery table for the jackpot stored in the various table area 243a of the ROM 243 is referred to in step S3803, and if it is not the reservation information corresponding to the jackpot result, At step S3804, the notice type lottery table for loss stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 is referred to. A notice type lottery process for lottery of types is executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the big hit notice type lottery table, the probability that the third pending notice is selected is the highest, and the probability that the first pending notice is selected is the lowest. In this relationship, the probability of selection is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the third pending notice is selected with a probability of 60%, the second pending notice is selected with a probability of 30%, and the first pending notice is selected with a probability of 30%. The notice is set to be selected with a probability of 10%. On the other hand, in the notice type lottery table for failure, as shown in FIG. 75(b), the probability of selecting the first pending notice is the highest and the probability of selecting the third pending notice is set to be the lowest. . In this relationship, the probability of selection is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the first pending notice is selected with a probability of 60%, the second pending notice is selected with a probability of 30%, and the third pending notice is selected with a probability of 30%. The notice is set to be selected with a probability of 10%.

Returning to the description of the selection setting process for pending notice (FIG. 74), after executing the notice type lottery process in step S3805, the process proceeds to step S3806. In step S3806, it is determined whether or not the first pending notice has been selected based on the processing result of step S3805. When the first notice of suspension is selected, in step S3807, stop result determination processing for the first notice of suspension is executed. In the stop result determination process, the stop result table for the first suspension notice is referenced from the ROM 243 to determine the stop result of the current game round. In the stop result table for the first pending notice, the notice symbols and the arbitrary combination of the main symbols of the same kind as the notice symbols are displayed in the main display area Rm in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are associated with each other. A lottery or the like is used to determine the stop result that will be the first pending notice corresponding to the notice symbol. Then, in the following step S3808, effect pattern determination processing for the first pending notice is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3806 that it is not the first suspension notice, the flow advances to step S3809 to execute stop result determination processing for the second and third suspension notices. In the stop result determination process, one of the stop result tables for the second and third suspension notices from the ROM 243 is referred to in step S3805 to determine the stop result of the current game round. In the stop result table for the second pending notice, the notice symbols and the main symbols of the same kind as the notice symbols are stopped in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display region Rm and the sub display regions Rs1 and Rs2 on the left and right sides. An arbitrary combination to be displayed is associated, and a stop result as a second pending notice corresponding to the notice symbol is determined by lottery or the like. In addition, the stop result table for the third pending notice includes the notice symbols and the main symbols of the same kind as the notice symbols in the main display region Rm and the sub-display regions Rs1 and Rs2 on both left and right sides of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. is associated with an arbitrary combination to be stopped and displayed, and a stop result as a third pending notice corresponding to the notice symbol is determined by lottery or the like. In these second and third suspension notice stop result tables, there are movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven and controlled in the same way as the stop result tables for special suspension notice in the first to third embodiments. are mapped.

After that, in step S3810, effect pattern determination processing for the second and third pending notices is executed. In the following step S3811, processing for storing the open flag is executed, and in step S3812, processing for storing the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven and controlled is executed. After executing the process of step S3808 or step S3812, after executing the process of storing the notice execution flag in step S3813, the effect setting process for this pending notice is terminated.

Next, an effect setting process for occurrence of reach in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the ready-to-win effect setting process is a process executed in step S805 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29).

In the effect setting process for generating reach in the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S1001 that the reach in the current game round is normal reach, in step S3901 it is determined whether or not the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored. do. When the notice condition establishment flag is stored, in step S3902, the process of grasping the notice symbol is executed, and in step S3903, it is determined whether or not the opportunity for establishment of the notice condition was the result of the big win. Then, in steps S3904 and S3905, the corresponding notice type lottery table is acquired, and in step S3906, notice type lottery processing is executed. These processes are the same as those of steps S3801 to S3805.

In the subsequent step S3907, it is determined whether or not the first hold notice is selected based on the processing result of the above step S3906, and if it is the first hold notice, in step S3908, the first hold notice during reach In step S3909, the effect pattern determination process for the first hold notice at the time of reach is executed. If it is not the first hold notice in step S3907, it is determined whether or not the second hold notice is selected in step S3910. In step S3912, the effect pattern determination process for the second hold notice at the time of reach is executed. If it is not the second hold notice in step S3910, in step S3913 the stop result determination process for the third hold notice in reach is executed, and in step S3914 the production pattern for the third hold notice in reach is executed. Execute decision processing.

Hereinafter, the stop result determination processing for various holding notices at the time of reach in steps S3908, S3911, and S3913 will be described in detail.

First, in the stop result determination process for the first hold notice at the time of reach, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Specifically, in the middle symbol row Z2, it is grasped which symbols stop in the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs. Then, in step S4002, the process of determining the ready-to-win pattern is executed. In this process, if the notice symbol grasped in step S3902 is a specific pattern, the specific pattern of the type grasped in step S4001 is determined as a ready-to-win pattern, and the notice symbol grasped in step S3902 is non-existent. If it is a specific pattern, a non-specific pattern of the type grasped in step S4001 is determined as a ready-to-win pattern.

More specifically, for example, when it is determined in step S3902 that the notice symbol is a specific symbol of the main symbol to which "7" is attached, in step S4001 the main display area Rm Suppose that it is understood that the specific symbol of the main symbol with "3" attached to either of the and sub-display areas Rs will stop. In this case, in step S4002, the main symbol with "3" is determined as the ready-to-win symbol. Further, for example, when it is determined in step S3902 that the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol which is the main symbol to which "2" is attached, in step S4001 the main display area Rm and the sub symbol row Z2 are displayed. Suppose that it is understood that the non-specific symbols of the main symbols with "4" attached to any of the display areas Rs will stop. In this case, in step S4002, the main symbol with "4" is determined as the ready-to-win symbol.

In the middle symbol row Z2, the specific symbols and the non-specific symbols are stop-displayed in the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs in all game rounds. Specifically, when the specific pattern is stop-displayed on the middle line L2 of the main display region Rm, the non-specific pattern is stop-displayed on the left and right sub-display regions Rs, and the specific pattern is displayed on the left line L1 of the main display region Rm. is statically displayed, a non-specific symbol is statically displayed on the right line L3 of the main display area Rm.

After performing the process of step S4002, the reach line determination process is performed in step S4003. In this process, one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the reach line, and the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol determined in step S4002 does not stop on the determined reach line, that is, corresponds to the big hit result. The reach line is determined so as not to be a combination of symbols. Then, in step S4004, it is determined in which of the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs the pattern corresponding to the ready-to-win pattern determined in step S4002 is stop-displayed in the medium pattern row Z2. This processing is performed based on the processing result of step S4001.

When it is determined in step S4004 that the symbol corresponding to the ready-to-win symbol is stop-displayed in the main display region Rm, the stop result determination processing for the first suspension notice is terminated. In this case, the suspension notice to be executed in the current game round is performed by combining only the symbols stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm, which is the first suspension notice.

If it is determined in step S4004 that the pattern corresponding to the ready-to-win pattern is stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs, an open flag is stored in step S4005, and in step S4006 the target movable accessory 170- 173 is stored. Then, after executing the process of storing the release timing of the movable accessories 170 to 173 stored in step S4006 as the reaching end time in step S4007, the stop result determination process for the first pending notice is terminated. . In this case, the pending notice to be executed in the current game cycle is the second pending notice because the ready-to-win line is formed in the main display region Rm and the ready-to-win symbols in the medium pattern row Z2 are stopped and displayed in the sub-display region Rs. . That is, in this case, the second suspension notice is executed even if the suspension notice drawn in the notice type lottery process (step S3906) is the first suspension notice.

Next, the stop result determination process for the second hold notice at the time of reach executed in step S3911 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, this stop result determination process is a process executed when the second pending notice is selected.

In the stop result determination process for the second reservation notice, first, in step S4101, the process of grasping the stop symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. After that, in step S4102, determination processing of the ready-to-win pattern is executed, and in the subsequent step S4103, in which of the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs the ready-to-win pattern determined in step S4102 is stop-displayed in the middle pattern row Z2. judge. The processes of steps S4101 to S4103 are the same as the processes of steps S4001, S4002 and S4004.

If it is determined in step S4103 that the reach line is stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm, then in step S4104 processing is executed to determine the reach line as an ineffective line. In this case, the ready-to-win line is determined so that no ready-to-win pattern is stop-displayed on the line to be determined in the medium pattern row Z2, ie, the symbol combination corresponding to the big winning result is not formed. Then, in step S4105, the opening flag is stored, in step S4106, processing for storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed, and in step S4107, processing for storing the opening timing as the reach start time is executed. After that, the stop result determination processing for the second hold notice is terminated. As a result, the ready-to-win line is formed in the secondary display area Rs, and the ready-to-win symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm in the pending notice executed in the current game round. That is, the suspension notice executed in the same game round becomes the second suspension notice.

If it is determined in step S4103 that the reach line is stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs, then in step S4108 processing for determining the reach line as an effective line is executed. Also in this processing, the reach line is determined so that the ready-to-win pattern is not stopped and displayed on the line to be determined in the middle pattern row Z2, that is, the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the big win is not made, and then the second reservation notice is made. end the stop result determination process for As a result, the ready-to-win line is formed in the main display area Rm, and the ready-to-win symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are stop-displayed in the sub-display area Rs in the pending notice executed in the current game round. That is, the suspension notice executed in the same game round becomes the second suspension notice.

Next, the stop result determination process for the third reach suspension notice, which is performed in step S3913, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, this stop result determination process is a process executed when the third pending notice is selected.

First, in step S4201, the process of grasping the stop pattern of the middle pattern row Z2 is executed, the ready-to-win pattern determination process is executed in step S4202, and the ready-to-win pattern determined in step S4202 is the middle pattern in step S4203. It is determined in which of the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs the stop display is made in the row Z2. The processes of steps S4201 to S4203 are the same as the processes of steps S4101 to S4103.

If it is determined in step S4203 that the display is stopped in the main display area Rm, the stop result corresponding to the third hold notice cannot be obtained regardless of whether the reach line is set to the effective line or the non-effective line. . Therefore, in this case, in steps S4204 to S4209, processing is executed to change the current game round to the third suspension notice accompanied by the fanning effect instead of the ready-to-win effect. That is, at step S4204, the process of changing the current game round from the ready-to-win effect to the third hold notice at the time of non-reach is executed, and at step S4205, the stop result determination process for the third hold notice is executed. Then, in step S4206, effect pattern determination processing for the third pending notice is executed. The processing in steps S4205 and S4206 is the same as the processing for the third pending notice in the processing in steps S3809 and S3810.

In the following step S4207, processing for storing an open flag is executed, in step S4208 processing for storing a fan effect flag is executed, and in step S4209 processing for storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed. After that, the stop result determination process for the third hold notice is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4203 that the reach line is stopped and displayed in the sub-display region Rs, then in step S4210 processing is executed to determine any of the non-effective lines L6 to L11 as the reach line. In this case, the reach line is determined so that the reach line is formed in the sub display region Rs on the left and right opposite side of the sub display region Rs grasped in step S4203, and the reach line is formed on the determined line in the middle symbol row Z2. The reach line is determined so that the symbols are not stopped and displayed, that is, the symbol combination corresponding to the big winning result is not formed. Then, in step S4211, the process of storing the open flag is executed, in step S4212, the process of storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed, and in step S4213, the process of setting the opening timing to the reach start time. is executed, the stop result determination process for the third hold notice is terminated. In this case, the pending notice to be executed in the current game cycle is that the symbols forming the ready-to-win line and the ready-to-win symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed in the secondary display areas Rs on the left and right opposite sides. 3 It becomes a pending notice.

As described above, in a game round in which the notice condition is established, any one of the first to third hold notices is selected and the hold notice is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the advance notice condition is established during execution of the game round, the suspension notice is not executed in the game round. In this embodiment, there are more types of pending notices than in the first to third embodiments. The processing load in the game round being executed can be extremely increased by performing a process of drawing a lottery for the type of game and changing the stop result in accordance with the drawing result. The above-described restriction on suspension notice is a device for suppressing such a local increase in processing load.

Next, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 80 and 81, the manner in which the ready-to-win display is performed in each game round will be described, centering on the relationship with the pending notice.

When a ready-to-win line is formed on the effective line and the ready-to-win display is started, the player expects that the ready-to-win pattern is stop-displayed on the ready-to-win line, that is, a big win result in the current game round. As already explained, the normal reach display and the super reach display are set for the reach display, and the expectation of a big win result is set higher in the super reach display than in the normal reach display. Then, in the present embodiment, after the ready-to-win pattern passes the ready-to-win line in the normal ready-to-win display and is temporarily stopped and displayed, it develops to the super ready-to-win display. Therefore, while the normal ready-to-win display is being performed, the player first expects the ready-to-win symbols to be stopped and displayed on the ready-to-win line as described above. We hope that the normal reach display will develop into a super reach display.

On the other hand, in the pending notice, in the present embodiment, the first pending notice to the third pending notice are set, and the expectation that the third pending notice will result in a big hit after that is the highest, and the first pending notice is after that The expectation that the result will be a jackpot is set to the lowest. In this third pending notice, the symbols stopped and displayed in the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2 are used to form a combination of symbols that serve as a pending notice. The symbols stop-displayed in Rs2 are used to form a combination of symbols to be a pending notice, and the first reserve notice is formed by using the symbols stopped-displayed in the main display region Rm to form a pattern combination to be a hold notice. be.

In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 80(a), when the ready-to-win display is performed on the right line L3 which is the active line, the player first sees the ready-to-win symbols stop on the right line L3 in the middle symbol row Z2. expect to see. This is because if it is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 as it is, it will result in a big win. When the ready-to-win pattern passes the ready-to-win line, as a player, next, as shown in FIG. 80(b), the middle pattern row Z2 temporarily stops at the middle line L2 shifted one line from the right line L3. expect to see. This is because once the display is stopped, there is a possibility that it will develop into a super ready-to-win display after that, and a big win can be expected after that.

On the other hand, if the vehicle temporarily stops at the middle line L2 but does not develop into the super reach display, this stop result corresponds to the stop result of the first pending notice. Therefore, it can be expected that a big winning result will be achieved in subsequent game rounds. In this manner, the middle symbol row Z2 is temporarily stopped and displayed at the development point from the normal ready-to-win display to the super ready-to-win display. and are set. For this reason, when the game is temporarily stopped, the player has an expectation that the game round may result in a big win due to the subsequent development, and in addition, the game round to be performed after the game round may result in a big win. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that it will not be possible. As a result, it is possible to raise the degree of attention not only to the current game round but also to subsequent game rounds by the performance of the current game round, and as a result, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the game as a whole.

When the normal reach display does not stop once at the middle line L2, as shown in FIG. 80(c), the reach symbol moves further to the fluctuation destination side, and the left side which is the area farther from the reach line than the middle line L2. When stopped and displayed on the non-effective line L9, the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 move to the non-shielding position, resulting in a stop result corresponding to the second reservation notice. As described above, the degree of expectation that the second suspension notice will result in a big win afterward is set higher than the first suspension notice, and with this stop result, the player will have a big win result after that. expected to expect.

Here, generally, it is considered that the player's expectation for the big winning result in the current game round decreases as the reach symbol is further away from the reach line. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the more the ready-to-win pattern is further away from the ready-to-win line and the stop-display is performed, the higher the degree of expectation for a big winning result in the subsequent game cycle is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectations due to the reach pattern being separated from the reach line, and to appropriately increase the degree of attention throughout the reach.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(a), a description will be given of a case where a cross line reach is achieved by a specific pattern and a non-specific pattern by a right downward line L7 and a right upward line L8. In this case, as shown in FIG. 81(b), in the middle symbol row Z2, the main symbol (specific symbol) attached with "7", which is the reach symbol forming the reach line of the right rising line L8, is on the right side. When it is stopped and displayed on the non-effective line L6, although the game result of the current game round is the result of losing, this stop result is the second suspension notice and is not the big win result in the next and subsequent game rounds. can be expected to become In the medium pattern row Z2, when the main pattern with "7" is stop-displayed on the right line L3, the pattern combination corresponds to the result of the variable probability big win, and the result of the game this time is the result of the probability variable big win. As shown in FIG. 81(c), in the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbol with "7" is stop-displayed on the middle line L2, this stop result is the second hold notice. be. In addition, once the game is stopped at the middle line L2, the normal reach of "7" can develop into a super reach, so it can be expected that a big win will be achieved in this game round as well.

In the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbols with "7" are stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the main symbols with "8" which are non-specific symbols are aligned on the right downward line L7. The combination of symbols corresponds to the result of the big win, and the result of the game this time is usually the big win. As shown in FIG. 81(d), in the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbol with "7" is stop-displayed on the left non-effective line L9, the stop result will be the third hold notice. This is the result. In this case, as shown in FIG. 81(b) or FIG. 81(c), the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by shifting by one line from the reach line of "7" to the fluctuation base side or the fluctuation destination side. The degree of expectation of a big hit result in the next and subsequent game rounds is higher than the advance notice. Furthermore, in this case, the main symbol with "8" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. Since it can develop into a reach, it can be expected that this game round will also result in a big hit.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the hold notice, the stop result of the reach out is set to be subject to the hold notice, and the further the reach pattern is away from the reach line to the fluctuation destination side or the fluctuation base side, the more it is expected to be a big hit result in the subsequent game round. It was set so that it would be a high hold notice. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the degree of attention during the ready-to-win, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the current game round in the effect of raising the degree of attention to the next and subsequent game rounds, which is the suspension notice. It becomes possible.

As a specific configuration of the above, there is a first suspension notice using only the symbols stopped and displayed in the main display region Rm, and a pattern stopped and displayed in either the left or right sub display region Rs and the stopped display in the main display region Rm. and a third suspension notice using the symbols stopped and displayed in both the left and right sub-display areas Rs are set, and the third suspension notice, the second suspension notice, the second It was set so that the expectation of a big hit result would be higher in the order of 1 pending notice. By setting in this way, in the ready-to-win where the ready-to-win line is formed in the main display region Rm, it is more expected that the ready-to-reach symbols of the middle pattern row Z2 stop in the sub-display region Rs than stop in the main display region Rm. becomes high, and in the reach line formed in the sub-display region Rs, the reach line is formed in the sub-display on the side opposite to the reach line formed in the middle symbol row Z2 rather than stopping in the main display region Rm. The degree of expectation is higher when the vehicle stops in the region Rs. That is, the degree of expectation differs between the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs where the ready-to-win symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 stop. By clarifying the visual difference between the announcement modes, it is possible to prevent the difference in expectations of the executed announcement from becoming difficult for the player to understand.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a plurality of development points are set from the normal reach display to the super reach display. Specifically, as development points from the normal reach display to the super reach display, the first development point where the reach pattern is temporarily stopped at the line shifted by one line from the reach line, and the change of two lines from the reach line There are set a second development point at which the ball is temporarily stopped at a line shifted forward, and a third development point at which the ball is temporarily stopped at a line shifted forward by three lines from the reach line. Furthermore, the selected development point and the reach line of the normal reach display before development are associated with each other so that they can be developed into the super reach display.

More specifically, when the first development point is selected, a line other than the left non-effective line L9 is selected as the reach line of the normal reach display before development. When the second development point is selected, a line other than the left non-effective line L9, the left downward right line L10, and the left upward right line L11 is selected as the reach line of the normal reach before development. ing. When the third development point is selected, the right reach line L3, the right non-effective line L6, the right downward slope line L7, or the right upward slope line L8 is selected as the reach line of the normal reach before development. is set to be

Hereinafter, referring to the schematic diagram of FIG. 82, this embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the fourth embodiment.

In the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29) by the production control device 82, in step S903 of the production setting processing (FIG. 30) for the big hit, and in step S1003 of the production setting processing (FIG. 32) for the occurrence of reach, at the time of super reach A performance pattern at the time of super reach is determined by referring to a performance pattern table. As shown in FIG. 82(a), the probability that the third development point is selected is the highest in the effect pattern table for jackpot super reach that is selected when the game result of the current game round is the jackpot result. is set, and the probability that the first development point is selected is set to be the lowest. The probability of being selected is increased in the order of third development point>second development point>first development point. Each selection rate is arbitrary as long as it has the above relationship, but in the present embodiment, the probability that the third development point is selected is set to 60%, and the probability that the second development point is selected is set to 30%. and the probability that the first development point is selected is set to 10%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 82(b), in the effect pattern table at the time of Super Reach for Loss, which is selected when the game result of the current game round is a Loss result, the probability that the first development point is selected is low. It is set to be the highest and the probability that the third development point is selected is set to be the lowest. The probability of selection is set to increase in the order of the first development point, the second development point, and the third development point. Each selection rate is arbitrary as long as it has the above relationship, but in the present embodiment, the probability that the first development point is selected is set to 60%, and the probability that the second development point is selected is set to 30%. and the probability that the third development point is selected is set to 10%.

Because of this setting, in the normal ready-to-win display, the degree of expectation that the game result of the game round will be a big hit depends on the area (development point) where the ready-to-win symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 temporarily stop. That is, the degree of expectation is highest when the game is temporarily stopped at the third development point, and the degree of expectation is lowest when it is temporarily stopped at the first development point. Expectations increase in the order of 3rd development point > 2nd development point > 1st development point.

Further, since the development points are set as described above, it is possible to predict which development point is selected by the reach line on which the normal reach display is performed. That is, when the reach line on which the normal reach display is performed is the right line L3, the right non-effective line L6, the right lower right line L7, or the right upper right line L8, any of the first to third development points is selected. there may be. When the reach lines on which the normal reach display is performed are the middle line L2, the downward-sloping line L4, and the upward-sloping line L5, there is no possibility that the third development point is selected, and either the first development point or the second development point is selected. selected. When the reach lines on which the normal reach display is performed are the left line L1, the left downward right line L10, and the left upward right line L11, there is no possibility that the second and third development points are selected. A development point is selected.

In this way, since the reach line of the normal reach display is determined by the development point of the super reach display, the normal reach display of the lines L1, L10, and L11 where only the first development point is possible, and the development point are set. In the normal reach display of the non-effective line (left non-effective line L9), there is concern that the attention level will decrease.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82(c), in the effect pattern table for the normal reach for the big win, the lines L1, L10, and L11 where only the first development point is possible are a high probability of being selected (60%), followed by a high probability of being selected (30%) of lines L2, L4, L5 where the first or second development point may have been selected; Next, the probability of selecting lines L3, L6, L7, and L8 where the first to third development points may have been selected is set to be high (9%). In addition, as shown in FIG. 82(d), in the performance pattern table for normal reach for failure, lines L3, L6, L7, and L8 that may have selected the first to third development points are selected. line L2, L4, and L5 on which the first development point or the second development point may be selected are set to have the highest probability (60%), and the probability of being selected is the highest (30%). %), and only the first evolution point is set with the lowest probability that the possible lines L1, L10, L11 will be selected (10%). These normal reach effect pattern tables are tables referred to in step S906 in the change start process (FIG. 29) in the effect setting process for big hits and in step S1022 in the effect setting process for generating reach.

By setting the effect pattern table for normal reach in this way, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the degree of attention of the normal reach display caused by the setting of the development point of the super reach display as described above. It's becoming

By the way, the left non-effective line L9, to which the development point is not set, is set only in the big win table in the normal reach pattern table, and its selection rate is set to be the lowest (1%). That is, when the ready-to-win display is performed on the left non-effective line L9, the premium performance is such that the result of the big win is decided at that time.

Further, although detailed description with drawings is omitted, when the point corresponding to the left side sub-display area Rs2 is selected as the development point, the third movable role object 172 and the third movable accessory 172 are displayed when the normal reach display is developed to the super reach display. The drive units 172a and 173a are driven and controlled so that the 4 movable accessory 173 moves to the non-shielding position. Therefore, when the point corresponding to the left side sub-display region Rs2 is selected in the process for starting fluctuation, the process of storing the corresponding movable accessories 172 and 173 and the development timing is performed.

Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 83, the manner in which the ready-to-win display is performed in each game round will be described, centering on the relationship with the development points for the super-ready-to-win display.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), when a ready-to-win game occurs on the right line L3, the player first expects the ready-to-win symbols to stop on the right line L3, which is the ready-to-win game line. If the reach symbol passes the reach line, there is still a possibility that it will develop into a super reach display after that. As the development points, the first development point (middle line L2) shown in FIG. 83(b), the second development point (left line L1) shown in FIG. 83(c), and the A third development point (left non-effective line L9) is set, and the more the ready-to-win pattern moves away from the ready-to-win line to the fluctuation destination side, the higher the expectation of a big win result in the super ready-to-win display after development is set. ing. Therefore, the player expects that the reach pattern will change from the first development point to the second development point, and from the second development point to the third development point. I will pay attention to where I am going. Thereby, it becomes possible to preferably increase the degree of attention during reach.

Further explaining the relationship with the pending notice, when a reach occurs on the right line L3, if the stop display (confirmed display) is made as it is after a temporary stop at the first and second development points, the first pending notice , resulting in a stop result equivalent to On the other hand, if the stop display (confirmation display) is displayed as it is after the temporary stop at the third development point, the stop result corresponds to the second suspension notice.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the normal reach display is performed, the further the development point from the normal reach display to the super reach display is away from the reach line, the more the degree of expectation that the result of the big win will be in the game round is set high, it is possible to favorably increase the attention level of the reach.

In the above configuration, due to the relationship between the reach line and the development points, when the normal reach display is performed, the development points may be limited by the reach line, so the degree of attention to the normal reach display is reduced. is concerned. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the degree of expectation of a big hit result is changed according to the type of reach line without developing to the super reach display but with the normal reach display. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the degree of attention is lowered due to the relationship with the development point in the normal reach display, and to achieve the excellent effect of setting the development point as described above.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, a colorless and transparent game board 100, and a movable accessory device 162 and a pattern display device 161 arranged behind it are used to realize a characteristic effect.

First, the configuration of the game board 100 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, the configuration of the center frame 130 provided on the game board 100 is different. That is, in this embodiment, the ball receiving portion 132 is arranged at the exit of the front side ball passage 134 of the roof frame 131, and the game ball passing through the front side ball passage 134 is received by the ball receiving portion 132. Become. Stage frame 150 according to the present embodiment is formed such that both left and right ends extend upward, so that inner ball passage 153 communicates with ball receiving portion 132 .

That is, in the present embodiment, a game ball entering the opening 135 of the roof frame 131 is distributed to either the left or right front side ball passage 134 and is received by the ball receiving portion 132 to enter the back side ball passage 153. derived and then to stage 144 . In this case, the left and right inner ball passages 153 are arranged so that a part thereof overlaps the movable accessory device 162 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the game ball passing through the left and right inner ball passages 153 also overlaps the movable accessory device 162 in the front-rear direction during its passage. Furthermore, as described above, the movable accessory device 162 is arranged so as to overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction. They overlap in the front-rear direction.

Further, detection sensors 136a and 136b for detecting the passage of game balls are provided near the entrances of the left and right ball passages 134 on the roof frame 131. As shown in FIG. The detection sensors 136a and 136b are connected to the effect control device 82, and the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 detects the entrance to the front side ball passage 134 based on the detection information (detection signal) from these detection sensors 136a and 136b. It is possible to grasp that a ball has been generated (that a game ball passes through the inner ball passage 153).

In the present embodiment, by using the above configuration, characteristic control is performed in which the motions of the movable accessories 170 to 173 are interlocked with the motions of the game balls. Hereinafter, the processing during fluctuation by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 85 . As already explained, the mid-variation process is a process executed in step S705 of the variable display control process (FIG. 28), and FIG. 85 is a process executed in place of the mid-variation process shown in FIG. is.

In the process for mid-variation in the present embodiment, as in the process of steps S1201 to S1207, the process for performing a fan effect is executed in steps S4301 to S4307. In step S4308, it is determined whether or not the RAM 244 stores an open flag. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4308, the process proceeds to step S4309.

In step S4309, based on the detection information of the detection sensors 136a and 136b, whether the game ball has entered the front side ball passage 134 corresponding to the movable accessories 170 to 173 scheduled to execute opening control in the current game round. determine whether or not Specifically, when either one of the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 is scheduled to execute opening control in the current game turn, it is arranged in the left front side ball passage 134. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 136a, affirmative determination is made in step S4309. In addition, when either one of the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 is scheduled to execute the opening control in the current game turn, the detection sensor arranged in the right front side ball passage 134 When the passage of the game ball is detected by 136b, an affirmative determination is made in step S4309.

If the determination in step S4309 is affirmative, the process advances to step S4310 to execute a process of adding 1 to the incoming ball counters provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244. FIG. This ball entry counter is referred to when the MPU 202 grasps the number of game balls that have entered the ball passage 134 on the front side.

If a negative determination is made in step S4309, or if the process of step S4210 has been executed, the process advances to step S4311. In step S4311, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 3). If it is determined that the number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S4312, and processing for opening/closing control of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed in steps S4312 to S4317. Note that the processing in steps S4312 to S4317 is the same as the processing in steps S1209 to S1214 described above, so the description thereof is omitted.

If a negative determination is made in step S4311, that is, if the value of the incoming ball counter is less than the predetermined number, even if the open flag is stored (even if an affirmative determination is made in step S4308) ), the processing for controlling the opening and closing of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 is not executed. That is, in the present embodiment, an open flag is stored, and even in a game round in which a special hold notice is executed, a special Pending notice is not executed.

Here, the ball passage processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The sphere passing process is a process that is started at a predetermined timing, and more specifically, a process that is started after the variable display control process (FIG. 28) is executed.

In the ball passing process, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the change start process has been performed in the change display control process executed before the ball passage process started this time. If it is determined that it is time to start the variable display, the flow advances to step S4402 to determine whether an open flag is stored.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4402, a process of outputting an opening suggestion command to the display control device 212 is executed in step S4403. The opening suggestion command includes information on the movable accessories 170 to 173 scheduled to be opened/closed in the current game cycle. The display control device 212 that has received the opening suggesting command performs a suggestive effect suggesting which of the left and right front side ball passages 134 the movable accessories 170 to 173 are scheduled to operate. 161 is displayed and controlled. Specifically, for example, if the target is the first movable accessory 170 or the second movable accessory 171, the message "Aim for the right passage!" If the accessory 173 is the target, the message "Aim for the left passage!" is displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4401 or step S4402, or if the process of step S4403 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S4404. In step S4404, it is determined again whether or not the open flag is stored. If it is determined that the open flag is stored, the process advances to step S4405. In step S4405, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the corresponding front side ball passage 134 based on detection information from the detection sensors 136a and 136b. This process is similar to the process of step S4309.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4405, the drive units 170a to 173a of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are driven and controlled in step S4406, and the operation corresponding to the entry into the ball passage 134 on the front side is performed. For example, the action of vibrating the movable accessories 170 to 173 is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S4404 or step S4405, or if the processing in step S4406 has been executed, the ball passage processing ends.

In the present embodiment, when the notice condition is satisfied at the start of the game round and the special hold notice is scheduled to be executed in the game round, the suggestive effect is executed by the symbol display device 161 as described above. be. Then, when the player enters the game ball into the ball passage 134 on the front side according to the suggestive effect, the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 operate (vibrate) each time the ball enters. Then, when the number of incoming balls reaches a predetermined number or more and the opening timing is reached, the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are controlled to move to the non-shielding position, and a special hold notice is executed.

On the other hand, as described above, when the suggestion effect is performed but the ball is not entered into the corresponding front side ball passage 134, or when the number of balls entering the corresponding front side ball passage 134 does not reach the predetermined number. No special notice of suspension will be given.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, even if the special reservation notice is not given in this way, the game results in the current game round and the subsequent game rounds do not change. However, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the player can play the game while having a sense of anticipation for the subsequent game round by performing the special reservation notice. Even if the player understands that the game result will not be affected, it is considered that the player wishes to make a special reservation notice in the current game round. In this case, the player operates the shooting handle 55 to make the game ball enter the ball passage 134 on the near side so that a special reservation notice is given. By doing so, it is possible to encourage active participation in the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the above suggestive effect is performed only at the start of the game round. When the setting is made so that the special reservation notice is performed, the suggestive effect is not performed. On the other hand, even if the special reservation notice is set during execution of the game round, the game ball enters the corresponding front side ball passage 134 and the corresponding movable accessory 170 ~ Since 173 operates, the player can grasp that a special hold notice can be performed after that. By doing so, it is considered that the player who wants to enjoy the performance as described above usually operates the shooting handle 55 so as to enter the ball into the front side ball passage 134. It is possible to give a special feeling that only the player who is performing the shooting operation can grasp the special reservation notice before it is performed, and to favorably encourage active participation in the game.

In such a configuration, when a game ball is shot in a shooting mode for the player to enjoy the performance as described above, the shot game ball passes through the front side ball passage 134 and the back side ball passage 153. and is led to the stage 144. As already explained, the game ball led out to the stage 144 is configured to easily enter the operation opening 115 arranged below, and the shooting mode as described above makes it easy to enter the operation opening 115. It can be said. In other words, the shooting mode for the player to enjoy the effect is set to a shooting mode in which the player can easily obtain a privilege (easily receive a win-or-fail lottery). As a result, the player can be sufficiently entertained with the performance without being disadvantaged, and the interest-enhancing effect can be favorably exhibited.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, by utilizing the positional relationship among the game board 100, the movable accessory device 162, and the pattern display device 161, the movable accessory device 162 and the pattern display device are moved in association with the motion of the game ball. 161, it is possible to perform the effects of the game machine side (movements of the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the display screen G) in the game of following the movement of the game ball fired by the player's operation. It is possible to perform a novel effect of associating the pending notice). As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the movable accessory device 162 is different from those in the first to sixth embodiments. An overview of the movable accessory device 300 according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 and 88 are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between the display screen G and the movable accessory device 300. The pattern display device 161 (display screen G) positioned behind the movable accessory device 300 is outlined by a chain double-dashed line. It is described in a specific way.

As shown in FIG. 87, the movable accessory device 300 has four movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 arranged at the four corners of the display screen G of the pattern display device 161, as in the above-described embodiments. have. These four movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 are fans that can be opened and closed, and are in an open state (shielding state) that overlaps the display screen G in the front-back direction, and a closed state that does not overlap the display screen G in the front-back direction ( (see FIGS. 87 and 88).

Specifically, when the upper right movable accessory (first movable accessory) 310 placed on the upper right of the display screen G is in an open state, the upper right portion of the display screen G (variable display area) is covered, making it difficult to see. Otherwise, the upper right portion is exposed and the visibility of the upper right portion is ensured by being in the closed state. In other words, the upper right portion of the display screen G (variable display area) is the upper right portion of the display screen G (variable display area) that is switched between shielding and non-shielding by the upper right movable accessory (first movable accessory) 310 arranged on the upper right of the display screen G. Similarly, the switching target of shielding/non-shielding by the lower right movable accessory (second movable accessory) 320 arranged in the lower right of the display screen G is arranged in the lower right part of the display screen G and the upper left part of the display screen G. The upper left movable role (third movable role) 330 is switched to the upper left part of the display screen G, and the left lower movable role (fourth movable role) placed in the lower left of the display screen G The lower left portion of the display screen G is switched between shielding/non-shielding by 340 .

These four movable accessories 310, 320, 330 and 340 have a common basic structure. Therefore, in the following description, the upper right movable accessory 310 will be exemplified with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. explains. FIG. 89 is a front view of the movable accessory 310. FIG.

The movable accessory 310 has a bone portion 311 formed by combining a plurality of long plate-like members in the front-rear direction of the game machine. The bone portion 311 includes a pair of front and rear rib portions 314 (a front rib portion 314 a on the front side and a rear rib portion 314 b on the rear side), and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) middle bone portions sandwiched between the rib portions 314 . 315. Plate surfaces of the main rib portion 314 and the central rib portion 315 face forward and backward, and are laminated at one end thereof. A main part 317 is formed at this one end, and the movable accessory 310 opens and closes by rotating the bone part 311 around this main part 317 .

A translucent fan surface portion 312 is attached to the end portion (the other end portion) of each bone portion 311 opposite to the main portion 317 . The fan surface portion 312 has a fan shape of about 150°, and main rib portions 314a and 314b are fixed to both sides of the fan-shaped diameter from the rear, and intermediate rib portions 315 are fixed to the intermediate portion thereof at equal intervals. there is Fixed portions 312a to which the bone portions 311 are fixed and non-fixed portions 312b sandwiched between the fixed portions 312a are alternately provided on the fan surface portion 312. A bent portion 312c that is bent when the movable accessory 310 is closed is formed in the boundary portion. The bent portions 312c include a mountain fold formed along the edge of each bone portion 311 and a valley fold provided between the bent portions 312c of the mountain folds. A portion and a valley fold portion are alternately formed.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 90(a), by adopting a configuration in which the mountain-folded portion and the valley-folded portion are maintained in the open state, when the movable accessory 310 is closed, the folded portion 312c is used as a starting point. It will be induced to transform. In other words, it is possible to prevent the fan surface portion 312 from bending at other portions without bending at the bent portion 312c. By specifying the deformed portion of the fan surface portion 312 in this way, it is possible to prevent the folding function from failing due to unintended deformation of the fan surface portion 312 due to repeated opening and closing. .

The movable accessory 310 is integrated with the game board 100 by fixing the front rib portion 314 a to the back surface of the game board 100 . As shown in FIG. 87 and the like, a driving motor 313 as a power source is arranged behind the movable accessory 310 (main part 317), and the movable accessory 310 is opened and closed by the power from the driving motor 31. .

In order to open and close the movable accessory 310, one side of the rib portion 314 is fixed and the other side is rotated to open and close. However, such a configuration may make it difficult to smoothly open and close the door, and locally increase the stress generated during the opening and closing of the door, which may lead to a decrease in durability. In order to solve such a problem, this embodiment is characterized by a driving force transmission mechanism for opening and closing the movable accessory 310 . Therefore, this power transmission mechanism will be described below with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 89 and 90(b).

As shown in FIG. 89, through holes 318 are formed through the main portion 317 in the front-rear direction, and gears 319 are arranged in the through holes 318, respectively. As shown in FIG. 90(b), the gear 319 includes a drive section side gear 313b fixed to the rotation shaft 313a of the drive motor 313, a bone section side gear 313c fixed to each bone section 311, and a driving section side gear 313c. It is composed of a planetary gear 313d arranged between a part-side gear 313b and a bone part-side gear 313c. It functions as a planetary gear mechanism that serves as a carrier.

The gear ratio of each of the gears 313b to 313d is such that the rotational speed of the bone portion on the distal end side of rotation is faster than the rotational speed of the bone portion on the proximal end side of rotation. is set. In other words, the rotation speed is set to be faster as the amount of movement during opening and closing is greater. More specifically, the bones are set to reach the open position/closed position at the same timing.

When the drive motor 313 is driven and controlled to rotate the rotating shaft 313a, the drive section side gear 313b rotates, and the power thereof is transmitted to the bone section side gear 313c via the planetary gear 313d. In addition, the drive motor 313 is connected to the production control device 82 in the same manner as in the above-described embodiments, and the driving control of the drive motor 313 is performed by the MPU 242 of the production control device 82 .

When the drive motor 313 is operated by the drive signal from the performance control device 82 (when the rotary shaft 313a rotates), each bone portion 311 except for the front rib portion 314a rotates. That is, when the rotating shaft 313a is controlled to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front, each bone portion 311 rotates like a folding fan, and the fan surface portion 312 opens to overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction. state (see FIG. 87). Further, from this state, the driving motor 313 is driven and controlled, and the rotation shaft 313a is controlled to rotate counterclockwise in a front view, so that each bone portion 311 rotates so as to close the folding fan, and the fan surface portion 312 rotates. is closed and switched to a closed state in which it does not overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 88). In this case, the fan surface portion 312 is folded at each bent portion 312c and accommodated between the front and rear rib portions 314a and 314b. When the fan surface portion 312 is closed in this way, the outer shape of the movable accessory 310 in the front view of the game machine is smaller than when it is open.

Since the fan surface portion 312 is formed semi-transparent as described above, when the upper right movable accessory 310 is placed in the blocking position, as shown in FIG. of light passes through the fan surface portion 312 . In this case, in the present embodiment, the positional relationship between the fan surface portion 312 and the display screen G is used to change the visibility of the pattern displayed on the display screen G behind.

That is, each bone portion 311 rotates in a direction substantially parallel to the display screen G and displaces between the shielding position and the non-shielding position. On the other hand, at the maximum rotation position of each bone portion 311, the angle formed by the front and rear rib portions 314a and 314b (approximately 120° in this embodiment) is set smaller than the angle formed by the fan surface portion 312 (approximately 150°). When each bone portion 311 moves to the shielding position, each bent portion 312c is arranged at a predetermined angle α as shown in FIG. 90(a). As a result, a non-parallel surface is generated between the fan surface portion 312 and the display screen G, and the light emitted from the display screen G is refracted on the non-parallel surface, reducing the visibility of the display screen G. Specifically, the non-parallel surface is the non-fixed portion 312b, and the fixed portion 312a continuous with the non-fixed portion 312b is arranged substantially parallel to the display screen G. FIG. Therefore, in the fixing portion 312a, the light emitted from the display screen G is transmitted as it is without being refracted.

In this way, by providing a non-parallel surface and a parallel surface to the display screen G, the visibility of the display screen G is changed, and the player can see the movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 behind the movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340. It is possible to make the user interested in the pattern displayed on the screen.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory 310 opens and closes, a bending action occurs at the bent portion 312c of the fan surface portion 312. As shown in FIG. Therefore, if the fan surface portion 312 is formed of Japanese paper or the like so as to have only translucency instead of being transparent, the strength of the bent portion 312c may be reduced and the upper right movable accessory 310 may become fragile. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, strength is ensured by forming the fan surface portion 312 from nylon resin or the like. By arranging the display screen G and the fan surface portion 312 in a non-parallel manner, the visibility of the display screen G behind is suppressed from being excessively improved. By doing so, while the shielding effect of reducing the visibility of the display screen G in the situation where the upper right movable accessory 310 is placed at the shielding position is achieved, the inconvenience of weakening the upper right movable accessory 310 due to positional displacement is achieved. can be avoided.

Further, if the fan surface portion 312 were arranged so as to be non-parallel to the display screen G, not only the non-fixed portion 312b but also the fixed portion 312a would need to be non-parallel. In this case, each bone portion 311 fixed to the fixing portion 312a also needs to serve as the display screen G, which may result in complication of the structure. On the other hand, since each bone portion 311 is fixed to the fixing portion 312a, by making each bone portion 311 non-transparent, the light from the display screen G is not transmitted forward. Therefore, by arranging the fixing portion 312a so as to be substantially parallel to the display screen G as in the present embodiment, the shielding function of the display screen G is ensured while suppressing complication of the structure.

Here, for the upper movable accessories 310 and 330, the front ribs 314a and 334a are fixed to the game board 100, and these fixed front ribs 314a and 334a are used when opening and closing the movable accessories 310 and 330. The proximal side and the side of the rear ribs 314b and 334b are the distal side. On the other hand, in the lower movable parts 320, 340, the rear ribs 324b, 344b are fixed to the base body 163 instead of the front ribs 324a, 344a. When opening and closing the movable accessory 320, 340, the base end side, and the front rib portion 324a, 344a side are the tip side.

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 91, the movable accessory device 300 is such that when the movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 are closed, parts of the upper and lower movable accessories are mutually moved in the front-rear direction. arranged to overlap. The overlapping of the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the movable accessory device 300 has a bilaterally symmetrical configuration, the movable accessory 310 and 320 arranged on the right side of the display screen G will be exemplified here.

As already described, in the present embodiment, the upper movable accessories 310 and 330 are opened and closed by fixing the front ribs 314a and 334a to the game board 100 and rotating the rear ribs 314b and 334b. be done. On the other hand, the lower movable accessories 320 and 340 are opened and closed by fixing the rear ribs 324b and 344b to the game board 100 and rotating the front ribs 324a and 344a. By arranging the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 in this manner, the movable accessory device 300 can be arranged even if both are in the open state and are overlapped in the front-rear direction as described above. It is suppressed that the thickness of is increased.

Specifically, if the thickness of each of the movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 when placed in the shielding position is d1, the overall thickness when placed in the non-shielding position is d1. Although there is, the thickness at each site will be less than d1 (see d2 for example). By overlapping the movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 at the thinned portions, the space before and after the overlapping portions can be made smaller than d1×2. In other words, the distance between the display screen G arranged behind the movable accessory device 300 and the game board 100 arranged in front of the movable accessory device 300 can be shortened, and the distance becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the visibility of the display screen G.

Next, referring to FIG. 92, the relationship between the main symbols stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs of the display screen G and the movable accessory will be exemplified. FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the movable accessories 310 and 320 and the main symbols stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs1.

As shown in FIG. 92(a), when the upper movable accessory 310 is in the open state, the fan surface portion 312 of the movable accessory 310 becomes part of the main symbol that stops on the middle symbol row Z2 in the secondary display area Rs. Overlapping in the front-rear direction. Furthermore, when the lower movable role object 320 is arranged at the shielding position, the fan surface part 322 of the movable role object 320 overlaps in the front-rear direction with a part of the main symbol stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 in the secondary display area Rs. are arranged as follows. The main symbols stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 of these sub-display areas Rs include a first portion P1 that does not overlap any of the upper and lower movable accessories 310 and 320 in the front-rear direction and is visible from the front of the game machine, and an upper movable part P1. A second part P2 that overlaps only the accessory 310 in the front-rear direction, a third part P3 that overlaps only the lower movable accessory 320 in the front-rear direction, and a fourth part that overlaps the upper and lower movable accessories 310 and 320 in the front-rear direction. P4 is set.

The main symbol stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 in the sub-display area Rs switches the lower movable accessory 320 from the open state to the closed state under the condition that the upper movable accessory 310 is in the open state. Then, as shown in FIG. 92(b), the third portion P3 in addition to the first portion P1 among the portions P1 to P4 is visible from the front of the game machine. On the other hand, when the upper movable accessory 310 switches from the open state to the closed state under the condition that the lower movable accessory 320 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. In addition to the first portion P1 of P1 to P4, the second portion P2 can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. Further, both the upper and lower movable accessories 310 and 320 are switched from the open state to the closed state, so that the fourth portion P4 becomes visible as shown in FIG. 92(c).

On the premise that the character image and the number image are combined to form the main pattern, the part (fourth part P4 ), as described in the first to sixth embodiments, the holding symbol stops at the middle symbol row Z2 of the sub-display area Rs in the holding notice, and the upper and lower movable roles are displayed. It becomes easier for the player to recognize the significance of the special hold notice that becomes effective when both of the objects 310 and 320 are displaced to the non-shielding position. In other words, in the suspension notice, in addition to the actions of the movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340, the fact that the fourth part P4 becomes visible is an indication of establishment of the suspension notice using the pattern in the middle of the sub-display area Rs. It becomes a condition, and it becomes easy to recognize the success or failure of the suspension notice.

In addition, as the main pattern, a pattern consisting of a character image and a number image and a pattern that appears to be the same at first glance (specifically, a pattern in which the number image is excluded) are set. can be stopped and displayed, it is possible to further diversify the aspects of the pending notice. For example, when the upper and lower movable accessories 310 and 320 are closed and the fourth portion becomes visible, the holding notice condition is established by the fact that the number image is attached to the main symbol, and the number image is displayed. It is preferable to set so that the reservation notice condition is not established by being a main symbol that is not marked with . As a result, it is possible to contribute to a further improvement in the degree of attention to the performance using the movable accessories.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In the movable accessory device 300, the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340 are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction, and the main pattern that stops in the middle stage of the sub display area Rs is the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320. , and 330, 340. As a result, the establishment of the special hold notice using the main symbol that stops in the middle row is not only from the viewpoint of the visibility of the main symbol that stops in the middle row, but also from the viewpoint of the movement of the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340. It is also possible to indicate to the player from the point of view, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the establishment of the special hold notice.

In such a configuration, by making the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340 fan-shaped movable accessories, the decorativeness of the movable accessories is enhanced, and the occupied area when closed (non-shielded state) reduction has been achieved. The fan-shaped upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340 are arranged so that the open ends are reversed front to back. As a result, the front and rear widths of the movable areas of the movable parts 310, 320 and 330, 340 can be reduced while the above effects are achieved. Therefore, the distance between the display screen G and the game board 100 can be shortened, and the visibility of the display screen G can be improved.

Furthermore, in order to enhance the shielding effect (the effect of reducing the visibility) of the display screen G by the movable accessory device 300, the fan surface portions 312, 322, 322, 322, 340 Non-fixed portions 312b, 322b, 332b, and 343b of 332 and 342 are arranged to be non-parallel to the display screen G. As a result, the light emitted from the display screen G is refracted at the non-fixed portions 312b, 322b, 332b, and 342b, and the shielding effect of the display screen G can be enhanced. As a configuration for enhancing such a shielding effect, for example, each of the fan surface portions 312, 322, 332, and 342 may be formed of a non-transparent member, or formed of a translucent member such as Japanese paper. . However, in the former case, there is a concern that the decorativeness of the movable accessory will deteriorate, and in the latter case, it will be difficult to ensure the strength of the movable accessory. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fan surface portions 312, 322, 332, and 342 are formed translucent with resin or the like to enhance decorativeness and strength. It becomes possible to ensure the shielding effect of the screen G.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In each of the above-described embodiments, by operating the movable accessories 170 to 173 to display a plurality of symbol combinations (specifically, a combination of the same specific symbols) corresponding to a plurality of pending advance notices during one game cycle, one Although it is configured to appear as if multiple times of reservation notices are performed during the game, the present embodiment further diversifies the display mode of the combination of symbols corresponding to the reservation notices. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 93, the display mode of the pending notice added in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of pending notice.

The on-hold notice added in the present embodiment is roughly divided into two patterns. Specifically, a first display pattern that displays a combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of types (two types in the present embodiment) of pending notices at once, and a plurality of stages (two stages in the present embodiment). A second display pattern for displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the notice of suspension is set.

When determining which of the first display pattern and the second display pattern is to be executed, the display pattern determination table stored in the various table areas 243a of the effect control device 82 is referred to. Here, in the display pattern determination table, the second display pattern is more likely to be selected than the first display pattern when the hold information that triggered the hold notice corresponds to a big win, and the hold notice is triggered. The setting is such that the first display pattern is more likely to be selected than the second display pattern when the reserved information that results does not correspond to a big win. As a result, the second display pattern has a higher degree of expectation when the suspension notice is executed than the first display pattern.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where only one symbol combination corresponding to the pending notice is stopped and displayed has been described. type) is set so that the degree of expectation is higher. More specifically, the degree of expectation is set to be equivalent to the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the pending notice is stopped and displayed once over a plurality of game rounds (more specifically, twice) in the above embodiment. is set.

First, the first display pattern will be explained. As shown in FIG. 93(a)→FIG. 93(b), when the variable display of symbols starts→ends, a combination of “7” symbols and “6” symbols appear in the main display area Rm of the display screen G. Combinations are displayed simultaneously. That is, two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the pending notice are collectively displayed. In the first display pattern, the expectation of the player can be raised at once, compared to the case where only one symbol combination corresponding to the pending notice is stopped and displayed. After the two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the pending notice are displayed, the variable display of symbols is started as shown in FIG. 93(c), and the next game round is started.

As for the second display pattern, as described with reference to FIG. 62 and the like, the suspension notice is executed in two stages in one game round. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93(a)→FIG. 93(d), when the variable display of symbols starts→ends, the combination of “8” symbols appears in the main display area Rm of the display screen G. will be displayed. At this timing, it is possible to display another combination of symbols corresponding to the pending advance notice by combining the "7" symbols stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs. It is difficult to confirm the pattern that is blocked and stopped. That is, in FIG. 93(d), only one symbol combination corresponding to the pending notice is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(d)→FIG. 93(e), the movable accessories 170, 172, and 173 operate and the symbols stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs become visible. As a result, a combination of "7" symbols in the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs together is displayed on the display screen G so as to be visible to the player. As a result, two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the pending notice are displayed. After the two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the pending notice are displayed, the variable display of symbols is started as shown in FIG. 93(c), and the next game round is started.

In this way, by collectively displaying a plurality of types of symbol combinations corresponding to suspension notice in the main display area Rm, a suspension notice with a strong impact can be executed. In addition, even if only one pattern combination corresponding to the pending notice is stopped in the main display area Rm, a pattern that increases to two types is provided after that, and furthermore, this pattern has a higher degree of expectation than the former. By setting, the player expects that the symbol combination corresponding to the second pending notice will be displayed, and it is possible to suitably suppress the early decline of the player's expectation.

In the present embodiment, the two display patterns are set to be superior or inferior, but instead of using the two display patterns in combination to change the degree of expectation, the first display pattern/second display pattern is selected depending on the timing of determining the pending notice. A configuration in which two display patterns are selected is also possible.

For example, when a suspension notice is given based on the suspension information already stored at the start of the game cycle, or in a situation where all symbols are fluctuating at high speed, the pattern stop mode (stop number) is changed ( can be replaced). Therefore, in such a case, the first display pattern is selected. On the other hand, when the suspension notice is performed based on the suspension information newly acquired after the start of the game cycle, and it is already difficult to change the pattern stop mode (stop number), the main display area It is determined whether or not it is possible to display two pattern combinations corresponding to the suspension notice on the entire display screen G including Rm and the sub-display area Rs, and if the result of the determination is affirmative. , to select the second display pattern.

If the configuration is such that the first display pattern/second display pattern is selected according to the start timing of the pending notice, it is possible to determine from the content of the pending notice which piece of pending information is likely to win the jackpot. A game of prediction is added, which contributes to an improvement in attention to the game.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, a configuration was described in which the degree of expectation for the subsequent big win results varies depending on the manner in which the pending notice is stopped. Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of a part of the configuration in which the outline of the production is shown in a simplified form in the fourth embodiment, based on its technical significance.

As already explained, the reservation notice as the "special notice" is set with the first reservation notice, the second reservation notice, and the third reservation notice, which have different degrees of expectation for the subsequent big win result. The first to third reserved notices are common in that they are executed by stopping the same notice-corresponding symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and making the combination of symbols corresponding to the reserved notice visible to the player. However, the stop area (scatter range) of the symbol combination is different. Then, depending on the stopping area, the degree of expectation for the subsequent big win result is set differently. In other words, even if the same combination of symbols is used to make a reservation notice, the degree of expectation varies depending on the degree of scattering of the symbols forming the combination of symbols.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 94, the first suspension notice is an effect in which the suspension notice is established by a combination of only the main symbols that stop in the main display area Rm. The scattering range of the symbol combination corresponding to the first reserved notice remains within the main display area Rm.

In the second notice of suspension, the symbols corresponding to the second notice of suspension are scattered in a wider area than the symbols corresponding to the first notice of suspension. Specifically, a combination of symbols that stop in the main display region Rm and a symbol that stops in one of the left and right sub-display regions Rs1 and Rs2 constitutes a combination of symbols corresponding to the pending notice. That is, the distribution range of the symbol combination corresponding to the second pending notice is not limited to the main display area Rm but extends over the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs2.

In the third suspension notice, the symbols corresponding to the third suspension notice are scattered in a wider area than the symbols corresponding to the second suspension notice. Specifically, a combination of symbols corresponding to the pending notice is formed by the symbols stopped in the main display region Rm and the symbols stopped in both the left and right sub-display regions Rs1 and Rs2. That is, the distribution range of the symbol combination corresponding to the third pending notice is not limited to the main display area Rm, but extends over the main display area Rm and the sub display areas Rs1 and Rs2.

When the trigger of the hold notice is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the probability of being selected in the order of the 3rd hold notice > 2nd hold notice > 1st hold notice increases, and the hold corresponding to the result is removed In the case of information, it is set so that the probability of selection in the order of the first suspension notice > second suspension notice > third suspension notice increases. As a result, the degree of expectation for the result of a big win after that is higher in the order of the third reservation notice>the second reservation notice>the first reservation notice. In other words, for the combination of symbols corresponding to the notice of suspension, the result of a big win depends on how many display areas the stop area is formed over, that is, the degree of scattering of the symbols forming the combination of symbols. Expectations are different, and the higher the degree of scattering of the symbols, the higher the expectation.

In addition, in the first pending notice, other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row as the final stop target, more specifically, the number of symbols belonging to the upper symbol row is "1", and the lower symbol row The number of misaligned frames of the symbols belonging to is "0". As a result, the sum of the number of shifted frames of other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row is "1".

In the second pending notice, other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row as the final stop target, more specifically, the sum of the number of misaligned symbols belonging to the upper symbol row is "2", and the lower symbol row The number of misaligned frames of the symbols belonging to is "2". As a result, the sum of the numbers of misaligned frames of other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row is "3".

In the third pending notice, other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row as the final stop target, more specifically, the sum of the number of misaligned symbols belonging to the upper symbol row is "2", and the lower symbol row The number of misaligned frames of the symbols belonging to is "4". As a result, the sum of the numbers of misaligned frames of other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row is "6".

In this way, with regard to the combination of symbols corresponding to the pending notice, the number of misaligned frames of other symbols based on the symbols belonging to a specific symbol row increases, that is, the total sum of the separation distances between the symbols increases. , it can be said that it is configured so that the expectation of a jackpot result is high.

In the game cycle after the suspension notice is given (the game cycle that triggered the suspension notice), various predictive effects, main effects, and the like can be executed in a wide area of the display screen G. In this case, if the field of vision of the player is narrow, there is a high possibility that the effects will be overlooked even if the various effects are executed. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the degree of scattering of the symbol combination corresponding to the pending notice is increased to increase the degree of expectation, it is possible to suitably widen the field of vision of the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from not being exhibited well due to the occurrence of an oversight or the like.

In particular, after urging the player to broaden his or her field of vision by the pending notice, by performing the above-mentioned indication effect, main effect, etc., while the effect of widening the field of view continues, the subsequent game round is started. . Therefore, it becomes possible to exhibit the effect mentioned above more suitably.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The game board 100 of the game board unit 90 shown in each of the above embodiments is provided with a portion facing the display screen G of the pattern display device 161 . One of the features of this embodiment is that the opposing parts are used to make the movement of the movable accessory device smoother. A movable accessory device 300X and a configuration related thereto (game board 100X) according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95(a) is a front view of the game board unit 90X, (b) is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 90X, FIG. 96(a) is a rear perspective view of the game board 100X, and FIG. 96(b) is a game board 100X. It is a schematic diagram showing a relationship with a movable accessory device 300X. In addition, in FIG. 95(b), for convenience of explanation, a solid line indicates that the movable accessory device 300X is visible through the game board 100X.

The main configuration of the game board 100X is common to that of the seventh embodiment. Therefore, the description of these common configurations is used, and the differences from the seventh embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), a decoration 125X is applied to a portion facing the display screen G on the front portion of the game board 100X. The appearance of the game board 100X is improved by the decoration 125X.

The decoration 125X is matted (for example, shot blasted) to suppress straight transmission of light (translucent). By making the decoration 125X translucent to ensure the visibility of the display screen G positioned behind the decoration 125X, the display screen G is prevented from being extremely difficult to see. In other words, the improvement in appearance by the decoration 125X is prevented from becoming a factor that interferes with confirmation of the symbols and the like related to the player's profit.

Note that the decoration 125X has a strip shape and is arranged so as to separate the main display area and the sub-display area set on the display screen G from each other. In other words, the decoration 125X is provided with a support function that facilitates discrimination between the main display area and the sub display area.

As schematically shown in FIG. 95(b), a movable accessory device 300X is provided between the game board 100X and the symbol display device 161 (display screen G), as in the other embodiments. . A guide groove 126X as a “guide portion” for supporting the movement of each movable accessory (the upper right movable accessory 310X is illustrated in the drawing) that constitutes the movable accessory device 300X is formed on the back portion of the game board 100X. (See FIG. 96(a)).

The guide groove 126X is formed so as to extend along the decoration 125X when viewed from the front of the game machine. More specifically, the groove width of the guide groove 126X is made smaller than the width of the decoration 125X, and the entire guide groove 126X is formed so as to overlap with the decoration 125X. As a result, protrusion of the guide groove 126X from the decoration 125X is avoided in front view of the game machine, and the guide groove 126X is hidden behind the decoration 125X.

An engagement pin 350X that engages with the guide groove 126X is projected from the rotating tip portion of the main rib portion 314 (corresponding to the “movable body”) that constitutes the movable accessory 310X (see FIG. 96(b). ). When opening and closing the movable accessory 310X, the engagement pin 350X moves in a state of being engaged with the guide groove 126X, so that the opening and closing operation can be stably performed.

Further, when the movable accessory 310X is open, the engagement pin 350X abuts against the end of the guide groove 126X, thereby preventing further movement. That is, the guide groove 126X is provided with a function as a stopper for the movable accessory 310X.

Furthermore, when the movable accessory 310X is open, the engagement pin 350X is supported by the guide groove 126X. This strengthens the function of supporting the movable accessory 310X.

Note that the relationship between the decoration 125X, the guide groove 126X, and the movable accessory 320, 330, 340 is the same, so the description is incorporated.

As described in detail above, by imparting the function of guiding the movable accessory 310X to the facing portion of the game board 100X, it is possible to stabilize the movement of the movable accessory 310X.

For example, when the size of the movable accessory 310X is increased, or the range of movement of the movable accessory 310X is set wider, the effect using the movable accessory device 300X can be made more impactful. It is advantageous in increasing attention to However, on the other hand, it is assumed that the movement of the movable accessory 310X tends to be unstable. In this way, the movement of the movable accessory 310X becomes unstable, which may cause malfunction or deterioration in appearance, and may be an obstacle to achieving the above effects. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences, and it is possible to preferably exhibit the performance function of the movable accessory device 300X.

In particular, in a configuration in which the supporting position (holding position) of the movable accessory 310X is arranged at a position that does not overlap the display screen G, by trying to move the movable accessory 310X in front of the display screen G, Positional variation of the movable accessory 310X tends to increase in the far part. In this respect, if the game board 100X has the facing portion and the guide groove 126X is provided in the facing portion, the occurrence of such a problem can be suitably suppressed. In other words, the technical idea shown in the present embodiment is applied to the movable accessory 310X having a movable part (such as a main rib part) that is displaced so that the overlap with the display screen G increases depending on the situation. This can contribute to the realization of a preferable configuration in which the performance function and the like of the movable accessory device 300X can be stably exhibited.

If the movable accessory 310X is of a rotating type, the swing width (for example, positional deviation) at the leading end of the rotation tends to increase during the operation of the movable accessory 310X. Therefore, if the tip of the movable accessory 310X is guided by the guide groove 126X, the movement of the movable accessory 310X can be preferably stabilized by suppressing the blurring.

If the guide groove 126X is conspicuous when viewing the display screen G through the facing portion of the game board 100X, the appearance of the game machine may be degraded. Therefore, by arranging the guide groove 126X behind the decoration 125X as a "pattern" formed on the game board 100X (opposing portion), the guide groove 126X is made inconspicuous, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the appearance described above. be able to.

The decoration 125X is provided on the front portion of the facing portion, and the guide groove 126X is provided on the back portion of the facing portion. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the presence of the guide groove 126X from becoming a factor that makes it difficult to apply the decoration 125X, so that the decoration 125X and the guide groove 126X can be preferably coexisted on the facing portion of the game board 100X. It becomes possible.

Note that the above description is based on the movable accessory device 300 shown in the seventh embodiment, but the technical idea shown in this embodiment is not applicable only to the movable accessory device 300. Instead, it can be applied to the movable accessory device 162 shown in the first embodiment.

In this case, for example, guide rails corresponding to the respective movable accessories 170 to 173 are provided on the back side of the game board 100, and patterns such as decorations are provided on the front side of the game board 100 where they overlap the guide rails from the front of the game machine. may be provided.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the movable accessory device 300 provided between the game board 100 and the symbol display device 161 is different from that of the tenth embodiment. The configuration such as the decorations given to 100 has been changed. A movable accessory device 300Y and a configuration related thereto according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game board 100Y and the movable accessory device 300Y, and FIG. 97(b) is a partial sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 97(a).

As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the present embodiment, decorations 125Y are formed along the effective lines L1 to L5, and these decorations 125Y are given the function of teaching the effective lines. In this way, by teaching the effective lines with the decoration 125Y as the "pattern", it becomes difficult to distinguish between the effective lines and the non-effective lines in a game machine in which the effective lines and the non-effective lines are used together. suppressed.

The effective lines intersect each other, and the decorations 125Y corresponding to these effective lines also intersect to form a single pattern as a whole. The decoration 125Y may be separately provided for each effective line.

A guide groove 126Y as a "guide portion" is formed behind the decoration 125Y corresponding to the oblique effective line L4 (lower right line) and effective line L5 (upward right line). In the present embodiment, the movable accessory 401Y constituting the movable accessory device 300Y is integrated with the game board 100Y through the guide groove 126Y and the like. Therefore, the movable decoration 401Y moves diagonally across the display screen G by moving along the guide groove 126Y (by its own weight) while being held by the game board 100Y. In addition, since various ideas have been applied to the configuration related to the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y, the details of the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y will be described later.

The movable accessory device 300Y is composed of the movable decorative body 401Y as a movably provided "movable body" and a return mechanism for returning the movable decorative body 401Y to the initial position. Since the movable decorative body 401Y returns to the initial position by moving along a predetermined path, it is possible to repeat the performance by the movable accessory device 300Y.

The movable decorative body 401Y consists of a disc-shaped facing portion 402Y facing the back surface of the game board 100Y, and an engaging portion 403Y of a protrusion projecting forward from the facing portion 402Y and engaged with the guide groove 126Y. It has a base body.

A seal member 404Y as a decorative member is attached to the rear surface portion (rear surface portion) of the facing portion 402Y. A pattern such as a character is applied to the front surface (attachment surface) of the seal member 404Y. The base body is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the design applied to the seal member 404Y can be visually recognized through the base body.

Both ends of the guide groove 126aY corresponding to the upward right effective line L5 and both ends of the guide groove 126bY corresponding to the downward right effective line L4 are provided with retaining portions capable of retaining the movable decoration 401Y.

Holders 411Y and 412Y that can hold the movable decorative body 401Y that has reached the stationary portion are provided on the left and right sides of the display screen G, respectively. These holders 411Y and 412Y are configured to be switchable between a hold state in which the protrusion 405Y formed on the movable decorative body 401Y is sandwiched from behind and a release state in which the protrusion 405Y is not sandwiched.

Here, rails 413Y and 414Y are attached to the left and right sides of the display screen G on the rear surface of the game board 100Y so as to connect a pair of upper and lower stopping portions. The rails 413Y and 414Y movably hold the holders 411Y and 412Y, and the holders 411Y and 412Y are allowed to move up and down along the rails 413Y and 414Y. Note that the holders 411Y and 412Y are movable in the vertical direction, but are not permitted to move in the horizontal direction. In FIG. 97(b), the holders 411Y and 412Y are shown in a pseudo manner by two-dot chain lines, but the holders 411Y and 412Y actually move to this position (the position overlapping the variable display area of the display screen G). I don't mean to.

The movable decorative body 401Y moves following the holders 411Y and 412Y while being held by the holders 411Y and 412Y. In this embodiment, measures are taken to prevent the movable decoration 401Y from falling off the game board 100Y during such movement.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), each stationary portion is formed by accommodating rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y in concave portions 126cY to 126fY formed on the back surface of the game board 100X. Engaging grooves 421aY to 424aY that engage with the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y are formed in the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y, respectively. The movable decorative body 401Y that has reached the stopping portion stops with the base body (engaging portion 403Y) of the movable decorative body 401Y engaged with the engaging grooves 421aY to 424aY.

The rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y are supported by the game board 100Y so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the thickness direction of the game board 100Y. The game board 100Y is provided with motors as driving units for rotating the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y in one-to-one correspondence with the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y. By operating these motors, the rotors 421Y to 424Y rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in the concave portions 126cY to 126fY.

The game board 100Y is formed with grooves 126gY and 126hY extending in the vertical direction so as to connect the upper and lower stopping portions. The grooves 126gY and 126hY are also formed to match the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y.

The rotating body 421Y is configured to switch between a state in which the engaging groove 421aY communicates with the guide groove 126aY and a state in which it communicates with the groove portion 126hY by rotation of the rotating body 421Y. The engagement groove 422aY is switched between a state in which the engagement groove 422aY communicates with the guide groove 126aY and a state in which it communicates with the groove portion 126gY. It is configured to switch between a state of communication and a state of communication with the groove 126gY, and the rotation of the rotor 424Y causes the engagement groove 424aY to communicate with the guide groove 126bY and the state of communication with the groove 126hY. It is configured to switch between

The holders 411 and 412Y are also attached to the rails 413Y and 414Y so as to be rotatable about the axis extending in the thickness direction of the game board 100Y. When the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y rotate under the condition that the stationary decorative body 401Y is held by the holders 411Y and 412Y, the holders 411Y and 412Y also rotate accordingly. In other words, even when the movable decoration 401Y is held by the holders 411Y and 412Y, the existence of the holders 411Y and 412Y prevents the movement of the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y, that is, the change in the posture of the movable decoration 401Y. is not.

The game board 100Y is provided with a stopper that prevents further rotation when the rotors 421Y to 424Y are in communication with one of the two grooves, thus limiting the angle of rotation. ing. By defining the rotational position at which each groove is communicated with these stoppers, it is possible to prevent the above-described communication function, that is, the function of ensuring the movement path of the movable ornament 401Y from failing.

The driving motors for the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y and the driving motors for the holders 411Y and 412Y are connected to the effect control device 82, and operate by outputting drive signals from the effect control device 82. In addition, the movable accessory unit 400Y includes a detection sensor for detecting the movable decorative body 401Y provided at each stop, a detection sensor for detecting the positions of the holders 411Y and 412Y, and a detection sensor for detecting the rotational positions of the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y. and a detection sensor. These various sensors are connected to the effect control device 82, and in the effect control device 82, based on the detection information (detection signal) from these detection sensors, the stationary position of the movable decorative body 401Y, the vertical position of the holders 411Y and 412Y, It is possible to grasp the rotational positions of the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), the center frame 130Y shown in this embodiment has a gate shape, and the movable accessory device 300Y is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the center frame 130Y. In this way, by hiding the movable accessory device 300Y behind the center frame 130Y and making it difficult to visually confirm, deterioration in the appearance of the game board unit 90Y is suppressed. It is also difficult to visually confirm the movable decorative body 401Y that is stopped at the stop portion. Therefore, it is difficult to know from which side the movable decoration 401Y moves, and the impact of the movement of the movable decoration 401Y can be increased.

Next, the operation mode of the movable accessory device 300Y (movable decorative body 401Y) will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The stand-by position of the movable decorative body 401Y is roughly divided into a stationary portion on the upper right of the display screen G and a stationary portion on the upper left of the display screen G. FIG. Here, for convenience of explanation, the movement from the state where the movable decorative body 401Y is stopped at the upper right stop portion of the display screen G will be exemplified.

Under the condition that the movable decorative body 401Y is waiting at the stopping portion located in the upper right of the display screen G, when the execution timing of the performance by the movable accessory device 300Y comes, the rotating body 421Y rotates and rotates. The engagement groove 421aY of the body 421Y is switched to communicate with the guide groove 126aY. At this point, the movable decoration 401Y is not held by the holder 412Y, so the movable decoration 401Y moves from the engagement groove 421aY of the rotating body 421Y to the guide groove 126aY of the game board 100Y by its own weight. The movable ornament 401Y moved to the guide groove 126aY moves from the upper right stopping portion toward the lower left stopping portion by its own weight while being held by the game board 100Y.

After the movable decorative body 401Y waiting at the stationary portion moves to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 421Y rotates and switches to a state in which the engaging groove 421aY of the rotating body 421Y communicates with the groove portion 126hY. .

Here, a supplementary description will be given of the configuration for stopping (waiting) the movable decorative body 401Y at the upper right stopping portion. As already described, the rotating body 421Y can switch between a state in which the engaging groove 421aY communicates with the guide groove 126aY and a state in which it communicates with the groove portion 126hY by rotating itself. Here, in the middle of both rotational positions, it communicates with neither the guide groove 126aY nor the groove portion 126hY, and the end portion of the engaging groove 421aY faces the wall surface of the recessed portion 126cY. That is, in this state, the wall surface of the concave portion 126cY functions as a stopper that prevents the movable decorative body 401Y from separating from the engaging groove 421aY. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y does not flow into either the guide groove 126aY or the groove portion 126hY, and is maintained in the stationary state.

The movable decoration 401Y that has flowed into the guide groove 126aY flows down along the guide groove 126aY. However, the guide groove 126aY intersects with the guide groove 126bY at its midway position, and the guide groove 126aY is partially cut off. However, the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y is formed to be sufficiently longer than this cutting distance. Therefore, when the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the cut portion, the engaging portion 403Y and the guide groove 126aY are engaged with each other so as to straddle the cut portion. This avoids becoming a factor that hinders the movement of the decorative body 401Y.

When the movable decorative body 401Y is on standby at the upper right stopping portion, the rotating body 422Y at the lower left stopping portion waits at a position where the engaging groove 422aY of the rotating body 422Y communicates with the guide groove 126aY. there is Therefore, the movable decorative body 401Y moved along the guide groove 126aY moves from the game board 100Y to the rotating body 422Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y is hidden behind the center frame 130Y and out of sight of the player.

After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the rotating body 422Y, it is sandwiched by the holder 411Y arranged at the bottom of the rail 413Y. After that, the rotating body 422Y rotates, and switches to a state in which the engaging groove 422aY of the rotating body 422Y communicates with the groove portion 126gY.

After the posture of the movable decorative body 401Y is changed in this way and the upward movement path is secured, the holder 411Y is lifted along the rail 413Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y moves toward the upper left stopping portion. Also in this case, since the movable decoration 401Y moves behind the center frame 130Y, the movement of the movable decoration 401Y is prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

After the movable decorative body 401Y waiting in the stationary portion moves from the rotating body 422Y to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 422Y rotates, and the engaging groove 422aY of the rotating body 422Y communicates with the guide groove 126aY. switch to the state of

Here, regarding the rotating body 423Y that constitutes the upper left stopping portion, the engaging groove 423aY of the rotating body 423Y is in communication with the groove portion 126gY. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y lifted by the holder 411Y reaches the upper left stopping portion.

As already described, the rotating body 423Y can switch between a state in which the engaging groove 423aY communicates with the guide groove 126bY and a state in which it communicates with the groove portion 126gY by rotating itself. Here, in the middle of both rotational positions, it communicates with neither the guide groove 126bY nor the groove portion 126gY, and the end portion of the engaging groove 423aY faces the wall surface of the recessed portion 126eY. That is, in this state, the wall surface of the concave portion 126eY functions as a stopper that prevents the movable decorative body 401Y from separating from the engaging groove 423aY. After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the upper left stopping portion, the rotating body 423Y rotates and enters this state, so that the movable decorative body 401Y does not flow into either the guide groove 126bY or the groove portion 126gY. , will be maintained in a state of being stopped at the stopping portion. Accordingly, the holder 411Y releases the holding of the movable decorative body 401Y, and the holder 411Y returns to the lowest position of the rail 413Y.

Under the situation where the movable decorative body 401Y is waiting at the stationary portion located at the upper left of the display screen G, when the execution timing of the performance by the movable accessory device 300Y comes, the rotating body 423Y rotates and rotates. The engagement groove 423aY of the body 423Y switches to a state in which it communicates with the guide groove 126bY. At this point, the movable decoration 401Y is not held by the holder 411Y, so the movable decoration 401Y moves from the engagement groove 423aY of the rotating body 423Y to the guide groove 126bY of the game board 100Y by its own weight. The movable decorative body 401Y moved to the guide groove 126bY moves from the upper left stopping portion toward the lower right stopping portion by its own weight while being held by the game board 100Y.

After the movable decorative body 401Y waiting at the stationary portion moves to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 423Y rotates and switches to a state in which the engaging groove 423aY of the rotating body 423Y communicates with the groove portion 126gY. .

The movable decoration 401Y that has flowed into the guide groove 126bY flows down along the guide groove 126bY. However, the guide groove 126bY intersects with the guide groove 126aY at a midway position, and the guide groove 126bY is partially cut off. However, the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y is formed to be sufficiently longer than this cutting distance. Therefore, when the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the cut portion, the engaging portion 403Y and the guide groove 126bY engage with each other so as to straddle the cut portion. This avoids becoming a factor that hinders the movement of the decorative body 401Y.

When the movable decorative body 401Y is waiting at the upper left stopping portion, the rotating body 424Y at the lower right stopping portion waits at a position where the engaging groove 424aY of the rotating body 424Y communicates with the guide groove 126bY. ing. Therefore, the movable decorative body 401Y moved along the guide groove 126bY moves from the game board 100Y to the rotating body 424Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y is hidden behind the center frame 130Y and out of sight of the player.

After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the rotating body 424Y, it is sandwiched by the holder 412Y arranged at the bottom of the rail 414Y. After that, the rotating body 424Y rotates, and the engaging groove 424aY of the rotating body 424Y switches to a state in which it communicates with the groove portion 126hY.

After the posture of the movable decorative body 401Y is changed in this way and the upward movement path is secured, the holder 412Y is lifted along the rail 414Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y moves toward the upper right stopping portion. Also in this case, since the movable decoration 401Y moves behind the center frame 130Y, the movement of the movable decoration 401Y is prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

After the movable decorative body 401Y waiting at the stationary portion moves from the rotating body 424Y to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 424Y rotates, and the engaging groove 424aY of the rotating body 424Y communicates with the guide groove 126bY. switch to the state of

Here, with respect to the rotating body 421Y that constitutes the upper right stopping portion, the engaging groove 421aY of the rotating body 421Y is in communication with the groove portion 126hY. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y lifted by the holder 411Y reaches the upper left stopping portion.

After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the rotating body 421Y, the rotating body 421Y rotates to the intermediate position, and the end of the engagement groove 423aY faces the wall surface of the recess 126eY. In this state, the wall surface of the recess 126eY functions as a stopper that prevents the movable decoration 401Y from being separated from the engagement groove 423aY, and the movable decoration 401Y flows into both the guide groove 126bY and the groove 126gY. It will be maintained in a state of being stopped at the stopping portion. Accordingly, the holder 412Y releases the holding of the movable decorative body 401Y, and the holder 412Y returns to the lowest position of the rail 414Y.

The relationship between the operation of the movable accessory device 300Y detailed above and the display effect executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 161 will be described. In the present embodiment, a first-type role-linked effect and a second-type role-linked effect are set as effects unique to the present embodiment.

The first type accessory-linked effect is a so-called advance notice effect, and can be selected when suggesting a reach line with a high degree of expectation for a big win before transitioning to the reach variation display. Specifically, when the first type accessory interlocking effect is selected in a game round in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the movable decorative body 401Y can pass through either the effective line L4 or the effective line L5. It grasps whether there is, and decides the stop mode of the pattern so that the reach line is formed on the grasped effective line.

In addition, when the game cycle corresponds to the result of the big win, the patterns are stopped in such a manner that the effective line on which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the result of the big win stops coincides with the line along which the movable decorative body 401Y moves. It may be configured to determine, and the first type accessory-linked production may be a confirmation production in which a big win is confirmed.

The second type accessory-linked effect is a so-called chance-up effect, and is selected when suggesting a reach line with a high degree of expectation for a big win after transitioning to the reach variation display. Specifically, when the second type accessory interlocking effect is selected in a game round in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the movable decorative body 401Y can pass through either the effective line L4 or the effective line L5. figure out if there is. When it is determined that the comprehended valid line and the valid line on which the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is stop-displayed match, the movable decorative body 401Y is operated by referring to the presentation propriety determination table for match. If it is determined that the comprehended effective line and the effective line on which the symbol combination corresponding to the big win is stopped and displayed do not match, refer to the production propriety determination table for discrepancy. It is determined whether or not to operate the movable decoration 401Y.

The effect availability determination table for matching is set so that the number of cases in which the movable decoration 401Y is operated is greater than the case in which the movable decoration 401Y is not operated. On the other hand, the non-coincidence effect determination table is set so that the number of cases in which the movable decorative body 401Y is activated is less than the case in which the movable decorative body 401Y is not activated. As a result, the degree of expectation for a big win when the movable decoration 401Y operates is adjusted to be higher than when the movable decoration 401Y does not operate.

In this embodiment, the guide groove 126Y is camouflaged by the decoration 125Y that teaches the effective line, so that the decoration 125Y and the guide groove 126Y can preferably coexist.

The movable decorative body 401Y crosses in front of the display screen G while being held by the guide grooves 126aY and 126bY of the game board 100Y. At this time, the arm or the like supporting the movable decorative body 401Y does not overhang the display screen G, and the appearance of the presentation using the movable decorative body 401Y can be preferably improved.

A plurality of routes are set for the movable decoration 401Y to cross the front of the display screen G, and the player can predict along which route the movable decoration 401Y will fall. It is possible to suppress the production from becoming monotonous.

Further, the moving path of the movable decoration 401Y has a shape (8-shaped) that can be traced with a single stroke, and the movable decoration 401Y can be used repeatedly. The configuration used when moving the movable decorative body 401Y from the lower stopping portion to the upper stopping portion is hidden behind the center frame 130Y, so the presence of the movable accessory device 300Y affects the appearance of the gaming machine. can be suitably suppressed.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the design to stop is always displayed in the sub-display area Rs as the "second area". It is only necessary that a pattern is displayed when various effects such as a pending notice effect are executed in accordance with the actions of the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the like. In other words, the pattern displayed in the sub-display area Rs may be hidden when these effects are not executed.

(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the patterns displayed in the sub-display area Rs are shielded by the movable accessories 170 to 173 as the "switching means". It suffices if it is possible to switch between a high state and a low state, and it is not necessary to have a shielding function.

For example, instead of making the movable accessories 170 to 173 translucent or opaque and making the pattern displayed in the sub-display area Rs invisible, it is configured to be invisible through the movable accessories 170 to 173. may

(3) It is sufficient that the visibility of the symbols stopped in the sub-display area Rs can be changed, and the "switching means" need not necessarily be movable.

For example, in the game board 100, transmissive liquid crystal or the like is mounted in a portion that overlaps the sub-display area Rs in the front and rear, and the visibility of the sub-display area Rs is changed by changing the display mode of the transmissive liquid crystal (visible/invisible). ) configuration is also possible.

In addition, focusing on the fact that the visibility of the symbols stopped in the sub-display area Rs is changed by the movable accessories 170 to 173, for example, the configuration corresponding to the movable accessories is displayed/hidden on the display screen G. The visibility of the pattern in the sub-display area Rs may be changed by adopting a configuration (a configuration in which the movable accessory is displayed in a simulated manner).

(4) When the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the like as "switching means" are placed at the shielding position, a part of the main pattern stopped and displayed behind (in the seventh embodiment, the first part P1 ) is covered so as to be visible from the front, it may be configured to cover the entire main symbols stopped and displayed in the rear so as to be invisible.

(5) Effective lines L1 to L5 and non-effective lines L6 to L11 are provided as lines on which the symbols stop, but it is not necessary to distinguish the lines L1 to L11 on which the symbols may stop as effective lines and non-effective lines. Not necessarily, but the non-effective lines L6 to L11 can be set as effective lines. In this case, for example, the movable accessories 170 to 173 are operated so as to straddle both the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs, or when a combination of symbols corresponding to the big win result is displayed in the sub-display region Rs. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the fact that a big win is won is announced by clearly indicating the combination of the symbols. Incidentally, in the case of such a configuration, it is optional whether or not to perform the above-described re-variation effect of the symbols. Whether or not to change is also arbitrary.

For example, in the case of a probability variable jackpot result, after displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result across both the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs, or in the sub-display region Rs, It is also possible to perform a re-variation effect by re-varying the symbols and displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the variable probability big win in the main display area Rm. As for the re-fluctuation effect, more than when the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed in the main display region Rm, it is displayed across both the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs or in the sub-display region Rs. More specifically, the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed in the main display area Rm by adopting a configuration that increases the possibility of occurrence when the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed. <When a combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed across both the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs <When a combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed in the sub-display region Rs By adopting a configuration in which the probability of occurrence is increased in the order of occurrence, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the big win is not displayed in the main display area Rm, the player's expectation is quickly lowered. It is possible to suitably suppress that it will be done.

(6) The display mode of the symbols in the symbol display device 161 as the "symbol display means" (that is, the type of each symbol, the pattern arrangement, the variable display mode, the ready-to-win display mode, the suspension notice execution mode, etc.) It is not limited to the embodiment, and can be variously changed without departing from the gist shown in each embodiment.

For example, the scroll display direction of the symbol row is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction. Also, the number of symbol rows is not limited to three, and may be four or more, or may be two. Furthermore, it is not necessary to set a plurality of valid lines, and at least one is sufficient.

Incidentally, on the display screen G, it is not always necessary to scroll the symbol row in a predetermined direction, and a variable display in which a symbol displayed at a predetermined position disappears and the next symbol is displayed causes the symbol to be replaced. Aspects are also possible. In this case, although there is no concept of the direction of movement of the symbols, by giving a certain regularity to the manner of change, the playability of predicting the variable display pattern of the symbols is ensured.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, when the pattern corresponding to the result of the big win is finally stopped under the condition that the ready-to-win display is performed, the farther downstream from the ready-to-win line and stops, the later it will be restarted. Although it is configured to increase the possibility of a big win result due to fluctuations, it should be set so that at least the degree of separation of the pattern from the reach line described above increases, the higher the degree of expectation of a big win. The separating direction is not limited to the downstream direction. It may be set so that the probability of winning a big win is high when the ball stops farther in the upstream direction. Further, by combining these two configurations, it is also possible to set the degree of expectation of a big win depending on the degree of separation to the upstream side or the downstream side from the reach line when the symbols stop.

According to this modification, when the ready-to-win display is displayed, the player first expects that the predetermined symbol will stop at a position far apart, and if that does not happen, the predetermined symbol will appear on the ready-to-win line. It is expected to stop, and when the reach line is passed, the predetermined symbol is expected to stop far away from the reach line. Therefore, it is possible to favorably maintain the player's sense of expectation during the ready-to-win display, which contributes to further increasing the degree of attention to the game.

(8) If the degree of expectation for a big win varies depending on the stop mode of the symbols related to the ready-to-win display, it is not necessary to make a big win during the game round by re-fluctuation. For example, it is possible to set the effect as a pending notice effect (pre-reading effect) so that the ready-to-win display that greatly deviates is likely to be selected when a big win is won in a later game round.

In addition, in such a configuration, when the ready-to-win display (for example, normal reach) is performed, the conditions for executing the pending notice are satisfied, and if the stop mode of the middle symbol row is changed (replacement or scrolling of symbols) It is possible to increase the chances that the pending notice is executed. Such a pending notice can be realized by changing only the finally stopped symbols without changing all of the variable display modes of the symbols. As a result, the control load does not increase extremely.

If the above-described change of the stopping point is performed on the condition that the change is in high-speed fluctuation with low visual discrimination, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of discomfort due to the interruption of the notice of suspension.

(9) For example, it is assumed that pending information is newly acquired between the start of the game round and the final display of the game result. Execution condition of suspension notice is relaxed to increase the execution opportunity of the same pending notice, but by adding the following condition when this execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute the notice effect more suitably.

For example, when hold information corresponding to the result of a big win is newly acquired and a hold notice is executed based on this hold information, the combination of symbols to be finally stopped determined at the start of the game round is grasped, and this grasp is grasped. Based on the obtained information, it is determined whether or not there is a pattern combination with a high degree of scatter corresponding to a pattern combination corresponding to the pending notice. Then, when symbols with a large degree of scatter exist, the suspension notice is given, and when symbols with a large degree of scatter do not exist, it is determined whether or not symbols with a large degree of scatter can be formed by replacing the stop symbols. If the replacement is possible, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the suspension notice is given based on the replacement.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the production lottery (holding notice setting process) for the holding notice is performed by the effect control device 82, but this may be executed by the main control device 81. In this case, by configuring the command output from the main control device 81 when the reservation notice is won, the number of command outputs can be reduced as compared with the above configuration in which the command is output each time the reservation information is acquired.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of operation ports 115 may be provided. In this case, the plurality of operation openings may be configured to have superiority or inferiority in terms of execution frequency or degree of expectation of holding notice.

For example, when two operation openings are provided, the reservation information based on the winning of the other operation opening is more important than the reservation information based on the winning of one of the operation openings of the reservation notice setting process by the effect control device 82. A configuration may be adopted in which it is easy to win the holding notice generation lottery. In addition, the reservation information based on the winning to the other operation opening than the reservation information based on the winning to one of the operation openings is easier to win the special reservation notice lottery process by the effect control device 82 (special reservation notice is executed easy) configuration. Further, when the pending information based on the winning to the other operating port is the information corresponding to the jackpot result, the presentation is more favorable than the case where the pending information based on the winning to the one operating port is the information corresponding to the jackpot result. A configuration may be adopted in which it is easy to win the holding notice generation lottery or the special holding notice lottery by the control device 82 .

In these configurations, if an electric accessory is provided for one of the operation openings, it is easier to win a prize in the operation opening provided with the electric accessory in the high-frequency support mode. The notice (special reserve notice) is easily executed, and the execution frequency of the reserve notice (special reserve notice) can be changed without changing the winning probability of the occurrence lottery of the reserve notice (special reserve notice). As a result, it is possible to add intonation to the production and improve the entertainment.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the non-effective matching effect or the re-variation effect and the special hold notice can be realized at the same time. Specifically, for example, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are set to a stop mode in which a crossline reach is achieved on an ineffective line, and in the stop mode of the crossline reach, the symbol combination corresponding to the big win result is stopped on one reach line. In addition, the pattern forming the other reach line is stopped in another area of the medium pattern row Z2, thereby making it a stop mode of the special hold notice by the pattern forming the other reach line. . After completion of the variable display of all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the patterns of the line formed with the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the big win are made visible, and a re-variation effect is performed, or a pattern combination as a special hold notice is formed. It may be configured such that the pattern on the side to be played is made visible and a special reservation notice is given (in this case, the other side is ineffectively aligned). According to this configuration, if it becomes a re-variation production, it will be a big hit result in the game round, and even if it does not become a re-variation production, there is a possibility that it will be a special reservation notice, and for either this time or the next game round It is also possible to create a sense of anticipation.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 81 determines the variable display time, and the effect control device 82 determines various effects corresponding to the variable display time. The device 81 may be configured to determine the variable display time and various effects, or the effect control device 82 may be configured to determine the variable display time and various effects. In these cases, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the variable display time may be determined first, and various effects may be determined in correspondence with the variable display time. A configuration may be adopted in which the variable display time is determined in correspondence with the presentation.

(14) In the above-described first to third embodiments, a suspension notice is executed in the game round during which the variable display is being performed based on the fact that the notice condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable display. but may be changed as follows: That is, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, based on the fact that the advance notice condition is established in the game cycle in which the reservation notice is executed with the non-specific symbols as the notice-corresponding symbols, the reservation notice by the non-specific symbols is changed to the reservation notice by the specific symbols. It is also possible to determine whether or not the change is possible, and if the change is possible, change to a hold notice using a specific symbol.

More specifically, when the advance notice condition of the reservation notice by the specific design is satisfied in the game round to execute the reservation notice by the non-specific design, that is, for example, based on the reservation information corresponding to the outreach reach by the non-specific design If the notice condition is satisfied and the hold information corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result is acquired at the timing before the hold information corresponding to the outlier reach is subject to the judgment, the hold notice by the non-specific pattern is specified. It is configured to be changed as a reservation notice by a pattern. Further, in the case of executing the pending notice by non-specific symbols, the stop mode corresponding to the duplicate notice in the third embodiment can be selected, and among the stop modes corresponding to the duplicate notice, the non-specific symbols are selected. It is configured to operate the movable accessory so as to establish only the reservation notice of. Then, when the stop mode corresponding to the duplicate notice is selected in the game round in which the notice of suspension by the non-specific symbol is executed, the movable accessory to be operated is changed to the notice of suspension by the specific symbol, and the non-specific symbol is changed. A configuration may be adopted in which the reservation notice of the specific symbol is established without establishing the reservation notice of the specific symbol.

According to the modified example, it is possible to change from the suspension notice by the non-specific symbols to the suspension notice by the specific symbols without changing the stop symbols, even after the end of the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3. It is possible to easily change the pattern that is the object of this pending notice.

It should be noted that the stop mode of each symbol on the display screen G includes a stop mode of a suspension notice (normal suspension notice) using only the symbols stopped in the main display area Rm, and a stop mode of a symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs. It also includes the suspension mode of the included suspension notice (special suspension notice). For example, the mode in which the main symbols with "6" attached to the upper part of the middle line L2 and the middle part and the lower part of the left line L1 are stopped is the normal hold notice stop mode by non-specific symbols. In this case, the main symbols with "7" attached to the upper part of the left non-effective line L9, the middle part and the lower part of the right line L3 are stopped, and the special holding notice by the specific symbol is stopped. A stop mode such as in a game cycle in which a notice of suspension by a non-specific pattern is performed is selected, and when a notice condition by a specific pattern is satisfied during execution of the game cycle, a notice of suspension of the game cycle is normally given. A configuration may be adopted in which the reservation notice is changed to the special reservation notice.

(15) Regarding the staged effect shown in the third embodiment, the number of steps can be arbitrarily changed, but it is preferable that the upper limit of the number of steps is within the upper limit of the number of reservations + 1. . Note that the staged effect is not an essential configuration, and it is possible to remove the staged effect from the pending notice.

(16) As in the above-described third embodiment, in the configuration in which a plurality of suspension notices are executed without changing the stop result in one game round, part of the suspension notices are constituted by the movable accessories 170 to 173. The configuration of shielding the pattern of is not an essential configuration requirement. That is, for example, in the main display area Rm, stop results corresponding to a plurality of suspension notices may be visibly displayed as a stop result of one game round, thereby establishing a plurality of suspension notices.

(17) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the development point may also be set on the fluctuation base side of the reach line. In this case, since the development points in one reach line are more diversified than in the fifth embodiment, it becomes difficult to limit the presence or absence of development from the reach line to the super reach display.

(18) In the fifth embodiment, the further the development point from the normal ready-to-win display to the super ready-to-win display is from the ready-to-win line, the higher the expectation of the jackpot result. A configuration may be adopted in which the rate of development to the super reach display increases as the distance increases.

(19) In the sixth embodiment, the movable parts 170 to 173 are moved from the shielding position to the non-shielding position based on the detection results of the detection sensors 136a and 136b. It is good also as a structure moved to a position. In other words, the movable accessories 170 to 173 may be placed at the non-shielding position instead of the shielding position during normal times, and may be moved from the non-shielding position to the shielding position based on the detection results of the detection sensors 136a and 136b. For example, by moving the movable accessories 170 to 173 to the shielding position when the game ball passes through the inner ball passage 143, the passing game ball and the movable accessories 170 to 173 arranged behind the passing game ball are arranged. The movement of the game ball can be emphasized by the contrast with the .

(20) In the seventh embodiment, the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320, 330, 340 may be superimposed in reverse. That is, in the seventh embodiment, the upper movable parts 310, 330 have the rear ribs 314b, 334b on the open tip side, and the lower movable parts 320, 340 have the front ribs 324a, 344a. The front ribs 314a and 334a of the upper movable accessories 310 and 330 are set to the open tip side, and the rear ribs 324b and 344b of the lower movable accessories 320 and 340 are set to the open tip side. good too.

(21) In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the surface of the game board 100 is processed to form the decoration 125 as the "predetermined pattern". It is optional whether or not it is provided. For example, a pattern may be formed by attaching a seal or the like. Further, a light emitting portion provided on the outer peripheral portion of the game board 100 and a light guide portion for guiding the light from the light emitting portion to a light emitting area formed on the game board 100 are provided. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which "pattern" is displayed.

Further, the "predetermined pattern" may be configured to overlap with the guide groove 126 as the "guide portion" in the front-rear direction, and its arrangement location is not limited to the front portion of the game board 100. FIG. For example, it can be arranged on the back surface of the game board 100 or embedded inside the game board.

(22) In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the concave guide groove 126 is provided as the "guide portion", but the function of guiding the movable decorative body 401 as the "movable body" can be exhibited. , the shape is not limited to a concave shape. It is also possible to form a convex shape protruding from the back surface of the game board 100 . For example, a guide rail may be provided on the back surface of the game board 100 . It should be noted that the structure corresponding to the "guide section" need not be integrally formed with the game board 100, and a guide member (for example, a rail member) provided separately from the game board 100 can be attached to the game board 100. It is also possible to

(23) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol combination corresponding to the notice of suspension is composed of, for example, a combination of the same symbols (for example, "7" symbols x 3). is optional. For example, a symbol combination corresponding to the pending notice may be composed of three consecutive symbols (for example, "1" symbol, "2" symbol, and "3" symbol).

Also, three symbol rows are used to form the symbol combination corresponding to the pending notice, but the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices that at least a plurality of symbols are combined to form a symbol combination corresponding to the reservation notice, and it is also possible to set two symbol rows as targets.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, the movable accessories 170 to 173, 310, 320, 330, 340 and the display control device 212 are controlled by the performance control device 82 based on commands output from the main control device 81. However, instead of this, the display control device 212 controls the production control device 82 and the movable accessories 170 to 173, 310, 320, 330, 340 based on the command output from the main control device 81. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Further, instead of the configuration in which the performance control device 82 and the display control device 212 are provided separately, both control devices 82 and 212 may be provided as one sub-side control device. Also, the functions of the effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be configured to be integrated into the main control device 81, and the functions of both the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are integrated into the main control device 81 may be

(25) In the above embodiment, a so-called "chance eye" is formed as a "special notification" by combining symbols that are stopped or temporarily displayed. be. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which "special notification" is performed by making a specific character appear. In particular, when performing a plurality of special notifications during one game round, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the character appears a plurality of times or a plurality of times.

(26) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right when a ball enters and results in a big win, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, a mahjong ball, and the like.

(26) The characteristic configurations shown in the first to eleventh embodiments and the configurations shown in the other embodiments may be applied to each other in arbitrary combinations.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
In addition, the invention described in the following characteristic group A is "Some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns on the display screen. For example, when a game ball passes through an operation hole provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a hit state, and a variable display of the pattern. When the lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is displayed in a final stop on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-074175). Regarding the background and technology, “In recent years, various efforts have been made to raise the level of attention paid to games. There is room.” This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature A1. A pattern display means (pattern display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player. a function to execute the process of step S501);
privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result;
Prior to the grant determination by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is performed. Displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination result of (1) and ending the variable display of the pattern is regarded as one of the game rounds, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is used for each game round a game cycle control means (a function of executing a variation start process in the main control device 81 and a function of executing a variation display control process in the effect control device 82) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variation display of the pattern is performed; Amusement machines equipped with
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub-display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The game round control means is
For each game round, based on the result of the grant determination, a stop mode determination means (for variation start in the effect control device 82 function to perform processing) and
When the pattern is variably displayed in each game cycle, the pattern is stopped in the first region and the second region in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means, thereby ending the variable display of the game cycle. means and
Switchable between a first state (e.g., non-shielded state) and a second state (e.g., shielded state) in which at least part of the pattern stopped in the second area is made more difficult or invisible than in the first state. switching means (movable accessory devices 162, 300),
Special notification means for performing special notification (for example, suspension notice) based on the stop mode of the pattern determined by the stop mode determination means (function for executing the effect setting process for the suspension notice in the effect control device 82)
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes:
A first special stop mode (stop result corresponding to the normal hold notice) that becomes a predetermined special stop mode according to the combination of the symbols stopped in the first area;
A second special stop mode (stop result corresponding to the special hold notice) that is a predetermined special stop mode by a combination of patterns including a picture that stops in the second area is included,
The special notification means controls the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the stop mode determination means has determined to set the second special stop mode. A game machine characterized by having a notification switching control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1208 to S1214 in the effect control device 82) for performing the special notification.

According to feature A1, a first area and a second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and the special notification is a special notification by a combination of patterns that stop in the first area (first special stop mode). , and a special notification by a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area (second special stop mode). In this way, by diversifying the mode of stopping the special notification, it is possible to prevent the special notification from becoming monotonous and contribute to increasing the degree of attention paid to the game.

In particular, it is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which at least part of the pattern stopped in the second area is made more difficult or invisible than in the first state. A switching means is provided, and the switching means is controlled to switch from the second state to the first state when the special notification by the second special stop mode is performed. As described above, the special notification by the second special stop mode involves not only the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen but also the state change of the switching means. In this way, when each special notification is performed, by providing the notification mode with the difference in movement of the entire apparatus related to the notification, the effect of improving the degree of attention can be easily exhibited.

Feature A2. A pattern display means (pattern display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player. a function to execute the process of step S501);
privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result;
Prior to the grant determination by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is performed. Displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination result of (1) and ending the variable display of the pattern is regarded as one of the game rounds, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is used for each game round a game cycle control means (a function of executing a variation start process in the main control device 81 and a function of executing a variation display control process in the effect control device 82) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variation display of the pattern is performed; Amusement machines equipped with
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub-display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The game round control means is
For each game round, based on the result of the grant determination, a stop mode determination means (for variation start in the effect control device 82 function to perform processing) and
When the pattern is variably displayed in each game cycle, the pattern is stopped in the first region and the second region in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means, thereby ending the variable display of the game cycle. means and
Switchable between a first state (e.g., non-shielded state) and a second state (e.g., shielded state) in which at least part of the pattern stopped in the second area is made more difficult or invisible than in the first state. switching means (movable accessory devices 162, 300),
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination is stored before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at timing (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice in main controller 81);
When the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result, the destination identification means in the game round performed prior to the game round related to the special information to be identified by the destination identification means. Special notification means for performing special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the specified result of
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes:
A first special stop mode (stop result corresponding to the normal hold notice) that becomes a predetermined special stop mode according to the combination of the symbols stopped in the first area;
A second special stop mode (stop result corresponding to the special hold notice) that is a predetermined special stop mode by a combination of patterns including a picture that stops in the second area is included,
The special notification means controls the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the stop mode determination means has determined to set the second special stop mode. A game machine characterized by having a notification switching control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1208 to S1214 in the effect control device 82) for performing the special notification.

According to feature A2, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to grant determination occurs at a timing before the special information is subject to grant determination. may be executed in As a result, for the player, not only is the game for confirming the determination result of granting of the acquired special information, but if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the order in which granting determination is made can be determined. With respect to the later special information, a game of confirming or predicting the result when the special information is to be given according to the content of the special notification is added, thereby realizing diversification of the game.

Further, a first area and a second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and the special notification is a combination of the patterns stopped in the first area (first special stop mode) and the second area. A special notification is set by a combination of patterns including a pattern to be stopped (second special stop mode). In this way, by diversifying the mode of stopping the special notification, it is possible to prevent the special notification from becoming monotonous and contribute to increasing the degree of attention paid to the game.

In particular, it is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which at least part of the pattern stopped in the second area is made more difficult or invisible than in the first state. A switching means is provided, and the switching means is controlled to switch from the second state to the first state when the special notification by the second special stop mode is performed. As described above, the special notification by the second special stop mode involves not only the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen but also the state change of the switching means. In this way, when each special notification is performed, by providing the notification mode with the difference in movement of the entire apparatus related to the notification, the effect of improving the degree of attention can be easily exhibited.

Feature A3. Transition means for shifting to the executable state for the special notification based on the fact that the specified result by the destination specifying means is the predetermined specified result (the function of executing the pending notice setting process in the effect control device 82) ,
The special notification means is
When the shift means shifts to the executable state, based on the stop mode of the current game round determined by the stop mode determination means, the first area and the second area are changed during the game round. Grasping means for grasping the stopped pattern or the pattern to be stopped in the first area and the second area (function for executing steps S2101, S2403, S2503, etc. in the effect control device 82);
Judgment means (effect a function of executing steps S2404, S2504, etc. in the control device 82;
When the determination means determines that the change to the first special stop mode is possible, a first special for executing the special notification by changing the pattern stop mode in the current game round to the first special stop mode. Notification means (function for executing the process of correcting to the normal hold notice in the first to third correction processes in the effect control device 82),
When it is determined by the determination means that the change to the second special stop mode is possible, the pattern stop mode in the current game round is changed to the second special stop mode, and the switching means is controlled by the switching control means for notification. 2nd special notification means for executing the special notification by switching from the second state to the first state (1st to 3rd correction processing in the production control device 82 Executes processing to correct to special hold notice function).

According to the above configuration, there is a case where the state is shifted to the executable state for the special notification during the game (while the pattern is displayed in a variable manner). A special notification may be made in the game round. In this way, by expanding the permissible range of acquisition timing of special information at which special notification can be performed, it is possible to preferably increase the chances of performing special notification.

In particular, in this game machine, a special notification based on a combination of patterns that stop in the first area and a special notification based on a combination of patterns including patterns that stop in the second area are set. For this reason, in the case of shifting to the standby state during the game round as described above, even if the stop mode of the current game round cannot be changed to a special notification based on a combination of symbols that stop in the first area, If the pattern to be stopped is included, there is a possibility that it can be changed to a special notification, and even if the acquisition timing of the special information is varied, it is possible to suitably suppress the missed opportunity of the special notification.

Feature A4. The special notification means, when the determination means determines that the change to either the first special stop mode or the second special stop mode is possible, the first special notification is performed rather than the special notification by the second special notification means. The gaming machine according to feature A3, further comprising means for prioritizing the special notification by the special notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the standby state is entered during a game round, the special notification of the first special stop mode is preferentially executed over the special notification of the second special stop mode. Here, in the case of the special notification that is the second special stop mode, not only the stop mode but also the switching control of the switching means are the conditions for the special notification. The movement of the switching means is unnecessary when the special notification is established only by the stop mode of the pattern. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly carry out the change, and furthermore, it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in the processing load due to the special notification.

Feature A5. The special notification means, when the determination means determines that the change to either the first special stop mode or the second special stop mode is possible, the second special notification is performed rather than the special notification by the first special notification means. The gaming machine according to feature A3 or feature A4, further comprising means for giving priority to the special notification by the special notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the state shifts to the executable state during a game round, the special notification of the second special stop mode is preferentially executed over the special notification of the first special stop mode. . In the case of the special notification that is the second special stop mode, the switching control of the switching means is performed, so the visual impact is stronger than the special notification that is the first special stop mode. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A6. In the display area of the pattern on the display screen, a plurality of variable display areas (each pattern row Z1 to Z3) are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of pattern rows,
The variable display mode of the pattern in the variable display area includes a high identification variation mode and a low identification variation mode in which the identifiability of the pattern is relatively high and low. The variation mode can be switched for each variation display area,
The first special notification means and the second special notification means change the pattern of the variable display area, among the plurality of variable display areas, in which the variable display is performed in the low identification variable mode. The game machine according to any one of features A3 to A5, wherein the stop mode of the pattern is changed to a stop mode corresponding to the special notification.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the special notification is given by changing the stop pattern during the game, the pattern in the variable display area where the variable display is performed in the low identification variation mode with low distinguishability of the pattern is changed. Since it is performed, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when the pattern is changed.

Feature A7. Transition means for shifting to the executable state for the special notification based on the fact that the specified result by the destination specifying means is the predetermined specified result (the function of executing the pending notice setting process in the effect control device 82) ,
The stop mode determination means is configured to be able to determine the second special stop mode even in a situation where the state has not transitioned to the executable state,
The notification switching control means shifts the switching means to the second state if the stop mode of the game round being executed is the second special stop mode when the state shifts to the executable state during the game round. Switching from the first state to the first state and executing the special notification during operation switching control means (function for executing the processing of steps S2101 to S2105 in the production control device 82) Characteristic A2 to The gaming machine according to any one of features A6.

According to the above configuration, if the state is shifted to the standby state while the variable display of the game cycle is performed so that the stop state becomes the second special stop state, the switching means is switched from the second state to the first state. A special announcement will be made. On the other hand, even in a situation where the variable display of game rounds is performed so that the stop mode becomes the second special stop mode, if the executable state is not set, the switching control of the switching means is not performed and the second region is displayed. The stopped pattern is maintained in a state of being invisible or invisible, and no special notification is given. That is, it is possible to change whether or not to perform special notification according to the subsequent situation without changing the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means at the start of the game cycle. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of opportunities for special notification without changing the stop mode during execution of the variable display of game rounds.

Feature A8. The special notification means is
Based on the stop mode of the current game round determined by the stop mode determination means, the symbols stopped in the first area and the second area or the first area and the second area during the game round grasping means for grasping the pattern to be stopped in the area;
Determination means for determining, after the start of the game cycle, whether or not a combination of symbols including symbols stopped in the second area can form a specific combination of symbols corresponding to the special notification, based on the grasping result of the grasping means. and
The notification switching control means controls the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state when the determination means determines that the specific pattern combination can be formed. The gaming machine according to feature A2, further comprising means for making the symbols forming the particular symbol combination visible in the area.

In recent years, special notification (so-called look-ahead effect) according to predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to grant determination is more likely than the special information to be subject to grant determination. A game machine that is executed at the previous timing has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, for the player, the following games are added in addition to the game of confirming the determination result of the acquired special information. In other words, when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the result of the special information that is the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. A game of confirming or predicting is added. As a result, the monotony of the game is suppressed, and the interest in the game is improved.

However, when performing such a special notification, it is common to determine whether or not to perform the special notification based on the hold information stored at the start of the game cycle. The restrictions may become stronger, and inconvenience may arise in that the effect of improving interest by the special notification cannot be exhibited satisfactorily. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when special information is acquired after the start of a game round, there is a possibility that special notification corresponding to this special information can be executed. In other words, the execution conditions are relaxed compared to the conventional look-ahead effect, and the above effects can be exhibited more favorably.

Feature A9. The switching control means for notification performs the switching control so that the switching means switches from the second state to the first state after the end of the variable display of the pattern. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

As already explained, when the switching means is in the second state, the pattern stopped or stopped in the second area is invisible or invisible. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the game is in the second special stop mode. Therefore, by setting the switching means to the first state after the end of the variable display of the pattern, that is, in a state where the pattern is stopped, a special notification unexpected to the player is made. In addition, according to the above configuration, even if the variable display of the pattern is finished, the expectation that the special notification may be made remains, so that the attention to the game is quickly reduced after the stop display of the pattern. It can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A10. The pattern display means is configured to scroll display the pattern row in the arrangement direction,
Any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the second area is set to include an area upstream of the first area on the display screen in a scrolling direction of the pattern row. 1. The game machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, the pattern that stops in the second area has passed through the first area before stopping. It is possible for the player to grasp to some extent whether or not the second special stop mode is set before switching the switching means, so that the degree of attention to the stop pattern can be increased.

Feature A11. The pattern display means is configured to scroll display the pattern row in the arrangement direction,
Any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the second area is set to include an area downstream of the first area on the display screen in a scrolling direction of the pattern row. 1. The game machine described in 1.

Since the second area is located on the downstream side of the first area, it becomes difficult to grasp the pattern stopped in the second area during the movement (immediately before the stop). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the second special stop mode is set before switching the switching means, and to make the special notification unexpected.

Feature A12. The pattern display means is configured to scroll display the pattern row in the arrangement direction,
The first area and the second area on the display screen are arranged in a scroll direction of the pattern row,
When a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed in the first area while the pattern row is stopped and displayed, the pattern display means displays a pattern preceding or following the predetermined pattern in the second area. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, characterized in that the game machine is configured so that the pattern is displayed in a stationary manner.

According to the above configuration, since the pattern row is displayed by scrolling, the player can stop the pattern stopped in the second area, which is made invisible or invisible by the switching means, in the first area. You can make a guess based on the picture you have. In other words, it is possible to grasp to some extent whether the second special stop mode is set or not before switching the switching means by paying attention to the symbols stopped and displayed in the first area. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the stationary pattern.

Feature A13. The switching means is
The movable bodies (movable accessories 170 to 173, 310, 320, 330, 340) and
a drive unit (drive units 170a to 173a, 313, 323, 333, 343) for operating the movable body,
The switching control means for notification switches between the first state and the second state by driving and controlling the driving unit to operate the movable body. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

When the special notification by the second special stop mode is executed, the movable body moves and the visibility of the pattern changes. By making the special notification an effect accompanied by the movement of the movable body, it becomes easier to attract the player's attention, and it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention paid to the special notification.

Feature A14. A pattern display means (pattern display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player. a function to execute the process of step S501);
privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result;
Prior to the grant determination by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is performed. Displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination result of (1) and ending the variable display of the pattern is regarded as one of the game rounds, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is used for each game round a game cycle control means (a function of executing a variation start process in the main control device 81 and a function of executing a variation display control process in the effect control device 82) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variation display of the pattern is performed; Amusement machines equipped with
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub-display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The game round control means is
For each game round, based on the result of the grant determination, a stop mode determination means (for variation start in the effect control device 82 function to perform processing) and
When the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game round, the pattern is stopped in at least the first area of the first area and the second area in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means, and the game round is performed. and means for terminating the variable display of
Switching means (movable accessory device 162, 300) and
Special notification means for performing special notification (for example, suspension notice) based on the stop mode of the pattern determined by the stop mode determination means (function for executing the effect setting process for the suspension notice in the effect control device 82)
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes:
A first special stop mode (stop result corresponding to the normal hold notice) that is a special stop mode according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the first area;
A second special stop mode (stop result corresponding to special hold notice) that is a predetermined special stop mode by a combination of pictures including the picture stopped and displayed in the second area is included,
The special notification means controls the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the stop mode determination means has determined to set the second special stop mode. A game machine characterized by having a notification switching control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1208 to S1214 in the effect control device 82) for performing the special notification.

According to feature A13, a first area and a second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and the special notification is a special notification by a combination of patterns that stop in the first area (first special stop mode). , and a special notification by a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area (second special stop mode). In this way, by diversifying the mode of stopping the special notification, it is possible to prevent the special notification from becoming monotonous and contribute to increasing the degree of attention paid to the game.

In particular, it is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which at least part of the pattern stopped in the second area is made more difficult or invisible than in the first state. A switching means is provided, and the switching means is controlled to switch from the second state to the first state when the special notification by the second special stop mode is performed. As described above, the special notification by the second special stop mode involves not only the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen but also the state change of the switching means. In this way, when each special notification is carried out, by providing the notification mode with a difference in movement of the entire device related to the notification, the effect of improving the degree of attention can be easily exhibited.

In addition, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the special notification related to the second area is performed, the pattern may be always displayed in the second area, or the pattern may not be displayed before the special notification is performed. → It may be configured to be displayed.

Feature A15. A pattern display means (pattern display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player. a function to execute the process of step S501);
privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result;
Prior to the grant determination by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is performed. Displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination result of (1) and ending the variable display of the pattern is regarded as one of the game rounds, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is used for each game round a game cycle control means (a function of executing a variation start process in the main control device 81 and a function of executing a variation display control process in the effect control device 82) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variation display of the pattern is performed; Amusement machines equipped with
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub-display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The game round control means is
For each game round, based on the result of the grant determination, a stop mode determination means (for variation start in the effect control device 82 function to perform processing) and
When the pattern is variably displayed in each game cycle, the pattern is stopped in the first region and the second region in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means, thereby ending the variable display of the game cycle. means and
A switch capable of switching between a first state (non-shielding state) and a second state (shielding state) in which at least part of the pattern stopped in the second area is less visible or invisible than in the first state. means (movable accessory device 162, 300);
Special notification means for performing special notification (for example, suspension notice) based on the stop mode of the pattern determined by the stop mode determination means (function for executing the effect setting process for the suspension notice in the effect control device 82)
The special notification means is
Based on the stop mode of the current game round determined by the stop mode determination means, the symbols stopped in the first area and the second area or the first area and the second area during the game round grasping means for grasping the pattern to be stopped in the area;
Determination means for determining, after the start of the game cycle, whether or not a combination of symbols including symbols stopped in the second area can form a specific combination of symbols corresponding to the special notification, based on the grasping result of the grasping means. When,
When the determining means determines that the specific pattern combination can be formed, the specific pattern combination is formed in the second area by controlling the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a switching control means for notification that enables visual recognition of a pattern forming a .

In recent years, special notification (so-called look-ahead effect) according to predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to grant determination is more likely than the special information to be subject to grant determination. A game machine that is executed at the previous timing has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, for the player, the following games are added in addition to the game of confirming the determination result of the acquired special information. In other words, when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the result of the special information that is the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. A game of confirming or predicting is added. As a result, the monotony of the game is suppressed, and the interest in the game is improved.

However, when performing such a special notification, it is common to determine whether or not to perform the special notification based on the hold information stored at the start of the game cycle. The restrictions may become stronger, and inconvenience may arise in that the effect of improving interest by the special notification cannot be exhibited satisfactorily. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when special information is acquired after the start of a game round, there is a possibility that special notification corresponding to this special information can be executed. In other words, the execution conditions are relaxed compared to the conventional look-ahead effect, and the above effects can be exhibited more favorably.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in features A3 to A13 to features A14 and A15.

In addition, the "predetermined specific stop mode" shown in the above feature group may correspond to a stop mode predetermined by the game cycle control means or the like, and does not necessarily have to completely match in appearance. For example, when there are a plurality of pattern combination patterns and arrangement patterns in a configuration that forms a so-called chance eye, that is, when a plurality of specific stop modes (chance eyes) are stored, a concept that summarizes these patterns is used. It is sufficient if it is a "predetermined specific stop mode".

<Characteristic group B>
In addition, the invention described in the following characteristic group B is "Some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns on the display screen. For example, when a game ball passes through an operation hole provided in the game area, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a hit state, and a variable display of the pattern. When the lottery is won, a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, JP-A-2005-074175). Regarding the background and technology, "In recent years, various efforts have been made to raise the level of attention to games. There is.” It was made with the problem to be solved by the invention.

Feature B0. a pattern display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of pattern rows on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player. a function to execute the process of step S501);
privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result;
Prior to the grant determination by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is performed. Displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination result of (1) and ending the variable display of the pattern is regarded as one of the game rounds, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is used for each game round A game cycle control means (a function of executing a fluctuation start process in the main control device 81, a function of executing a fluctuation display control process in the effect control device 82, etc.) for controlling the pattern display means so as to perform a variable display of patterns; ,
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination is stored before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at timing (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice in main controller 81);
When the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result, in the game round performed before the game round related to the special information to be identified by the destination identification means, the destination identification Special notification means for performing special notification (suspension notice) corresponding to the specific result of the means (function for executing the effect setting process for the suspension notice in the effect control device 82)
The special notification means is a multiple execution means (movable accessory devices 162, 300, pattern arrangement of each pattern row Z1 to Z3, overlapping effect setting by the effect control device 82 for executing the special notification for a plurality of times in one game round. and a function of executing correction processing for duplicate notice).

According to feature B0, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to grant determination is given at a timing before the special information is subject to grant determination. may be executed in In other words, for the player, not only the game in which the determination result of granting of the acquired special information is confirmed in the game round corresponding to the granting determination result, but also the case where a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means. is added a game of confirming or predicting the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination is the target of the grant determination according to the contents of the special notification. This prevents the game from becoming monotonous.

Especially in this feature, it is possible to execute a plurality of special notifications in one game round. Therefore, for example, when the special notification is performed, even if there is less special information to be given before the special information that triggered it, that is, when the special notification is performed, the special information at that time Even if there are few opportunities to execute the notification, it is possible to execute the special notification for a plurality of times in the game times corresponding to the special information to be given before the special information. Thereby, regardless of the number of pieces of special information in the situation where the special notification is performed, the special notification can be preferably executed.

As described above, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B1. a pattern display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of pattern rows on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player. a function to execute the process of step S501);
privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result;
Prior to the grant determination by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is performed. Displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination result of (1) and ending the variable display of the pattern is regarded as one of the game rounds, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is used for each game round A game cycle control means (a function of executing a fluctuation start process in the main control device 81, a function of executing a fluctuation display control process in the effect control device 82, etc.) for controlling the pattern display means so as to perform a variable display of patterns; ,
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination is stored before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at timing (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice in main controller 81);
When the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result, each pattern row in the game round performed before the game round related to the special information to be identified by the destination identification means A special notification means (performance A function of executing the effect setting process for the pending notice in the control device 82),
The special notification means displays a plurality of the specific pattern combinations or displays a plurality of types of specific pattern combinations in one game round, and executes the special notification for a plurality of times. 162, 300, pattern arrangement of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and a function of executing duplicate effect setting processing and duplicate notice correction processing by the effect control device 82).

According to feature B1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to grant determination is given at a timing before the special information is subject to grant determination. may be executed in In other words, for the player, not only the game in which the determination result of granting of the acquired special information is confirmed in the game round corresponding to the granting determination result, but also the case where a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means. is added a game of confirming or predicting the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination is the target of the grant determination according to the contents of the special notification. This prevents the game from becoming monotonous.

The player comprehends the grant determination result of each game round by the information (final stop result) from the pattern display means. The mode information corresponding to the pattern stop mode in the pattern display means is determined by the mode information determination means based on the determination result. Then, the special notification is executed in the pattern stop mode (pattern combination) in the pattern display means. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which special notification is performed by combination of symbols, the player can naturally confirm the special notification when he/she tries to grasp the grant determination result of each game cycle. Therefore, even though the special notification has been made, it is prevented from being overlooked.

Especially in this feature, it is possible to execute a plurality of special notifications in one game round. Therefore, for example, when the special notification is performed, even if there is less special information to be given before the special information that triggered it, that is, when the special notification is performed, the special information at that time Even if there are few opportunities to execute the notification, it is possible to execute the special notification for a plurality of times in the game times corresponding to the special information to be given before the special information. Thereby, regardless of the number of pieces of special information in the situation where the special notification is performed, the special notification can be preferably executed. As described above, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the following feature group to this feature.

Feature B2. The multiple execution means has means for executing the special notification for a plurality of times without changing the combination of the patterns stopped and displayed on the display screen when executing the special notification multiple times. The gaming machine according to feature B1.

According to feature B2, when a plurality of specific pattern combinations are displayed, a special notification is made while the pattern sequence stopped and displayed on the display screen is maintained as it is, that is, the pattern sequence remains stopped. By performing a plurality of special notifications, it is not necessary to repeat the sequence of stop→variation→stop of the pattern row, and while enjoying the effects shown in feature B1 etc., it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in the control load caused by it. can.

Feature B3. The game according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the multiple execution means has a means for sharing a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen when executing the special notification multiple times. machine.

According to feature B3, when executing a plurality of special notifications, there is no need to change the numbers for each special notification, and an extreme increase in the processing load required for the special notification can be suppressed.

In addition, for example, "the multiple execution means has means for executing the special notification for a plurality of times by displaying so that a plurality or a plurality of types of the specific pattern combination are included in one stop mode of the pattern. The effect shown in the feature B2 can be favorably exhibited by adopting the configuration in which the

Further, for example, "the game round control means, as the one game round, after the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, the pattern is stopped or temporarily stopped, and a plurality of unit displays are performed. The multiple execution means includes means for executing the special notification for a plurality of times by displaying the specific pattern combination in each unit display, and stopping at each unit display. By adopting a configuration having a means for making the combination of displayed patterns the same, the effect shown in feature B3 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature B4. The game round control means determines, for each game round, a stop mode determination means (effect function of executing a process for starting fluctuation in the control device 82), and when the fluctuation display of the pattern is performed in each game round, the pattern is stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means, and the same game is played. It is to end the fluctuation display of the pattern in the times,
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means includes a special stop mode (special mode) in which a plurality of the specific pattern combinations exist,
The special notification means enables the special notification by the one specific pattern combination included in the special stop mode, and the selection means (movable accessory device 162, 300, the function of executing the processing during fluctuation by the production control device 82),
Characteristic B1 to Characteristic characterized in that the multiple execution means executes the special notification for a plurality of times in one game round by sequentially switching the specific pattern combination that is enabled and disabled by the selection means. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

According to the above configuration, the combination of patterns corresponding to the identification results of the plurality of destination identification means included in the special stop mode is sequentially switched between valid and invalid by the selection means. It is possible to execute the special notification for a plurality of times in the game round.

It should be noted that, for example, it is preferable to set a stop eye related to special notification as a special eye in which a plurality of specific pattern combinations are mixed.

Feature B5. The selection means enables the special notification by the specific pattern combination by making one of the specific pattern combinations visible among the plurality of specific pattern combinations, and at least the other specific pattern combinations. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the special notification by the specific combination of symbols is invalidated by rendering a part of the symbols invisible or difficult to be visually recognized.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the special notification is effective is determined by the visual recognition level (for example, easy/difficult) of the specific combination of symbols. Therefore, it is easy for the player to understand whether the special notification is effective or not. In other words, even with a special configuration in which a plurality of special notifications are made during one game round, it is possible to suitably prevent each special notification from being overlooked due to being not recognized well.

Feature B6. a movable body;
The movable body is placed in a first state (non-shielded state) and a second state (shielded state) in which at least a part of the specific pattern combination is less visible or invisible from the front of the gaming machine than in the first state. Switching means (movable accessories 170 to 173, 310, 320, 330, 340) that can be switched to
The selecting means controls the switching means so that the movable body is in the second state, invalidates the special notification by the specific pattern combination, and switches so that the movable body is in the first state. The game machine according to feature B5, further comprising means for controlling the means to enable the special notification by the specific combination of symbols.

According to the above configuration, the effectiveness of the special notification is determined by the change in visibility on the display screen (specifically, the change in the easy-to-visible/difficult-to-visible range). This helps the player's understanding, and is advantageous in favorably exhibiting the notification function of the special notification. When the special notification is enabled (executed), the movable body is switched from the second state to the first hidden state, and when the special notification is disabled (not executed), the movable body is switched to the second state. By maintaining it, the player's attention can be drawn by the movement of the movable body. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the state (movement) of the movable body.

Feature B7. A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub-display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The game round control means causes the pattern to stop in the first area and the second area in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means when the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game round, and the game is played. to end the variable display,
The movable body covers at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second area by switching from the second state to the second state so as to be invisible or invisible from the front of the gaming machine,
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means includes a stop mode (a stop result corresponding to a special hold notice) that becomes the special stop mode by a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area. and
The special notification means controls the switching means to switch the movable body from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the stop mode determination means has determined to set the special stop mode. The game machine according to feature B6, characterized by having means for performing the special notification at the time of the game.

A first area and a second area are set in the pattern display area on the display screen, and a special notification by a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area (special stop mode) is set as the special notification. For example, by using a display area (second display area) located outside the normal display area (first display area), the combination of patterns that can be used for special notification increases, and the special notification execution condition (pattern stop aspect) can be suitably increased.

In particular, when the special notification is performed, by providing a difference in the movement of the entire device related to the notification in the notification mode, it becomes easier to achieve the effect of improving the degree of attention.

Feature B8. The granting response result includes a first granting response result (probability variable jackpot result) in which the first privilege is granted to the player by the privilege granting means, and a player's profit is higher than the first privilege by the privilege granting means. Includes a second grant response result (usually a jackpot result) in which a small second special benefit is granted,
The special notification means, when the specified result by the destination specifying means corresponds to the first given response result, the first specified pattern combination (stop corresponding to the suspension notice by the specific pattern) corresponding to the first given corresponding result result), and when the specified result by the destination specifying means corresponds to the second given response result, the second specified pattern combination (non means for executing the special notification so as to be a stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the specific symbol,
The stop mode of the symbols determined by the stop mode determining means includes a special stop mode in which the first specific combination of symbols and the second specific combination of symbols are stopped,
The selection means enables one of the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination included in the special stop mode and disables the other;
The multiple execution means sequentially switches the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination to be enabled or disabled by the selection means in accordance with the result of identification by the previous identification means in one game cycle. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B7, wherein the special notification is executed for a plurality of times.

According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination corresponding to the granting of the first privilege and the second specific pattern combination corresponding to the granting of the second privilege are applied to the stop mode of the symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen. A special stop mode is included in which both specific symbol combinations are stopped. Then, the multiple execution means executes a plurality of special notifications by sequentially switching the validity or invalidity of the first/second specific pattern combination in the game round in which the special stop mode is set. In this case, the special notification is sequentially performed in correspondence with the result of identification by the preceding identification means. That is, if the order corresponds to the first award correspondence result, the player expects that the first privilege will be awarded after that, and if the order corresponds to the second award correspondence result. , the player expects to be awarded the second award thereafter. Since the second privilege is set so that the player can obtain a smaller profit than the first privilege, the player expects that the order of the second privilege will correspond to the first privilege. Attention will be paid to the order of special announcements by means. As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B9. The granting response result includes a first granting response result (probability variable jackpot result) in which the first privilege is granted to the player by the privilege granting means, and a player's profit is higher than the first privilege by the privilege granting means. Includes a second grant response result (usually a jackpot result) in which a small second special benefit is granted,
The special notification means, when the specified result by the destination specifying means corresponds to the first given response result, the first specified pattern combination (stop corresponding to the suspension notice by the specific pattern) corresponding to the first given corresponding result result), and when the specified result by the destination specifying means corresponds to the second given response result, the second specified pattern combination (non means for executing the special notification so as to be a stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the specific symbol,
The stop mode of the symbols determined by the stop mode determining means includes a special stop mode in which the first specific combination of symbols and the second specific combination of symbols are stopped,
When the special information that triggered the special notification corresponds to the second given correspondence result, the multiple execution means makes the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination valid at the same time. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B8, characterized by having means.

According to the above configuration, the plurality of executing means can enable the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination at the same time. In this case, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which specific pattern combination corresponds to the special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state. Even if the special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state corresponds to the result of the second provision, the order in which the first/second specific pattern combination is activated is the first specific pattern combination. When the pattern combination is established→the second specific pattern combination is established, the player is disappointed that the expected award correspondence result has been demoted from the first award correspondence result to the second award correspondence result. It could be.

Therefore, by adopting this configuration, by leaving the possibility that any award correspondence result can be obtained, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player due to the special notification, and to prevent the player from being discouraged by the special notification. It is possible to suitably execute the special notification.

Feature B10. The special notification means, based on the conditions for executing the special notification being satisfied in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is performed, the special notification by the plurality of execution means in the game round during the variable display. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized by comprising means for executing a plurality of times (function for executing replacement processing by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, when the execution condition for the special notification is established in the situation where the variable display of the game round is performed, the special notification is executed for a plurality of times in the game round in which the variable display is performed. Therefore, even if the number of special information (game times) in which the special notification can be executed is small, it is possible to preferably increase the chances of performing the special notification. That is, it is possible to prevent the number of times of special notification from being limited by the number of special information stored at the time of prior identification.

Feature B11. The game round control means determines, for each game round, a stop mode determination means (effect function of executing a process for starting fluctuation in the control device 82), and when the fluctuation display of the pattern is performed in each game round, the pattern is stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means, and the same game is played. It is to end the fluctuation display of the pattern in the times,
The multiple execution means determines that the combination of the patterns to be stopped and displayed in the stop mode of the patterns determined by the stop mode determination means includes a plurality of or a plurality of types of specific pattern combinations. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the special notification is made based on the above.

According to the above configuration, the display for the special notification is performed by utilizing the stop mode of the pattern in the game round in which the special notification is executed for a plurality of times. By performing the special notification using the stop mode of the pattern preset by the game round control means (stop mode determination means), resetting the stop mode of the pattern when executing the special notification is unnecessary, and the special notification is performed. It is possible to suppress an extreme increase in the processing load at the time of execution.

In particular, in combination with the feature B7, it is possible to preferably suppress the restriction on the opportunity to execute the special notification by adding the stopping pattern to both the first area and the second area.

Feature B12. The special notification means, when the execution condition of the special notification is established under the situation where the variable display of the symbols is performed, the stop mode of the pattern in the game round determined by the stop mode determination means. Determination means for determining whether or not the special notification can be executed in the game round based on the mode information related to (function of executing processing such as step S3204, step S2404, and step S2504 by the effect control device 82) has
When the determination means determines that the special notification cannot be executed, the multiple execution means is a carryover means (effect control a function of executing the processes of steps S3301, S3302, steps S3401, and S3402 by the device 82;
The gaming machine according to feature B11, wherein the stop mode determination means has means for determining the stop mode based on the information of the carry-over means in subsequent game rounds.

According to the above configuration, when the special notification cannot be executed, the special notification by the multiple executing means is executed in the next and subsequent game rounds. As a result, there is no need to perform processing such as changing the stop result or variable display time in order to execute the special notification in the game round being executed, and moreover, the plurality of execution means can be used for a plurality of times in one game round. Since the special notification is performed, the special notification can be executed without reducing the number of times the special notification is executed. In addition, in subsequent game rounds subject to multiple notifications, the stop mode is determined based on the fact that multiple notifications are targeted. It is possible to preferably avoid that it will not be executed well.

Feature B13. When a plurality of pieces of special information to be subject to the provision determination are stored by the acquired information storage means before the special information that triggered the special notification, the provision determination is performed before the special information. Means for limiting the plurality of special notifications by the plurality of execution means in the game round related to the target special information (function for executing step S3104, step S3201, etc. by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to any one of characteristic features B1 to B12.

When there are a plurality of pieces of special information to be given and determined prior to the special information that triggered the special notification, the special notification may be performed in each of the game rounds related to the plurality of pieces of special information. There is little need to execute a plurality of special notifications in the game round. Therefore, in this configuration, a plurality of special notifications by a plurality of executing means are restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of occasions when a plurality of special notifications are made to be wastefully increased, and to clarify the difference between a mere special notification and a plurality of notifications. Therefore, it is possible to secure a premium feeling for the special notification shown in this feature.

Feature B14. When the special notification is executed, the notification mode setting means (effect control device 82) is set so that the special notification executed in the current game round is accompanied by an effect different from the special notification executed in the previous game round. A function to execute the processing of steps S3004 to S3008, steps S3105 to S3109, etc. by
When the plurality of special notifications are performed in one game round by the multiple execution means, the special notification executed later in the plurality of special notifications is accompanied by an effect different from the special notification executed first. Continuous notification setting means to be set (step S3211 by the effect control device 82, step S3504, step S3609, step S3620, the function of executing step S3630, etc.),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B13, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the player recognizes the special notification for each game round as a so-called step-up effect that develops differently for each game round. Even when a plurality of special notifications are performed in one game round by the multiple execution means, different effects are performed for each special game round, so that the player can see that the step-up effect in each game round develops in one game round. It becomes easier to understand as if (established). This makes it possible to increase the significance of having a plurality of execution means.

Feature B15. Determining means for determining whether to shift to the executable state for the special notification based on the fact that the specified result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specified result (big hit advance notice setting process by the effect control device 82, and whether or not the notification mode setting means or the continuous notification setting means should be set to accompany the different special notification when the transition to the executable state is performed by the determination means. Lottery means for lottery (function to execute the processing of step S2809 and step S2908 by the effect control device 82),
The lottery means sets a higher probability of a winning result when the identification result by the destination identification means is the grant correspondence result than when the identification result by the destination identification means is not the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to feature B14, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, if the special notification of this time is accompanied by a different effect from that executed last time, it can be expected that the special information to be the subject of the determination of the subsequent provision is the result of provision. Therefore, the player expects that the current special notification will be accompanied by an effect different from the previous special notification, that is, the special notification will develop. Here, if the multi-execution means shown in feature B1 is provided, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as being unable to execute the premise of the multi-notification when trying to develop the special notification.

<Characteristic group C>
In addition, the invention described in the following characteristic group C is known as "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, there is known one having a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on a display screen. In such a game machine, for example, when a game ball passes through an operation opening provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state. When the player wins the lottery, the combination of specific patterns is displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to the specific game state.Transition to the specific game state. Along with this, for example, the opening and closing of a variable ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and a large amount of game balls are paid out (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). The problem to be solved by the present invention is that ``here, it is necessary to raise the level of attention to games in gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.''

Feature C1. a pattern display means (symbol display device 161) for scrolling and displaying pattern strings corresponding to the variable display regions on a display screen (display screen G) on which a plurality of variable display regions (symbol strings Z1 to Z3) are set; ,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player. a function to execute the process of step S501);
privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result;
In one game round based on the fulfillment of the acquisition condition, after the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, the unit display of stopping display or temporary stop display of the pattern is performed at least once. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means to stop and display the result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination in each game round (the function of executing the variation start process by the main control device 81, the effect control a function of executing a variable display process by the device 82);
A special notification means (for example, a reservation notice) that performs a special notification (for example, a reservation notice) by causing the game round control means to stop display or temporarily stop display of a specific pattern combination (a function of executing the production setting process for the reservation notice in the production control device 82) with
In the mode of stop display or temporary stop display of the specific pattern combination,
a first display mode (for example, a weak chance) set so that the degree of scattering in the scrolling direction of each pattern constituting the specific pattern combination is relatively small;
a second display mode (e.g., strong chance eye) set so that the degree of scattering in the scrolling direction of the patterns constituting the specific pattern combination is relatively large;
When the result of the grant correspondence is obtained in the game round in which the special notification is executed or in the game round after the game round, the second display mode is selected from the first display mode and the second display mode. and when it is not the given response result in the game round in which the special notification is executed or in the game round after the game round, the first display mode out of the first display mode and the second display mode A game machine characterized by comprising a selection means set to facilitate selection of the .

In a gaming machine of a type in which a row of symbols is displayed on the display screen, it is common to switch to the ready-to-win display by stopping or temporarily stopping the symbols in close proximity to each other. Such a ready-to-win display is often used when shifting to a special game state (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player. For this reason, the player's attention tends to be focused on a very limited area of the display screen.

Here, as shown in this feature, a difference is set in the degree of scattering of patterns when a specific combination of symbols is displayed in a stop display or a temporary stop display, and it is expected that the grant determination result will be obtained by increasing the degree of scattering. By adopting a configuration in which the degree is increased, it is possible to encourage the player's attention to be directed to a wide area of the display screen. As a result, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the effect function is not effectively exhibited because the effect or the like on the display screen is overlooked.

Feature C2. a pattern display means (symbol display device 161) for scrolling and displaying pattern strings corresponding to the variable display regions on a display screen (display screen G) on which a plurality of variable display regions (symbol strings Z1 to Z3) are set; ,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player. a function to execute the process of step S501);
privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result;
In one game round based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, unit display of stopping display or temporary stop display of the pattern after starting the variable display of the pattern in the plurality of variable display areas is performed at least once. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means to stop and display the result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination in each game round (function for executing variation start processing by the main control device 81, effect control a function of executing a variable display process by the device 82);
A special notification means (for example, a reservation notice) that performs a special notification (for example, a reservation notice) by causing the game round control means to stop display or temporarily stop display of a specific pattern combination (a function of executing the production setting process for the reservation notice in the production control device 82) with
In the mode of stop display or temporary stop display of the specific pattern combination,
a first display mode (for example, a weak chance) set so that the separation distance in the scroll direction between the patterns forming the specific pattern combination is relatively small;
a second display mode (e.g., strong chance eye) set so that the separation distance in the scroll direction between the patterns constituting the specific pattern combination is relatively large;
When the result of the grant correspondence is obtained in the game round in which the special notification is executed or in the game round after the game round, the second display mode is selected from the first display mode and the second display mode. and when it is not the given response result in the game round in which the special notification is executed or in the game round after the game round, the first display mode out of the first display mode and the second display mode A game machine characterized by comprising a selection means set to facilitate selection of the .

In a gaming machine of a type in which a row of symbols is displayed on the display screen, it is common to switch to the ready-to-win display by stopping or temporarily stopping the symbols in close proximity to each other. Such a ready-to-win display is often used when shifting to a special game state (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player. For this reason, the player's attention tends to be focused on a very limited area of the display screen.

Here, as shown in this feature, a plurality of distances between patterns are set when a specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped to produce a difference in the degree of scattering of the specific pattern combination, and the distance ( If the degree of scatter) is increased, the degree of expectation for the award determination result is increased, so that the player's attention can be directed to a wide area of the display screen. As a result, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the effect function is not effectively exhibited because the effect or the like on the display screen is overlooked.

Feature C3. A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub-display area Rs) are set in the variable display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The second area is arranged so as to include an area upstream of the first area on the display screen in the scroll direction of the pattern row,
In the first display mode, the specific pattern combination is displayed stopped or temporarily stopped in the first area,
Characteristic C1 or Characteristic C2 characterized in that, in the second display mode, the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped over both the first area and the second area. The gaming machine described in .

As shown in the feature C1 and the like, by configuring the first area and the second area in which the specific pattern combination is formed, the difference between the first display mode and the second display mode is difficult to understand. can be prevented from becoming

Feature C4. Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination is stored before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination. Equipped with destination specifying means (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice in main controller 81) for specifying at timing,
The special notifying means, when the result of specifying by the destination specifying means is a predetermined result of specifying, the game round being played prior to the game round related to the special information to be specified by the destination specifying means. By controlling the pattern display means so that the mode of the stop display or the temporary stop display of the game round becomes the first display mode or the second display mode, a special display corresponding to the specified result of the destination specifying means The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, further comprising means for giving notice (reservation notice).

According to the feature C4, when the special notification corresponding to the identification result of the preceding identification means is executed, the degree of variation in the specific pattern combination increases, thereby increasing expectations for subsequent game rounds. . In other words, the game progresses to the subsequent game times in a state in which the player's field of view is widened by the specific notification. As a result, even if an effect corresponding to, for example, the grant determination result is performed on the display screen, the effect (for example, detailed effect) is not overlooked by directing the player's consciousness to the wide area of the display screen. can be suitably suppressed. Also, when the subsequent effect is performed in a narrow range (for example, the center of the display screen), the effect is performed in a state where the field of view is widened, and it is possible to suppress overlooking the effect. This can contribute to improving the impact of the performance.

Feature C5. A predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the award correspondence result on a preset effective line as a variation mode of the game round executed by the game round control means when the determination result of the award determination is the award correspondence result. is set to be displayed as a stop display or a temporary stop display,
By stopping the variable display of patterns in at least a part of the variable display area as the unit display, the ready-to-reach pattern combination that has the possibility of forming a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the given correspondence result is displayed on the effective line or with it. is a reach-variable display that forms a reach line by stopping and displaying on a different line, and performs a variable display of the pattern in the remaining variable display area under the condition that the reach line is formed,
At least as the reach fluctuation display,
The ready-to-win pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed, and by stopping on the ready-to-win line, the ready-to-win corresponding pattern forming the predetermined pattern combination together with the ready-to-win pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the ready-to-win line. Reach fluctuation display,
and a deviation reach fluctuation display for stop-displaying the ready-to-win pattern combination corresponding to the award correspondence result and stopping and displaying the ready-to-win correspondence pattern shifted upstream or downstream from the ready-to-win line in the scroll direction of the patterns. and
The special notifying means includes the unit display including the result mode displayed when the game round related to the predetermined special information is completed based on the fact that the predetermined special information has been obtained by the information obtaining means. is executed, special control means (effect control a function of executing the processes of steps S3805 to S3812 and steps S3906 to S3914 by the device 82;
At least as the outlier reach unit display,
a first-type non-reach ready-to-reach unit display for stop-displaying the ready-to-reach compatible pattern in a first region away from the ready-to-reach line on the upstream side or downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern;
a second-type out-of-reach ready-to-reach unit display for stop-displaying the ready-to-reach compatible pattern in a second region further away from the first region to the upstream side or downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern from the first region;
is set and
The special control means has the selection means, and when the predetermined pattern combination is displayed via the outlier reach unit display, the selection means is higher than the first type outreach reach unit display. It is configured to make it easier to select the 2nd type outlier reach unit display, and to make it easier to select the 1st type outlier reach unit display rather than the 2nd type outlier reach unit display when the predetermined pattern combination is not displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

When a privilege (for example, transition to a special game state more advantageous to the player than usual) is given to the player, the ready-to-win patterns are stop-displayed on the ready-to-win line, and a predetermined pattern combination is stop-displayed. In the situation where the reach fluctuation display is performed, for example, on the upstream side of the reach line, the player expects that the reach corresponding pattern will reach the reach line, and at the timing when the reach corresponding pattern reaches the reach line, the display is stopped as it is. expect to be

In such a configuration, it is assumed that the closer the ready-to-reach symbols come closer to the ready-to-reach line, the more attention is paid to the game, while the farther away the ready-to-reach symbols are from the reach line, the less attention is paid to the game. In addition, it is assumed that the degree of attention will drop at a stretch by shifting to the reach fluctuation display and stopping display of the reach corresponding pattern in front of the reach line.

In this regard, according to this feature, there is a case where the outreach reach unit display is performed before the transition unit display in which the stop result corresponding to the grant response result is displayed is performed. Then, as this outlier reach unit display, compared with the first outlier reach fluctuation display in which the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in a first area away from the reach line on the downstream side or upstream side, the reach-corresponding pattern is displayed from the reach line. A higher selectivity is set for the second outlier reach fluctuation display that is stop-displayed in a second area that is further upstream or downstream than the first area. Therefore, the player can expect that the farther the ready-to-win pattern is from the ready-to-win line, the more the benefit will be given as a result of the giving correspondence. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the degree of attention caused by the positional relationship between the reach line and the reach corresponding pattern in a situation where the reach variation display is performed.

Feature C6. a pattern display means (symbol display device 161) for scrolling and displaying pattern strings corresponding to the variable display regions on a display screen (display screen G) on which a plurality of variable display regions (symbol strings Z1 to Z3) are set; ,
information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means (step in the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player a function to execute the processing of S501);
privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result;
In one game round based on the fulfillment of the acquisition condition, after the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, the unit display of stopping display or temporary stop display of the pattern is performed at least once. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means to stop and display the result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination in each game round (the function of executing the variation start process by the main control device 81, the effect control a function of executing a variable display process by the device 82),
A predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the award correspondence result on a preset effective line as a variation mode of the game round executed by the game round control means when the determination result of the award determination is the award correspondence result. is set to be displayed as a stop display or a temporary stop display,
By stopping the variable display of patterns in at least a part of the variable display area as the unit display, the ready-to-reach pattern combination that has the possibility of forming a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the given correspondence result is displayed on the effective line or with it. is a reach-variable display that forms a reach line by stopping and displaying on a different line, and performs a variable display of the pattern in the remaining variable display area under the condition that the reach line is formed,
At least as the reach fluctuation display,
The ready-to-win pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed, and by stopping on the ready-to-win line, the ready-to-win corresponding pattern forming the predetermined pattern combination together with the ready-to-win pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the ready-to-win line. Reach fluctuation display,
and a deviation reach fluctuation display for stop-displaying the ready-to-win pattern combination corresponding to the award correspondence result and stopping and displaying the ready-to-win correspondence pattern shifted upstream or downstream from the ready-to-win line in the scroll direction of the patterns. A gaming machine that
Based on the fact that the predetermined special information has been obtained by the information obtaining means, the unit display including the result mode displayed when the game round related to the predetermined special information is completed is executed. Special control means (steps S3805 to S3812, steps S3906 and function to execute the process of step S3914),
At least as the outlier reach unit display,
a first-type non-reach ready-to-reach unit display for stop-displaying the ready-to-reach compatible pattern in a first region away from the ready-to-reach line on the upstream side or downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern;
a second-type out-of-reach ready-to-reach unit display for stop-displaying the ready-to-reach compatible pattern in a second region further away from the first region to the upstream side or downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern from the first region;
is set and
the special control means, when the predetermined pattern combination is displayed via the outlier reach unit display, the second outlier reach unit display is more likely to be selected than the first outlier reach unit display, The game machine is characterized by comprising selection means set so that when the predetermined pattern combination is not displayed, the display of the first-class out-of-class reach unit display is more likely to be selected than the display of the second-class out-of-class reach unit display. Amusement machine.

When a privilege (for example, transition to a special game state more advantageous to the player than usual) is given to the player, the ready-to-win patterns are stop-displayed on the ready-to-win line, and a predetermined pattern combination is stop-displayed. In the situation where the reach fluctuation display is performed, for example, on the upstream side of the reach line, the player expects that the reach corresponding pattern will reach the reach line, and at the timing when the reach corresponding pattern reaches the reach line, the display is stopped as it is. expect to be

In such a configuration, it is assumed that the closer the ready-to-reach symbols come closer to the ready-to-reach line, the more attention is paid to the game, while the farther away the ready-to-reach symbols are from the reach line, the less attention is paid to the game. In addition, it is assumed that the degree of attention will drop at a stretch by shifting to the reach fluctuation display and stopping display of the reach corresponding pattern in front of the reach line.

In this respect, according to this feature, there is a case where the outreach reach unit display is performed before the transition unit display in which the stop result corresponding to the grant correspondence result is displayed is performed. Then, as this outlier reach unit display, compared with the first outlier reach fluctuation display in which the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in a first area away from the reach line on the downstream side or upstream side, the reach-corresponding pattern is displayed from the reach line. A higher selectivity is set for the second outlier reach fluctuation display that is stop-displayed in a second area that is further upstream or downstream than the first area. Therefore, the player can expect that the farther the ready-to-win pattern is from the ready-to-win line, the more the benefit will be given as a result of the giving correspondence. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the degree of attention caused by the positional relationship between the reach line and the reach corresponding pattern in a situation where the reach variation display is performed.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C5 or feature C6, wherein the first area and the second area are provided downstream of the reach line in the scroll direction of the pattern.

In a configuration in which a privilege is given when a reach-corresponding pattern stops on the reach line, especially after the reach-corresponding pattern passes the reach line, attention to the reach-variable display tends to decrease at once. In this respect, as shown in this feature, by providing the first area and the second area downstream of the reach line, it is possible to suppress the decrease in attention even after passing the reach line.

Feature C8. The obtained information storage means stores the special information obtained by the information obtaining means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit,
The grant determination means sequentially determines the grant of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination is stored before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at timing (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice in main controller 81);
When the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result, in the game round performed before the game round related to the special information to be identified by the destination identification means Special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the identification result of the destination identification means is performed by controlling the pattern display means so that the stop display mode becomes a predetermined display mode in which a specific combination of pictures is stopped and displayed. Means (function for executing the effect setting process for the pending notice in the effect control device 82),
A first display mode corresponding to the first type outlier reach unit display and a second display mode corresponding to the second type outlier reach unit display are set as the predetermined display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C7.

A special notification corresponding to predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to grant determination may be executed at a timing before the special information becomes subject to grant determination. be. In other words, for the player, it is not only a game to confirm the determination result of granting of the acquired special information, but also the order of granting determination is delayed when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means. With regard to the special information, a game of confirming or predicting the result in the case of becoming the target of grant determination according to the content of the special notification is added. This prevents the game from becoming monotonous.

In such a configuration, the above-mentioned special notification is performed as an off-reach unit display. That is, in the game round in which the special notification is performed, the player expects that the reach fluctuation display being executed corresponds to the grant correspondence result (not the outlier reach unit display). pay attention to times. On the other hand, even if the reach fluctuation display is the off-reach fluctuation display, if it is the off-reach unit display corresponding to the special notification, there is room for giving a privilege in subsequent game rounds.

As described in the feature C5 etc., the second type out reach corresponding pattern stops in the second area rather than the first type out reach corresponding pattern stop in the first area reach unit display is the subsequent game There is a high degree of expectation for transitioning to a special game state in a round (high selection rate). Therefore, as a player, in the game round in which the reach fluctuation display is performed, first of all, the player expects that the privilege will be given in the game round, otherwise, the reach corresponding pattern will be more than the first area. also expect to stop in the second region. By doing so, a novel game effect is realized in which the degree of attention to the reach variation display of the game round is increased depending on the game result of the subsequent game round.

Feature C9. When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, the game round control means causes the second type The gaming machine according to feature C8, further comprising a restricting means for restricting the performance of the out-reach unit display.

According to the above configuration, in the game cycle when the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, the display of the second type outlier reach unit display is restricted. In other words, in the game round in which the second type out-of-class reach unit display is performed, the special information related to the game round does not correspond to the result of grant correspondence, and the privilege is not granted in the current game round. Therefore, when the ready-to-win pattern passes through the reach line and then the first area, the expectation for awarding of the privilege in the game cycle may fade and the degree of attention may decrease. However, even in this case, as described in the feature C8, if the ready-to-win pattern stops in the second area, the expectation for awarding the privilege increases in subsequent game rounds, so the decrease in the degree of attention is preferably avoided. can.

Feature C10. When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, in the game round related to the special information that is the target of the grant correspondence result, the reach unit display out of the first type is selected by the special notification means. The gaming machine according to feature C8 or feature C9, wherein the probability that the reach unit display is selected is set to be higher than the probability that the second type outlier reach unit display is selected.

According to the above configuration, once the ready-to-win symbols stop in the first area in the out-ready-to-win unit display, the probability that a privilege is given in the next and subsequent game rounds is lower than when the ready-to-win symbols stop in the second area. However, the probability that the privilege will be given in this game round is high. In other words, from the relationship between the first area and the second area, if the reach-compatible pattern stops in the first area, the player has expectations for the current game round, and if the reach-compatible pattern stops in the second area, the next time and later. I have expectations for the game times. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention of the variable reach display in relation to the stop area of the reach corresponding pattern in the variable reach display.

Set so that a plurality of reach lines are simultaneously formed such that the first reach symbol combination is stop-displayed on the reach line of characteristic C11.1 and the second reach symbol combination is stop-displayed on the other reach line. is,
The reach variation display includes a first pattern that forms the predetermined pattern combination together with the first reach pattern combination, and a pattern different from the first pattern that is different from the first reach pattern combination and the predetermined pattern combination together with the second reach pattern combination. includes a variable display that is set so that both the second pattern that forms the
The special notification means, in a situation where the first reach pattern combination and the second reach pattern combination are stopped and displayed on the plurality of reach lines, the reach corresponding pattern of the reach line formed by the first pattern is the first reach pattern. Any one of features C8 to C10, characterized in that the reach-corresponding pattern of the reach line formed by the second pattern is set to stop in the second region when stopping in one region. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the first pattern stops in the first area in the multi-line reach, the second pattern stops in the second area. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation for the pattern that forms any reach line in the multiple line reach. In particular, as described in feature C8, stopping in the second area rather than stopping in the first area increases expectations for the next and subsequent game rounds. When the second pattern is stopped in the second area, it is expected that the reach variation display by the second pattern is performed in the next and subsequent game rounds rather than the reach variation display by the first pattern. degree increases. In this way, by associating the variable display of the current game round with the reach corresponding pattern of the reach variable display that can occur in the next and subsequent times, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention for the variable display of the next and subsequent game rounds. Become.

Feature C12. The special notification means is
When the identification result by the destination identification means becomes a predetermined identification result during the variable display from the start of the game round to the stop display, the current game determined by the stop mode determination means. a first determination means for determining whether or not the mode of the stop display of the times corresponds to the reach fluctuation display;
When it is determined by the first determination means that the variable reach display is supported, the determination means determines whether or not it is possible to change the mode of the stop display of the specific pattern row other than the pattern rows forming the reach line. When,
When the determination means determines that the mode of stop display can be changed, the mode of stop display of the specific pattern row being variably displayed is changed to the predetermined display mode according to the predetermined result of identification. The gaming machine according to any one of features C8 to C11, further comprising changing means for changing to a corresponding one.

As shown in the feature C8, in the case of performing an effect corresponding to the result of the destination identification by the reach variation display, if it is configured to change the specific pattern sequence when it is possible to change the specific pattern sequence, It is possible to reflect the identification result by the previous identification means in the stop display mode in the previous game round. As a result, it is possible to reduce restrictions on the special notification using the destination specifying means, and preferably increase the chances of executing the special notification.

Even when the effect is rewritten in this way, it is only necessary to rewrite the state of the stop display of the specific pattern row, so that it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in the control load accompanying the rewriting.

Feature C13. The pattern sequence variation display modes include a high discrimination variation mode and a low discrimination variation mode in which the identifiability of the pattern is relatively high or low, and these high discrimination variation mode and low discrimination variation mode are respectively. It is possible to switch for each pattern row,
Characteristic feature C12, characterized in that the determination means determines that the stop display mode of the specific pattern sequence can be changed when the variation display mode of the specific pattern sequence is the low identification variation mode. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the variation display is performed in the low identification variation mode in which the recognizability of the pattern is low, the mode of the stop display is changed. can be done.

In addition, if a special notification is made by such a change, it becomes unnecessary to adjust the execution period of the game cycle without reason, and it is possible to more preferably suppress an increase in the control load due to rewriting.

<Characteristic group D>
In addition, the invention described in feature group D below is "Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, have a game board with a game area formed on the front surface mounted on a frame. A lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state more advantageous to a player than a normal game state by winning a game ball shot based on an operation in a ball entry part provided in a game area. (For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-190511.) In this type of gaming machine, a game board is provided with a pattern change triggered by winning a prize in a ball entering section. By installing various game devices related to game effects, such as a symbol display device that displays symbols and movable accessories that suggest the result of a winning lottery by operating according to the variable display of symbols, etc. By adopting such a configuration, the movement of the game ball toward the entering ball section, the enjoyment of the benefits based on the winning, and the process (production) leading to the enjoyment of the benefits are integrated. In addition, there is also a game machine designed to increase the attention by arranging game parts such as decorative members in the game area for the purpose of improving the appearance of the game machine. In recent years, the enlargement of gaming machines has made it possible to produce more impactful presentations, and there are some that are intended to increase the attention of players." In the game machine, the fact that the movement of the game ball can be followed by the eye is itself a means of increasing interest in the game machine itself. In the case of coexistence of the game area (the area where the game balls flow) and the game equipment, etc., expansion of the game board itself can be an effective solution, for example. However, due to the fact that there are certain restrictions on the width of the game machine due to the relationship with the island facilities of the game hall, etc., it is actually difficult to deal with such measures. There is still room for improvement in the structure of the game machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game by aiming for the coexistence of the game, etc.".

Feature D1. A game board (game board 100) in which a game area (game area 103) in which game balls flow down is formed on the front surface;
Display means (symbol display device 161) arranged behind the game board and executing a predetermined display effect on the display screen (display screen G),
The game board has transparency at least in a portion facing the display screen, and is formed so that the display screen can be viewed through the facing portion,
Movable accessories (movable accessories 170 to 173, 310, 320) that are arranged between the game board and the display means and can be switched between a first state (for example, a shielded state) and a second state (for example, a non-shielded state) , 330, 340).

According to feature D1, the display screen can be viewed through the portion of the game board that faces the display screen. Since it is not necessary to form an opening for the display screen in the game board in order to ensure the visibility of the display screen, it is possible to suppress pressure on the game area where game balls flow down due to the guarantee of visibility. .

Here, as for the movable accessory, since the movable accessory is arranged behind the game board, there is no risk of collision between the game ball flowing down the game area and the movable accessory, and there is no restriction on the operation mode of the movable accessory. can be reduced. Also, since the movable accessory is arranged in front of the display means, the association between the motion of the movable accessory and the display effect by the display means is strengthened, and a dynamic effect in which both are integrated becomes possible.

As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming obsolete by securing a wide game area and enjoying the falling of the game balls, and at the same time, it is possible to integrally produce the effects by the movable accessories and the display means. It can contribute to increasing interest in machines.

It should be noted that "the movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means in the first state, and overlaps the display screen less in the second state than in the first state, or overlaps the display screen. By adopting a configuration in which "overlapping is avoided", it is possible to associate a change in the range in which the movable accessory and the display means overlap with the display effect.

Feature D2. The movable accessory has a movable body that is displaceable on the back side of the facing portion, and the movable body moves to the second position (for example, when the second state is switched to the first state). (non-shielded position) to a first position (e.g., shielded position) to change the overlapping state of the movable body with respect to the display screen,
The game according to feature D1, wherein a guide portion (for example, a guide groove or a rail) for guiding the movable body from the first position to the second position is provided on the back portion of the facing portion. machine.

According to feature D2, by providing the facing portion of the game board with the function of guiding the movable body, it is possible to stabilize the movement of the movable body (movable accessory).

For example, if the size of the movable body is increased or the range of movement of the movable body is set wider, the effect using the movable accessory can be made more impactful, thereby increasing the attention to the game machine. It is advantageous to do However, on the other hand, it is assumed that the movement of the movable body tends to become unstable. In this way, the unstable movement of the movable body causes malfunction and deterioration in appearance, and can be an obstacle to achieving the above effects. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences, and it is possible to preferably exhibit the performance function of the movable accessory.

In addition, for example, if the support position (holding position) of the movable accessory is placed at a position that does not overlap the display screen (specifically, the display area), by trying to move the movable body in front of the display screen , positional variations of the movable body tend to increase in a portion far from the support position. In this regard, if the game board has a facing portion and a guide portion is provided in this facing portion, the occurrence of such a problem can be suitably suppressed. In other words, the technical idea shown in this feature can be applied to a movable accessory provided with a movable body that is normally set to have a small overlap with the display screen and that is displaced so as to increase the overlap depending on the situation. This can contribute to the realization of a preferable configuration in which the performance function of the movable accessory can be exhibited stably.

Feature D3. A predetermined pattern visible from the front of the game machine is provided on the facing portion of the game board,
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the guide portion is formed so as to overlap the predetermined pattern from behind the predetermined pattern.

When the display screen is viewed through the game board, if the guide portion is conspicuous, the appearance of the game machine may be degraded. Therefore, by arranging the guide part behind the pattern formed on the game board (opposing part), the guide part is made inconspicuous, and the deterioration of the appearance described above can be suppressed.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the predetermined pattern is provided on a front portion of the facing portion.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to prevent the presence of the guide part from becoming a factor that makes it difficult to apply the predetermined pattern, and to allow the predetermined pattern and the guide part to coexist favorably on the facing portion of the game board. becomes.

Feature D5. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, grant determination means (executing step S501 in the main controller 81) determines whether or not the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player is met. function) and
a privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result; prepared,
The display means has a plurality of variable display areas (each pattern row Z1 to Z3) set on the display screen, and variably displays a pattern in each variable display area to display a pattern according to the result of the grant determination. It is configured to stop and display the combination of symbols on the activated line,
The gaming machine according to feature D3 or feature D4, wherein the predetermined pattern is formed along the activated line and teaches the activated line.

According to the feature D5, the guiding portion is camouflaged by the pattern that teaches the effective line, and the predetermined pattern and the guiding portion can be preferably coexisted.

Feature D6. Any one of characteristics D2 to D5, wherein the movable body is rotatably supported, and an engaging portion that engages with the guide portion is formed at the leading end of the rotation. The gaming machine described in 1.

When the movable body is configured to be rotatable, the swing width (for example, positional deviation) at the tip of the rotation tends to increase during the movement of the movable body. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the guide portion is guided by the guide portion at the turning tip portion (engagement portion) of the movable body, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned blurring and suitably stabilize the movement of the movable body.

Feature D7. Any one of characteristics D2 to D6, wherein the guide portion is configured to function as a support portion that supports the movable body at least when the movable body is arranged at the first position. 1. The game machine described in 1.

According to the feature D7, the posture at the first position can be stabilized by providing the guide portion with a support function.

Especially in combination with feature D6, the support load on the base end of rotation can be reduced by supporting the tip of rotation of the movable body. In addition, this configuration is also advantageous in suppressing positional deviation of the leading end of the rotation.

It should be noted that the facing portion and the guiding portion shown in features D2 to D7 are integrally and inseparably related to the presence of the movable body that operates behind the facing portion in order to exhibit the various effects described above.

Feature D8. By overlapping the display screen, the movable accessory is provided with a shielding function that reduces the visibility of the overlapped part,
Switching means (effect control device 82) for switching the movable accessory to the first state or the second state;
Detecting means (detection sensor 136a, detection sensor 136a, 136b);
By driving and controlling the switching means based on the detection result of the detection means, the switching control means for switching the movable accessory to the first state or the second state (execution of the process during fluctuation by the performance control device 82 The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the state of the movable accessory can be changed based on the detection result of the detection means, that is, based on the presence or absence of a game ball passing in front of the movable accessory. In this way, by switching the state of the movable accessory according to the movement of the game ball, for example, it is possible to provide a relationship between the movement of the game ball, the movement of the movable accessory, and the display content of the display screen.

Feature D9. The movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means in the first state, and overlaps the display screen less than in the first state or overlaps the display screen in the second state. It is configured to avoid
The switching control means has means for displacing the movable accessory from the first state to the second state based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. The gaming machine described in D8.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is detected by the detection means, the movable accessory changes from the first state to the second state, and the overlapping area between the movable accessory and the display means narrows. For example, by preventing the detected game ball from overlapping the movable accessory in the front-rear direction, the game ball flows down across the display means (display screen). By permitting the movement of the game ball in front of the display screen in this way, it is possible to associate the movement of the game ball with the display performance by the display means, for example.

Feature D10. The movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means in the first state, and overlaps the display screen less than in the first state or overlaps the display screen in the second state. It is configured to avoid
Characteristic D8, wherein the switching control means has means for switching the movable accessory from the second state to the first state based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Or the gaming machine according to feature D9.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is detected by the detection means, the movable accessory is switched from the second state to the first state, and the overlapping area between the movable accessory and the display means is widened. When the movable accessory is arranged in the first state, the visibility of the display means located behind is lowered, and the game ball flows down in the range overlapping the part of the display means with lowered visibility in the front and rear. This makes the action of the falling game ball stand out, and makes it easier to follow the movement of the game ball compared to the case where the game ball flows down with the display screen as the background.

Feature D11. A ball entrance that is provided in the game area and allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and a place where the game ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided with the same ball entrance in the game area Equipped with ball passages (front side ball passage 134, back side ball passage 143) that connect discharge ports leading to different locations,
The ball passage is formed at a position overlapping the movable accessory in the front-rear direction when the movable accessory is in the first state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D8 to D10, wherein the detection means detects a game ball passing through the ball passage.

According to the above configuration, the object to be detected by the detection means is limited to the game ball passing through the ball passage. In order to exhibit the effects shown in feature D8, etc., it is only necessary to set the operation of the movable accessory and the display contents of the display screen according to the positional relationship with this ball passage, and it is necessary to assume various flow-down modes of the game ball. do not have. This makes it possible to simplify the production design. In addition, since the presence or absence of the ball entering the ball entrance is reflected in the motion of the movable accessory, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the relationship between the movable accessory and the movement of the game ball.

Feature D12. A ball entry portion (actuation port 115) provided in the game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion; ,
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (a game by the main controller 81) function to execute state transition processing),
A guide portion is formed in the game area, which has a rolling area in which the game ball drawn out from the ball passage can roll, and guides the game ball on the rolling area to the ball entering section. The gaming machine according to feature D11, further comprising a stage section (stage 144).

According to the above configuration, by allowing the game ball to flow into the ball passage, the game ball is easily guided to the ball passage→rolling area→guide portion→ball entering portion. Entry into the ball entry section is associated with award decisions. By applying the configuration shown in feature D5 to such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the viewer to see the above-mentioned presentation from the relationship between the movable accessories and the display means and the movement of the game ball. can be suppressed from not being exhibited well.

Feature D13. The movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means in the first state, and overlaps the display screen less than in the first state or overlaps the display screen in the second state. It is configured to avoid
Characteristic D11 or Characteristic characterized in that the detection means is arranged in a portion on the upstream side of an area overlapping in the front-rear direction in the situation in which the movable accessory is arranged in the first state in the ball passage The gaming machine described in D12.

According to the above configuration, since the detection means is provided upstream of the area overlapping the movable accessory in the ball passage, the game ball entering the ball passage overlaps the movable accessory in the front-rear direction in the gaming machine. The existence of the game ball can be grasped before. As a result, it becomes possible to move the movable accessory before the game balls overlap each other, and a preferable configuration is realized in terms of performance.

Especially in combination with the feature D9, it becomes easy to make the game ball flow down in front of the exposed portion while the display screen is exposed. In addition, in combination with the feature D10, it becomes easy to let the game ball flow down in front of the movable accessory while the display means is shielded by the movable accessory.

Feature D14. The switching control means switches the state of the movable accessory based on detection of a predetermined number of game balls defined as a plurality of numbers by the detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of D13.

According to the above configuration, the detection of a predetermined number of game balls by the detection means is an operating condition for the movable accessory. The game ball will flow down so that it will be done. As a result, active participation in the game can be urged, contributing to increased attention to the game.

Feature D15. The display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of patterns on the display screen,
The plurality of types of symbols include a first symbol (specific symbol) and a second symbol (non-specified symbol) associated with a lower profit than the first symbol as symbols related to the profit of the player. and
The movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means in the first state, and overlaps the display screen less than in the first state or overlaps the display screen in the second state. It is configured to avoid
The movable accessory is configured to overlap at least one of the first pattern and the second pattern when the movable accessory is in the first state,
With respect to the first pattern and the second pattern that overlap with the movable accessory, the overlapping with the movable accessory is avoided, and the profit set for the pattern that does not overlap is played. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D14, characterized by comprising a means for giving to a player (a function of executing suspension notice control processing by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first pattern and the second pattern related to the profit of the player are displayed on the display screen, the second pattern is set so that the profit related to it is smaller than that of the first pattern. Therefore, it is considered that the player prefers to display the first pattern rather than the second pattern. Since the movable accessory is constructed so as to overlap these first and second patterns, when the first and second patterns are displayed on the display means, the player can determine which pattern is displayed. show interest in whether it is visible (visible) By adopting such a configuration, an effect is performed in which the benefits associated with the first pattern and the second pattern, respectively, the pattern overlapping the movable role in the front-rear direction, and the positional displacement of the movable role are associated. becomes possible. This can contribute to increasing the attention to the game.

Feature D16. The display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of patterns on the display screen, and is set to notify the player of profit-related information according to the types of the displayed patterns,
The movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means in the first state, and overlaps the display screen less than in the first state or overlaps the display screen in the second state. It is configured to avoid
The gaming machine includes a plurality of movable accessories,
When the plurality of movable accessories are in the first state, they overlap predetermined patterns displayed on the display means, and when they are in the second state, the predetermined patterns are avoided. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D15, characterized in that it is configured to:

According to the above configuration, the predetermined pattern overlaps the plurality of movable accessories in the first state, and the movable accessories are in the second state, thereby avoiding the weight. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that associates a predetermined pattern with the state of each movable accessory. By applying the technical idea shown in this feature to a configuration in which profit-related information is notified to the player according to the type of pattern displayed on the display means, attention to the game can be favorably increased.

<Characteristic group E>
In addition, the invention described in the following feature group E is "Some game machines such as pachinko machines have a game board with a game area formed on the front surface mounted on a frame. A lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state more advantageous to a player than a normal game state by winning a game ball shot based on an operation in a ball entry part provided in a game area. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-190511.) In this type of gaming machine, when a player wins a prize in a ball-entering section, the symbols are changed and displayed. Increased interest in gaming machines through the adoption of various gaming machines related to game production, such as movable accessories that indicate the results of winning or losing lotteries by operating in accordance with display devices and variable display of symbols. By adopting such a configuration, the movement of the game ball toward the entering ball section, the enjoyment of the benefits based on the winning, and the process (production) leading to the enjoyment of the benefits are integrated. In addition, there are some machines that aim to increase the attention by arranging game parts such as decorative members in the game area for the purpose of improving the appearance of the game machine.Especially in recent years. With regard to the background/techniques, "However, the above-mentioned types of games have the potential to increase the level of attention of players by enabling more impactful presentations by increasing the size of the above-mentioned gaming machines." In the game machine, the fact that the movement of the game ball can be followed by the eye is itself a means of increasing interest in the game machine itself. In the case of coexistence of the game area (the area where the game balls flow) and game machines, etc., expanding the game board itself, for example, can be an effective solution. However, in reality, it is difficult to deal with such problems due to the fact that there are certain restrictions on the width of the game machines due to the relationship with the island facilities of the game hall. There is still room for improvement in the structure of the game machine in terms of achieving the above."

Features E1. A pair of movable accessories (movable accessories 310, 320, etc.) provided to be openable and closable are provided,
Each of the movable accessories has a fan surface portion (fan surface portion 312, etc.) formed so as to spread toward the front side of the gaming machine when the movable accessory is in an open state,
In the open state, one end and the other end in the opening/closing direction are displaced in the front-rear direction and spread out, and in the closed state, the fan-face portion is folded so as to be overlapped in the front-rear direction,
Each of the movable accessories is arranged so that the positions in the front-rear direction are the same, and by being in the open state, a first specific region including the front end of the fan surface portion of one of the movable accessories. , and a second specific region including the rear end of the fan surface portion of the other movable accessory overlaps in the front and rear direction.

When the foldable movable accessory shown in feature E1 is mounted, the difference between the open state and the closed state can be clarified, but the increased thickness tends to restrict the arrangement space. It is assumed that such an inconvenience will become conspicuous by trying to cover a wide range with one movable accessory.

In this regard, as shown in this feature, there are two movable accessories, and the front and rear positions are aligned. area) and the second specific area of the fan surface of the other movable accessory (the area including the rear end of the fan surface) overlap in the front-back direction, thereby widening the coverage range. While achieving this, it is possible to suppress an increase in the overall thickness caused by overlapping of these specific regions. As a result, it is possible to secure the arrangement area and the operation area of the movable accessory in a limited space while widening the performance range using the movable accessory.

Feature E2. A pattern display means (pattern display device 161) having a display screen (display screen G) that is provided behind the movable accessory and performs a predetermined display effect,
When the movable accessory is in the open state, it is arranged so as to overlap the display screen in the front-rear direction, and the light from the display screen is irradiated to the front side of the gaming machine through the fan surface portion. cage,
The fan surface portion is formed with a bent portion (bent portion 312c, etc.) that serves as a starting point when being folded as the state is switched from the open state to the closed state. Flat portions (fixed portions 312a, etc.) with different directions are formed on both sides of the
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein at least one of the two flat portions is non-parallel to the display screen when the movable accessory is in the open state.

According to the above configuration, since the display screen and one of the flat portions are not parallel, the light from the display screen arranged behind is refracted by the flat portion, and the display screen is visible from the front of the gaming machine. You can change your gender. In this way, by causing a change in the visibility of the display screen through the movable accessory, it is possible to avoid obsolescence of the appearance when executing the display effect related to the movable accessory.

Feature E3. The fan surface portion has a plurality of elongated base portions (for example, rib portions 314a and 314b) that constitute the flat portion,
The base portions are arranged one on top of the other with their flat surfaces facing forward and backward, and are connected so as to be rotatable with one end in the longitudinal direction as the base end,
The game according to feature E2, characterized by comprising opening/closing means for opening/closing the movable accessory by rotating each base portion (function for executing processing during fluctuation by the effect control device 82). machine.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the open state and the closed state, that is, the range in which the movable accessory spreads can be widened, and the spread of the occupied space in the closed state can be minimized.

Feature E4. The fan surface portion includes a sheet member having the flat portion and a frame member forming a skeleton of the movable accessory,
The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the frame member is attached to a portion of the seat member that constitutes the base portion.

According to the above configuration, of the flat portions continuous across the bent portion, those that are not parallel to the display screen (that is, the portions that are parallel to the display screen) function as the base portion of the fan surface portion. When the base portions are stacked with their planes facing forward and backward, the thickness of the movable accessory in the forward and backward direction can be reduced. On the other hand, however, the non-parallel portions may transmit more light from the display screen than the non-parallel portions. In this regard, since the frame members overlap the parallel parts, it is possible to adjust the degree of light transmission by the frame members, and it is preferable that excessively direct light is emitted to the front of the game machine. can be avoided.

In addition, it is preferable that "the movable accessory is configured such that the opening/closing direction is parallel to the display screen." By applying the technical idea shown in this feature to such a configuration (a configuration in which the opening and closing direction is parallel to the display screen), it is possible to suppress unnecessary expansion of the arrangement area and the operation area of the movable accessory, and to create a visual effect on the fan surface. change.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the frame member is attached to the sheet member forming the base portion so that the edge portion of the frame member is along the bent portion.

According to the above configuration, when the movable accessory is changed from the open state to the closed state, deformation triggered by the bent portion of the fan surface portion is induced, and other portions are deformed, etc., so that the movable accessory is changed to the closed state. It is possible to suitably prevent the switching from being performed well and the deterioration of the appearance of the fan surface portion.

In particular, in the configuration in which the movable accessory is automatically opened and closed by the opening and closing means shown in feature E3, etc., there is a concern that the opening and closing function will not be performed smoothly due to bending at a position different from the preset bending position. be. In this regard, by applying the technical idea shown in this feature, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of such inconveniences even in the case of an automatic opening and closing type movable accessory, and suppress the deterioration of the opening and closing function due to repeated use. becomes possible.

Feature E6. The movable accessory has a transmission portion (gear 319) that transmits power from a driving portion (driving motor 313, etc.) to each of the base portions. Any one of the features E3 to E5, characterized in that one of the front and back parts of the movable accessory is used as a base end and the other base part rotates to open and close. 1. The game machine described in 1.

For example, with a common folding fan, when opening the folding fan, force is applied only to the rib portion, so opening and closing operations may not be performed smoothly. In this respect, according to this feature, since power is transmitted to each base portion via the transmission portion, opening and closing operations can be performed smoothly.

Feature E7. a game board (game board 100) provided in front of the pair of movable accessories and having a game area formed on the front surface in which game balls flow down;
A display means (symbol display device 161) provided behind the pair of movable accessories and having a display screen (display screen G) for performing a predetermined display effect. The game machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, the game board is provided in front of the movable accessory, and the display screen is provided behind the movable accessory. Even in this case, the pair of movable accessories are installed so that the thickness of the installation area is thin as shown in feature E1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the game board and the display screen from becoming extremely large, and to arrange the movable accessories while suppressing the deterioration of the visibility of the display screen.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein at least a portion of the game board facing the display screen is transparent, and the display screen is visible through the facing portion.

According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to form an opening in the game board to ensure the visibility of the display screen, and it is possible to set a wide game area while ensuring the visibility of the display screen. In particular, as described in feature E3 and the like, since the pair of movable accessories are installed so as to be thin, it is possible to suppress the spread of the distance between the game board and the display screen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display screen from moving away from the player due to an increase in the gap between the display screen and the game board.

Feature F1. A pattern display means (pattern display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player. a function to execute the process of step S501);
privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result;
Prior to the grant determination by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is performed. Displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination result of (1) and ending the variable display of the pattern is regarded as one of the game rounds, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is used for each game round a game cycle control means (a function of executing a variation start process in the main control device 81 and a function of executing a variation display control process in the effect control device 82) for controlling the pattern display means so that the variation display of the pattern is performed; Amusement machines equipped with
The game round control means determines, for each game round, a stop mode determination means (effect function of executing a process for starting fluctuation in the control device 82), and when the fluctuation display of the pattern is performed in each game round, the pattern is stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means, and the game is played. to end the variable display,
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination is stored before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at timing (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice in main controller 81);
When the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result, in the game round performed before the game round related to the special information to be identified by the destination identification means Special notification means (suspension notice in production control device 82) for performing special notification (suspension notice) corresponding to the identification result of the destination identification means by controlling the pattern display means so that the stop mode becomes a predetermined special stop mode A function to execute the effect setting process for
The stop mode determination means determines mode information so that the stop mode of the pattern is the special stop mode based on the establishment of a predetermined condition regardless of the identification result by the destination identification means ( It has a function of executing a non-effective notice effect such as step S1023 by the effect control device 82),
The special notification means is a post-determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special notification based on the mode information determined by the previous determination means. A game machine characterized by having a function to play.

According to the feature F1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the provision determination is given at a timing before the special information is subject to the provision determination. may be executed in As a result, for the player, not only is the game for confirming the determination result of granting of the acquired special information, but if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the order in which granting determination is made can be determined. For the later special information, a game of confirming or predicting the result when the special information is to be given according to the content of the special notification is added, thereby diversifying the game.

In particular, in this feature, the mode information is determined by the previous determination means so as to be the special stop mode based on the establishment of the predetermined condition regardless of the result of the determination by the previous determination means. In this case, the post-determining means determines whether or not to execute the special notification based on the mode information. With such a configuration, in the configuration in which the stop mode is determined at the start of the variable display of the game cycle, when the first specifying means specifies during the execution of the variable display, the game in which the variable display is being performed The special notification can be executed without changing the stop mode at times. As a result, it is possible to suppress the change in the variable display time and the local increase in the processing load due to the change in the stop mode, and to execute the special notification suitably.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

81... main control device, 82... performance control device, 100... game board, 103... game area, 115... operating opening, 130... center frame, 136a... detection sensor, 136b... detection sensor, 143... back side ball passage, 153 170 First movable accessory 171 Second movable accessory 172 Third movable accessory 173 Fourth movable accessory 202 MPU 212 Display control device 242 MPU 243 ROM 300 Movable accessory device 310 Upper right movable accessory 314a Front rib portion 314b Rear rib portion 320 Movable accessory 324a Front rib portion 324b Rear rib Part 330... Upper left movable accessory 334a... Front side rib part 334b... Rear side rib part 340... Left lower movable accessory 344a... Front side rib part 344b... Rear side rib part.

Claims (1)

a pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of pattern rows on a display screen;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
grant determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the obtained information storage means corresponds to a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result;
Prior to the grant determination by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, and the grant determination is performed. Displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination result of (1) and ending the variable display of the pattern is regarded as one of the game rounds, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is used for each game round game cycle control means for controlling the pattern display means so as to perform variable display of patterns;
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination is stored before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination. a destination identifying means for identifying in timing;
When the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result, in the game round performed before the game round related to the special information to be identified by the destination identification means, the destination identification special notification means for performing special notification corresponding to the identification result of the means;
with
The special notification means is
Execution means capable of executing a plurality of special notifications in one game cycle for one piece of special information for which the predetermined identification result has been identified by the destination identification means;
Among the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, based on the number of special information to be the target of the grant determination before the special information that triggered the special notification, in one game round means for setting the execution number of the special notification to be executed by the execution means;
and
The execution means is capable of executing a plurality of the special notifications in a predetermined game cycle after the game cycle being executed when the special information that triggered the special notification is acquired. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images